(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Children's Library | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "Lycoming College catalog"

-Jts^!! 



<-'. ■«• 










Ei 



^f^ i;r^7s:^ [^llf^^ba i!g:^-8:Tl^&r^ 



m 



Tz 



• ;i) 



HHSEZSEEiESlEi 



mn 




^^^a^^^ra 



iZlZl 



'.t - • . f 



I .'>••'*'•"•»'>».' 



i^/ifi^ /pji^rte 



nEE 



II I I 



r 




i 



^' 



^A-.-"- 



•». • 5-. 



]m 



r-:- 



it^-ll -^^ II 



. 11 -• >li^-4 



E 






EO 



IB 



U 



^s^TlFn'^ 



Timr 



-> 11... .11 



II ir 



TTTnrr 



Communicating with Lycoming College 

Please address specific inquiries as follows: 

Dean of Admissions and Financial Aid 

Admissions; requests for publications; financial assistance. 

Treasurer: 

Payment of bills; expenses. 

Director of Financial Aid: 
Scholarships and loan funds; financial assistance. 

Dean of the College: 

Academic programs; faculty; faculty activities. 

Dean of Student Services: 

Student activities; residence halls; religious life; health services; academic 
support services. 

Registrar: 

Student records; transcript requests; academic policies. 

Career Development Center: 

Career counseling; employment opportunities. 

Executive Director of Institutional Advancement 
Institutional relations; annual fund; gift programs. 

Director of Alumni Relations 
Alumni information. 

Director of Public Relations: 

Public information; publications; sports information. 

All correspondence should be addressed to: 
Lycoming College 
Williamsport, Pennsylvania 17701-5192 

The College telephone number is (717) 326-1951. 



Visitors 

Lycoming welcomes visitors to the campus. If you would like a guided tour, call 
the Office of Admissions before your visit to arrange a mutually convenient time. 



Lycoming College welcomes applications from prospective students regardless of age, sex. race, relig- 
ion, handicap, finances, national or ethnic origin, or color. Lycoming does not discriminate on the 
basis of age, sex, race, religion, handicap, finances, national or ethnic origin, or color in the adminis- 
tration of any of its policies and programs. 




LYCOMING COLLEGE 

Catalog 1984-85 



Contents 

Welcome to Lycoming 3 

The Academic Program 5 

The Curriculum 20 

Student Services 58 

Admission 60 

Financial Matters 62 

The Campus 66 

Academic Calendar, 1984-1985 68 

Directory 69 

The Alumni Association 77 

Index 78 



Welcome to Lycoming 



Lycoming is an independent, coeduca- 
tional college dedicated to providing 
the type of learning that can be used 
for a lifetime — the liberal arts and 
sciences. 

Lycoming's academic relevance de- 
rives from its enduring commitment to 
the value of this type of education, as 
offered by a superior teaching faculty. 
The College's principal aim is to help 
students develop a central core of inte- 
grated values, skill, information, and 
strategies while they learn to commu- 
nicate, reason, make decisions, under- 
stand, and use their imagination. This 
type of education can lead to produc- 
tive and fulfilling lives in many fields 
while allowing lifelong growth and de- 
velopment. 

Lycoming awards bachelor of arts 
degrees in 30 major fields, a bachelor 
of fine arts degree in sculpture, and a 
bachelor of science degree in nursing. 
The curriculum is challenging. Because 
it is built upon the two principles of 
the liberal arts known as distribution 
and concentration, it allows students 
to study in breadth and depth. 

Students who have special interests 
not met entirely by a major field can 
design their own majors. Or, if they 
are interested in teaching, medicine, 
law, dentistry, or the ministry, they can 



take courses needed to enter their ad- 
vanced study. 

Students also can study engineering, 
forestry or environmental studies, po- 
diatric medicine, optometry, medical 
technology, and sculpture through co- 
operative programs operated by Ly- 
coming with other colleges and univer- 
sities. Or, they can study abroad or in 
Harrisburg, Pa., Washington, D.C., 
or New York City through other off- 
campus study programs. 

Most students complete their pro- 
gram of study in four years, usually by 
taking four courses each fall and spring 
semester. But students also can take 
one course during Lycoming's May 
term, or two courses during the sum- 
mer term. 

Recognizing students' concerns about 
careers, Lycoming offers extensive 
counseling through the Career Devel- 
opment Center and advisory commit- 
tees for prelaw, prehealth professions, 
and premedical students. The College 
also operates a wide-ranging intern- 
ship program that allows students to 
earn academic credit while working at 
area businesses, government offices, 
and nonprofit organizations. 

Lycoming's ratio of faculty to stu- 
dents is 14 to one, which means that 
most classes are small and there is 




abundant opportunity for individual 
attention. All faculty members teach. 
More than 70 percent of Lycoming's 
faculty hold the highest degrees in 
their fields from the nation's outstand- 
ing colleges and universities. And, fac- 
ulty members take their advising seri- 
ously. They care about students, and 
encourage and guide them so they re- 
ceive the education they want. 

Eighteen buildings sit on Lycoming's 
main campus. Most of them have been 
built since 1950. The modern buildings 
include the eight residence halls; the li- 
brary; the Academic Center, which 
houses the Arena Theatre, planetari- 
um, computer center, and art gallery; 
the student union; the physical educa- 
tion/recreation center, including a six- 
lane, 25-yard pool; a completely reno- 
vated fine arts center with excellent fa- 
cilities to accommodate sculpture, 
painting, drawing, printmaking, ce- 
ramics and photography; and a music 
building, which houses individual mu- 
sic practice rooms and an electronic- 
music studio. 

Lycoming houses approximately 900 
of its 1,250 students in the residence 
halls, which include double and single 
rooms. Most students find the campus 
friendly and comfortable, with all of 
the buildings easy to reach from any- 
where on campus. Students come from 
a variety of economic classes, religious 
beliefs, and geographic areas, although 
most students call Pennsylvania, New 
Jersey, or New York their home. They 
work and play together in an atmos- 
phere of respect and tolerance. 

The College offers a variety of ex- 
tracurricular activities. Student gov- 
ernment groups help to plan campus 
activities and social events. Numerous 
clubs, honor societies, social fraterni- 
ties and sororities, the student newspa- 
per, yearbook and literary magazine, 
and the band and widely acclaimed 
choir meet other student interests. Stu- 
dents who like to perform or compete 
can act on the Arena Theatre stage or 
play on intercollegiate or intramural 
sports teams. Intercollegiate teams for 
men include football, soccer, basket- 
ball, wrestling, tennis, golf, swim- 



ming, track and field, and cross coun- 
try. Intercollegiate teams for women 
include basketball, tennis, field hockey, 
swimming, track and field, and cross 
country. 

In addition, students who Hke hik- 
ing, backpacking, skiing, camping, 
fishing, hunting, kayaking, spelunk- 
ing, and other outdoor sports will find 
Lycoming's location ideal. 

Lycoming is situated on a slight 
prominence near downtown Williams- 
port, a small city nestled along the 
West Branch of the Susquehanna River 
in northcentral Pennsylvania's rolling 
hills and valleys. Yet, the College is 
within a four-hour drive of metropoli- 
tan centers such as New York City, 
Philadelphia, Pittsburgh, Washington, 
D.C., Baltimore, Syracuse, Rochester, 
and the New Jersey shore points. The 



Williamsport-metro area is home to 
about 75,000 persons. 

Lycoming enjoys a relationship with 
The United Methodist Church. It sup- 
ports the Methodist tradition of pro- 
viding an education for persons of all 
faiths. 

Fully accredited, Lycoming is a 
member of the Middle States Associa- 
tion of Colleges and Schools, and the 
University Senate of The United Meth- 
odist Church. It is a member of the 
Association of American Colleges, the 
Pennsylvania Association of Colleges 
and Universities, the Commission for 
Independent Colleges and Universi- 
ties, the National Commission on Ac- 
crediting, and the National Associa- 
tion of Schools and Colleges of The 
United Methodist Church. 



HISTORY 

Lycoming College was founded in 1812 
as the Williamsport Academy, an ele- 
mentary and secondary school. Thirty- 
six years later, the academy became the 
Williamsport Dickinson Seminary un- 
der the patronage of The Methodist 
Episcopal Church. The seminary oper- 
ated as a private boarding school until 
1929, when a college curriculum was 
added and it became the Williamsport 
Dickinson Seminary and Junior Col- 
lege. In 1947, the junior college became 
a four-year degree-granting college of 
liberal arts and sciences. It adopted the 
name Lycoming, derived from the In- 
dian word "lacomic," meaning "Great 
Stream." The word Lycoming has been 
common to northcentral Pennsylvania 
since colonial days. 




Academic Program 



THE BACHELOR OF ARTS 
DEGREE 

Lycoming is committed to the princi- 
ple that a liberal arts education is the 
best hope for an enlightened citizenry. 
Consequently, the bachelor of arts de- 
gree is conferred upon the student who 
has completed an educational program 
incorporating the two principles of the 
liberal arts known as distribution and 
concentration. The objective of the dis- 
tribution principle is to insure that the 
student achieves breadth in learning 
through the study of the major dimen- 
sions of human inquiry: the humani- 
ties, the social sciences, and the natu- 
ral sciences. The objective of the con- 
centration principle is to provide depth 
of learning through completion of a 
program of study in a given discipline 
or subject area known as the major. 



REQUIREMENTS FOR THE 
BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE 

Every degree candidate is expected to 
complete the following requirements 
in order to qualify for graduation: 

— complete the distribution pro- 
gram. 

— complete a major consisting of at 
least eight courses while achiev- 
ing a minimum grade point aver- 
age of 2.0 in those courses. 

— earn one year of credit in physi- 
cal education. All students must 
demonstrate competence in swim- 
ming. (Medical exemptions may 
be granted by the College physi- 
cian after an examination and re- 
view of the student's medical his- 
tory and family physician's re- 
port.) 

— pass a minimum of 128 semester 
hours (32 unit courses) with a 
minimum cumulative average of 
2.0. Additional credits beyond 
128 semester hours may be com- 
pleted provided the minimum 2.0 
cumulative average is maintained. 

— complete in residence the final 
eight courses offered for the de- 



gree at Lycoming. 

— satisfy all financial obligations 
incurred at the College. 

— complete the above requirements 
within seven years of continuous 
enrollment following the date of 
matriculation. 

All exemptions or waivers of specif- 
ic requirements are made by the Com- 
mittee on Academic Standing. 



THE BACHELOR OF FINE ARTS 
DEGREE 

The bachelor of fine arts degree is spe- 
cifically designed to train professional 
artists. The BFA in sculpture is a syn- 
thesis of three diverse forms of educa- 
tion: a studio art program that em- 
phasizes the skills and concepts of the 
visual language; an apprenticeship that 
takes technical expertise as the depar- 
ture point, and the scholastic method 
employed in both art history and the 
general-education component. 



REQUIREMENTS FOR THE 
BACHELOR OF FINE ARTS 
DEGREE 

Every BFA degree candidate is expect- 
ed to complete the following require- 
ments in order to qualify for gradua- 
tion: 

— complete the 12-course Art De- 
partment course of study. 

— complete the distribution pro- 
gram. 

— complete a total of 32 course 
units achieving a minimum grade 
point average of 2.0 in those 
courses taken within the College. 

— complete one of the field speciali- 
zation apprenticeships at the 
Johnson Atelier Technical Insti- 
tute of Sculpture. 

— earn one year of credit in physi- 
cal education. All students must 
demonstrate competence in swim- 
ming. (Medical exemptions may 
be granted by the College physi- 



cian after an examination and re- 
view of the student's medical his- 
tory and family physician's re- 
port.) 

— complete in residence the final 
eight courses offered for the de- 
gree at Lycoming. 

— satisfy all financial obligations 
incurred at the College. 

— have a public exhibition of origi- 
nal art work and make an oral 
defense. 



THE BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN 
NURSING DEGREE 

The program of study leading to the 
bachelor of science in nursing degree is 
designed to prepare men and women 
as beginning practitioners of profes- 
sional nursing, qualified for first-level 
positions in a variety of health settings 
or for graduate study in nursing. Upon 
satisfactory completion of the pro- 
gram, a graduate is eligible to write the 
State Board of Nursing examination 
for licensure as a registered nurse. The 
goal of the program is to develop a lib- 
erally educated and self-directed indi- 
vidual who is prepared to contribute to 
the welfare of the nation through the 
practice of professional nursing which 
supports the promotion and restora- 
tion of health of individuals and fami- 
lies in a variety of settings. 



REQUIREMENTS FOR THE 
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN 
NURSING DEGREE 

Every BSN degree candidate is expect- 
ed to complete the following require- 
ments in order to qualify for gradua- 
tion: 

— complete the 13 course major with 
a minimum cumulative average of 
2.0, including the required May 
term following the junior year. 

— complete the distribution require- 
ment as modified for the BSN 
degree. 

— complete a minimum of 128 se- 



mester hours (32 units) with a 
minimum cumulative average of 
2.0. 

— earn one year of credit in physical 
education. All students must de- 
monstrate competence in swim- 
ming. (Medical exemption may be 
granted by the College physician 
after an examination and review 
of the student's medical history 
and family physician's report.) 

— complete in residence the final 
eight courses offered for the de- 
gree at Lycoming. 

— satisfy all financial obligations 
incurred at the College. 

— complete the degree requirements 
within a five-year period after 
admission to the nursing major. 
Candidates who are unable to 
meet this requirement must peti- 
tion for an extension. 



THE DISTRIBUTION PROGRAM 

A course can be used to satisfy only 
one distribution requirement. Courses 
for which a grade of "S" is recorded 
may not be used toward the fulfillment 
of the distribution requirements. (Re- 
fer to page 10 for an explanation of the 
grading system.) A course in any of 
the following distribution require- 
ments refers to a full-unit (four semes- 
ter hours) course taken at Lycoming, 
any appropriate combination of frac- 
tional unit courses taken at Lycoming 
which accumulate to four semester 
hours, or any single course of three or 
more semester hours transferred from 
another institution. For the BSN de- 
gree, see special modified distribution 
requirements as listed below. 

English — All students are required 
to pass English 6 and one other Eng- 
lish course, excluding English 3 and 5. 
English 6 should be taken during the 
freshman year and must be taken no 
later than the second semester (usually 
the spring semester) of the sophomore 
year. In addition, all students who 
have not been exempted from English 
5 must receive a mark of "Satisfacto- 



ry" in English 5 before being permitted 
to enroll in English 6. Students are 
placed in English 5 or 6 on the basis of 
their performance on the Achievement 
Examination in English Composition. 
English 3 may not be used to satisfy 
the distribution requirement in Eng- 
lish. 

Foreign Language or Mathematics — 

Students are required to meet a mini- 
mum basic requirement in either a for- 
eign language or the mathematical sci- 
ences. 

Foreign Language. Students may 
choose from among French, German, 
Greek, Hebrew, or Spanish and are re- 
quired to pass two courses on the inter- 
mediate or higher course level. Place- 
ment at the appropriate course level 
will be determined by the faculty of 
the Department of Foreign Languages 
and Literatures. Students who have 
completed two or more years of a giv- 
en language in high school are not ad- 
mitted for credit to the elementary 
course in the same foreign language 
except by written permission of the 
chairman of the department. French 
28 and Spanish 32 will meet part of this 
requirement only if the section taught 
in the language is completed. 

Mathematics. Students are required 
to demonstrate competence in basic al- 
gebra and to pass three units of mathe- 
matical science other than Mathemat- 
ics 5. Competence in basic algebra 
may be demonstrated either by passing 
the basic algebra section of the Mathe- 
matics Placement Examination or by 
passing Mathematics 5. By demon- 
strating higher competence on the 
Mathematics Placement Examination, 
students may reduce the requirement 
to two units of mathematical science. 
No more than one unit may be taken 
in computer science. 

Religion or Philosophy — Students 
are required to pass two courses in 
either religion or philosophy. Any two 
religion courses may be used to fulfill 
the philosophy/religion distribution 
requirement, with this exception: only 
one course from the combination Re- 



ligion 20-21 may be selected for distri- 
bution. 

Fine Arts — Students are required to 
pass two courses as indicated in art, 
literature, music, or theatre. 

An. Any two courses. 

Literature. Any two literature cours- 
es selected from the offerings of the 
Departments of English and Foreign 
Languages and Literatures (French, 
German, or Spanish). 

Music. Any combination of music 
offerings totaling the equivalent of 
eight semester hours, for example: 

— a course or courses from those 
numbered Music 10 through Mu- 
sic 46. 

— applied music (private lessons) 
and/or ensemble (orchestra, choir, 
band) earned fractionally as fol- 
lows: 

(1) for private lessons (Music 60 
through 66) a one-half hour 
lesson per week earns one- 
half hour of credit; a one- 
hour lesson earns one hour of 
credit. Note: There are extra 
fees for these lessons. (For de- 
tails see Department of Music 
course offerings described else- 
where in this catalog.) 

(2) credit may be earned for par- 
ticipation in the Susquehanna 
Valley Symphony Orchestra 
(Music 67), the College choir 
(Music 68) and/or band (Mu- 
sic 69); however, a student 
may earn no more than one 
hour each semester even 
though participating in orches- 
tra, choir, and/or band. (For 
further details, please see the 
Department of Music offer- 
ings elsewhere in this catalog.) 

Theatre. The fine arts distribution 
requirement may be satisfied by select- 
ing any two of the following recom- 
mended courses: Theatre 10, 11, 14, 18, 
32, 33, or other courses with the con- 
sent of the instructor. 

Natural Science — Students are re- 
quired to pass any two courses in one 



of the following disciplines: astrono- 
my and physics, biology, or chemistry. 

History and Social Science — Stu- 
dents are required to pass two courses 
as indicated in economics, history, po- 
litical science, psychology, or sociology 
/anthropology. 

Economics. Any two courses. 

History. Any two courses, except 
History 31. 

Political Science. Any two courses. 

Psychology. Psychology 10 and one 
other course. 

Sociology/A nthropology. Sociology 
/Anthropology 10 plus another course. 



THE DISTRIBUTION PROGRAM 
FOR THE BSN DEGREE 

English — standard requirement as 

shown above 
Mathematical Sciences — compe- 
tence in basic algebra as demon- 
strated by completion of, or ex- 
emption from Math 5; Mathe- 
matics 13; and Computer Science 
15 
Religion and Philosophy — Relig- 
ion 20 and Philosophy 19 
Fine Arts/Foreign Language — 
two courses from one department 
as follows: 

Art — any two (2) courses 
Literature — any two literature 
courses selected from the de- 
partments of English and For- 
eign Languages and Literatures 
Music — any combination of eight 
(8) credits, including applied 
music, ensemble, and music de- 
partment courses 
Theatre — any two (2) courses 
from among Theatre 10, 11, 14, 
18, 32, 33, or other courses with 
the consent of the instructor. 
Language — any two (2) courses 
at the intermediate or higher 
level. No student who has had 
two or more years of a given 
foreign language in high school 
shall be admitted to the elemen- 
tary courses in that same lan- 
guage for credit, except by writ- 



ten permission of the chairman 
of the department. 

Natural Science — Chemistry 8, 15 

Social Science — Psychology 10 and 
17; Sociology and Anthropology 
— one from among Soc 10, 14, 
20, 28, and 29. 

Physical Education — standard re- 
quirement as shown on page 6. 

Scholar Program — Requirements 
for the Scholar Program for the 
B.S.N, can be obtained from ei- 
ther the Scholar Council or the 
Department of Nursing. 



THE MAJOR 

Students are required to complete a 
series of courses in one departmental 
or interdisciplinary (established or in- 
dividual) major. Specific course re- 
quirements for each major offered by 
the College are listed in the curriculum 
section of this catalog. Students must 
earn a 2.0 or higher grade-point aver- 
age in those courses stipulated as com- 
prising the major. (This requirement is 
not met by averaging the grades for all 
courses completed in the major depart- 
ment.) Students must declare a major 
by the beginning of their junior year. 
Departmental and established interdis- 
ciplinary majors are declared in the 
Office of the Registrar, whereas indi- 
vidual interdisciplinary majors must 
be approved by the Committee on 
Curriculum Development. Students 
may complete more than one major, 
each of which will be recorded on the 
transcript. Students may be removed 
from major status if they are not mak- 
ing satisfactory progress in the major. 
This action is taken by the Dean of the 
College upon the recommendation of 
the department, coordinating commit- 
tee (for established interdisciplinary 
majors), or Curriculum Development 
Committee (for individual interdisci- 
plinary majors). The decision of the 
Dean of the College may be appealed 
to the Academic Standing Committee 
by the student involved or the recom- 
mending department or committee. 



Departmental Majors — Departmen- 
tal majors are available in the follow- 
ing areas: 

Accounting 

Art 

Astronomy 

Biology 

Business Administration 

Chemistry 

Computer Science 

Economics 

English 

Foreign Languages and Literatures 

French, German, Spanish 
History 
Mathematics 
Music 
Nursing 
Philosophy 
Physics 

Political Science 
Psychology 
Religion 

Sociology/Anthropology 
Theatre 

Established Interdisciplinary Ma- 
jors — The following established inter- 
disciplinary majors include course 
work in two or more departments: 

Accounting-Mathematical Sciences 

American Studies 

Criminal Justice 

International Studies 

Literature 

Mass Communication 

Near East Culture and Archaeology 



Individual Interdisciplinary Majors 

— Students may design a major that is 
unique to their needs and objectives 
and which combines course work in 
more than one department. This ma- 
jor is developed in consultation with 
the student's faculty adviser and with a 
panel of faculty members from each 
of the sponsoring departments. The 
application is acted upon by the Cur- 
riculum Development Committee. The 
major normally consists of 10 courses 
beyond those taken to satisfy the dis- 
tribution requirements. Students are 



expected to complete at least six 
courses at the junior or senior level. 
Examples of individual interdisciplin- 
ary majors are Racial and Cultural 
Minorities, Illustration in the Print 
Medium, Environmental Law, Adver- 
tising, Art/ History, Art/Business, Hu- 
man Behavior, and Images of Man. 

Major in Sculpture Leading to Bache- 
lor of Fine Arts Degree — Through a 
cooperative program with the Johnson 
Atelier Technical Institute of Sculpture, 
Princeton, New Jersey, students may 
earn a BFA degree in sculpture. The 
major consists of a core academic pro- 
gram, a course of study in art, elective 
courses, and an apprenticeship at the 
Johnson Atelier. 



THE MINOR 

The College awards two kinds of mi- 
nors, departmental and interdisciplin- 
ary, in recognition of concentrated 
course work in an area other than the 
student's major. All minors are subject 
to the following limitations: 

— a minor must include at least two 
courses which are not counted in 
the student's major. 

— a student may receive at most 
two minors. 

— students with two majors may re- 
ceive only one minor; students 
with three majors may not re- 
ceive a minor. 

— students may not receive a minor 
in their major discipline unless 
their major discipline is Art and 
the minor is Art History. (A dis- 
cipline is any course of study in 
which a student can major. 
Tracks within majors are not sep- 
arate disciplines.) 

— a student may not receive a minor 
unless his average in the courses 
which count for his minor is a 
minimum of 2.00. 

— courses taken S/U may not be 
counted toward a minor. 

Students must declare their intention 



to minor by signing a form available in 
the Registrar's Office, getting required 
faculty signatures, and returning the 
completed form to the Records Room. 
When students complete a minor, 
the title will be indicated on their offi- 
cial transcript. Students must meet the 
requirements for the minor which are 
in effect at the time they declare a mi- 
nor or which are in effect subsequent 
to that time and before they graduate. 

Departmental Minors — Require- 
ments for a departmental minor vary 
from department to department. Stu- 
dents interested in pursuing a depart- 
mental minor should consult that de- 
partment for its policy regarding mi- 
nors. 

Departmental minors are available 
in the following areas: 
ACCOUNTING 

Financial Accounting 

Managerial Accounting 

Federal Income Tax 
ART 

Art History 

Sculpture 

Painting 
BIOLOGY 
CHEMISTRY 
ECONOMICS 
ENGLISH 

English Literature 

Writing 
FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND 

LITERATURES 

French 

German 

Spanish 
HISTORY 

American History 

European History 

History 
MASS COMMUNICATION 
MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES 

Computer Science 

Mathematics 
PHILOSOPHY 

Philosophy 

Philosophy and Law 

Philosophy and Science 

The History of Philosophy 
POLITICAL SCIENCE 

Political Science 



Foreign Affairs 

Legal Studies 
PSYCHOLOGY 
RELIGION 
SOCIOLOGY/ANTHROPOLOGY 

Sociological & Anthropological 
Views of Religion 
THEATRE 

Theatre History & Literature 

Performance 

Technical Theatre 

Interdisciplinary Minors — Interdisci- 
plinary minors include coursework in 
two or more departments. Students in- 
terested in interdiscipHnary minors 
should consult the faculty coordinator 
of that minor. 



ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT 

One advantage of a small college is the 
rich experience gained by the close as- 
sociation of students and faculty. The 
advisement program at Lycoming ena- 
bles students to discuss academic and 
other problems as well as opportunities 
with faculty advisers, instructors, and 
the staffs of the Dean of the College 
and the Dean of Student Services. 

During the summer orientation, 
freshmen are assigned a faculty adviser 
who is prepared to assist new students 
with the challenges of an unfamiliar 
social and academic environment. All 
students are required to have a faculty 
adviser. When students have declared 
a major, they are then assigned an ad- 
viser from within the major depart- 
ment or program. 

Although the advisement program 
is an important part of the Lycoming 
academic experience, students are ex- 
pected to accept full responsibility for 
their academic programs, including 
satisfactory completion of program 
and College-wide requirements. 

Special advising for selected profes- 
sions is provided by the health, legal, 
and theological professions advisory 
committees. Students interested in 
these professions should register with 
the appropriate committee during their 
first semester of enrollment at Lycom- 



ing or immediately after they decide to 
enter these professions. 

Preparation for Health Professions 

— The program of pre-professional 
education for the health professions 
(allopathic, dental, osteopathic, podi- 
atric and veterinary medicine, optome- 
try, and pharmacy) is organized around 
a sound foundation in biology, chemis- 
try, mathematics, and physics and a 
wide range of subject matter from the 
humanities, social sciences, and fine 
arts. At least three years of undergrad- 
uate study is recommended before en- 
try into a professional school; the nor- 
mal procedure is to complete the bach- 
elor of arts degree. 

Students interested in one of the 
health professions or in an allied 
health career should make their inten- 
tions known to the admissions office 
when applying and to the Health Pro- 
fessions Advisory Committee (HPAC) 
during their first semester. The com- 
mittee advises students concerning 
preparation for and application to 
health-professions schools. All pre- 
health professions students are invited to 
join the student Pre-Health Professions 
Association. (See also descriptions of 
the nursing program and of the coop- 
erative programs in pediatric medicine, 
optometry, and medical technology.) 

Preparation for Legal Professions 

— Lycoming offers a strong academic 
preparation for students interested in 
law as a profession. Admission to law 
school is not predicated upon a partic- 
ular major or area of study; rather, a 
student is encouraged to design a course 
of study (traditional or interdisciplin- 
ary major) which is of personal interest 
and significance. While no specific 
major is recommended, there are cer- 
tain skills of particular relevance to the 
pre-law student: clear writing, analyti- 
cal thinking, and language comprehen- 
sion. These skills should be developed 
during the undergraduate years. 

Pre-law students should register 
with the Legal Professions Advisory 
Committee (LPAC) upon entering Ly- 
coming and should join the Pre-Law 



Society on campus. LPAC assists the 
pre-law student through advisement, 
compilation of recommendations, and 
dissemination of information and ma- 
terials about law and the legal profes- 
sion. It sponsors Pre-LSAT workshops 
to help prepare students for the law 
boards. The Pre-Law Society has 
sponsored films, speakers, and field 
trips, including visits to law school 
campuses. 

Preparation for Theological Profes- 
sions — The Theological Professions 
Advisory Committee (TPAC) acts as a 
"center" for students, faculty, and 
clergy to discuss the needs of students 
who want to prepare themselves for 
the ministry, religious education, ad- 
vanced training in religion, or related 
vocations. Also, it may help coordinate 
internships for students who desire 
practical experience in the parish min- 
istry or related areas. Upon entering 
Lycoming, students should register 
with TPAC if they plan to investigate 
the religious vocations. 

In general, students preparing to at- 
tend a theological seminary should ex- 
amine the suggestions set down by the 
Association of Theological Schools 
(available from TPAC). Recommend- 
ed is a broad program in the liberal 
arts, a major in one of the humanities 
(English, history, languages, literature, 
philosophy, religion) or one of the so- 
cial sciences (American studies, crimi- 
nal justice, economics, international 
studies, political science, psychology, 
sociology-anthropology), and a variety 
of electives. Students preparing for a 
career in religious education should 
major in religion and elect five or six 
courses in psychology, education, and 
sociology. This program of study will 
qualify students to work as an educa- 
tional assistant or a director of relig- 
ious education after graduate study in 
a theological seminary. 



REGISTRATION 

During the registration period, students 
select their courses for the next semes- 



ter and register their course selections 
in the Office of the Registrar. Course 
selection is made in consultation with 
the student's faculty advisor in order 
to insure that the course schedule is 
consistent with College requirements 
and student goals. After the registra- 
tion period, any change in the student's 
course schedule must be approved by 
both the faculty advisor and Office of 
the Registrar. Students may not receive 
credit for courses in which they are not 
formally registered. 

During the first five days of classes, 
students may drop any course without 
any record of such enrollment appear- 
ing on the permanent record, and they 
may add any course that is not closed. 
Students wishing to drop a course be- 
tween the fifth day and the 12th week 
of classes must secure a withdrawal 
form from the Office of the Registrar, 
which is presented to the instructor of 
the course in question, who assigns a 
withdrawal grade based on the level of 
the student's performance from the be- 
ginning of the course to the date of 
withdrawal. Withdrawal grades are 
not computed in the grade point aver- 
age. Students may not withdraw from 
courses after the 12th week of a semes- 
ter and the comparable period during 
the May and summer terms. 

In two-credit (Vi unit) courses meet- 
ing only during the last half of any se- 
mester, students may drop/add for a 
period of five days, effective with the 
mid-term date shown on the academic 
calendar. Withdrawal from half-semes- 
ter courses with a withdrawal grade 
may occur within six weeks of the be- 
ginning of the course. It is understood 
that the period of time at the begin- 
ning of the semester and at the mid- 
point of the semester will be identical; 
for example, a period of five days as 
indicated above. 



THE UNIT COURSE SYSTEM 

Instruction at Lycoming College is or- 
ganized, with few exceptions, on a de- 
partmental basis. Most courses are unit 
courses, meaning that each course tak- 



en is considered to be equivalent to 
four semester hours of credit. Excep- 
tions occur in applied music courses, 
which are offered for either one-half 
or one semester hour of credit, and in 
departments that have elected to offer 
certain courses for the equivalent of 
two semester hours of credit. Further, 
independent studies and internships 
carrying two semester hours of credit 
may be designed. The normal student 
course load is four courses during the 
fall and spring semesters. Students 
who elect to attend the special sessions 
may enroll in one course during the 
May term and one or two courses in 
the summer term. A student is consid- 
ered full time when enrolled for a min- 
imum of three courses during the fall 
or spring semesters, one course for the 
May term, and two courses for the 
summer term. Students may enroll in 
five courses during the fall and spring 
semesters if they are Lycoming Schol- 
ars or were admitted to the Dean's List 
at the end of the previous semester. Ex- 
ceptions may be granted by the Dean 
of the College. Overloads are not per- 
mitted during the May and summer 
terms. 



THE SYSTEM OF GRADING AND 
REPORTING OF GRADES 

The evaluation of student perform- 
ance in credit courses is indicated by 
the use of traditional letter symbols. 
These symbols and their definitions 
are as follows: 

A Excellent — Signifies superior 
achievement through mastery of con- 
tent or skills and demonstration of cre- 
ative and independent thinking. 
B High Pass — Signifies better-than- 
average achievement wherein the stu- 
dent reveals insight and understanding. 
C Pass — Signifies satisfactory achieve- 
ment wherein the student's work has 
been of average quality and quantity. 
The student has demonstrated basic 
competence in the subject area and 
may enroll in additional course work. 
D Low Pass — Signifies unsatisfactory 



achievement wherein the student met 
only the minimum requirements for 
passing the course and should not con- 
tinue in the subject area without de- 
partmental advice. 

F Failing — Signifies that the student 
has not met the minimum require- 
ments for passing the course. 
I Incomplete Work — Assigned in ac- 
cordance with the restrictions of estab- 
lished academic policy. 
R A Repeated Course — Students 
shall have the option of repeating 
courses for which they already have re- 
ceived a passing grade in addition to 
those which they have failed. No credit 
is received for the second attempt. 
Grades will be averaged. 
S Passing Work, no grade assigned — 
Converted from traditional grade of D 
or better. 

U Failing work, no grade assigned — 
converted from traditional grade of F. 
X Audit — Work as an auditor for 
which no credit is earned. 
W Withdrawal — Signifies withdrawal 
from the course early in the term when 
it cannot be determined that the stu- 
dent is passing or failing. 
WP Withdrawal, passing — The stu- 
dent was passing at the time of with- 
drawal; no credit is earned. 
WF Withdrawal, failing — The student 
was failing at the time of withdrawal; 
no credit is earned. 

The cumulative grade point average 
(GPA) is calculated by multiplying 
quality points by credits and dividing 
the total quality points by the total 
credits. A quality point is the unit of 
measurement of the quality of work 
done by the student. 

Quality Points Earned 

Grade for each semester hour 

A Excellent 4 

B High Pass 3 

C Pass 2 

D Low Pass 1 

F Failing 

The grade point average for the ma- 
jor is calculated in the same manner 
for the courses required for the major. 

A minimum of 2.00 is required for 



the cumulative grade point average 
and for the grade point average in the 
major to meet the requirements for 
graduation. You cannot compute your 
cumulative GPA by averaging your se- 
mester GPA's. 

Use of the satisfactory/unsatisfacto- 
ry grading option is limited as follows 
(this does not apply to Education 5 
and English 5): 

— students may enroll on an S / U 
basis in no more than one course 
per semester and no more than 
four courses during the under- 
graduate career. 

— S / U courses completed after de- 
claration of the major may not 
be used to satisfy a requirement 
of that major, including courses 
required by the major department 
which are offered by other de- 
partments. (Instructor-designated 
courses are excepted from this 
limitation.) 

— courses for which a grade of S is 
recorded may not be used toward 
fulfillment of any distribution re- 
quirement. 

— students may not enroll in Eng- 
lish 6 on an S / U basis. 

— a course selected on an S / U ba- 
sis which is subsequently with- 
drawn will not count toward the 
four-course limit. 

— instructor-designated courses may 
be offered during the May term 
with the approval of the Dean of 
the College. Such courses are not 
counted toward the four-course 
hmit. 

— S / U grades are not computed in 
the grade point average. 

— students electing the S / U option 
may designate a minimum accep- 
tance letter grade of A or B. If 
the letter grade actually earned 
by the student equals or exceeds 
this minimum, that letter grade is 
entered on the student's perma- 
nent record and is computed in 
the grade point average. In such 
a case, the course does not count 
toward the four-course limit. If 
the student does not indicate a 



10 



minimum acceptable letter grade 
or if the letter grade actually 
earned is lower than the mini- 
mum designated by the student, 
the Registrar substitutes an S for 
any passing grade (A, B, C, or D) 
and a U for an F grade. 

— students receiving either an S or 
U grade are not eligible for the 
Dean's List for that semester. 

— students must declare the S / U 
option before the end of the peri- 
od during which courses may be 
added during any given semester, 
half-semester, or term. 

— instructors are not notified which 
of their students are enrolled on 
an S / U basis. 

— students electing the S / U option 
are expected to perform the same 
work as those enrolled on a regu- 
lar basis. 

Incomplete grades may be given if, 
for absolutely unavoidable reasons 
(usually medical in nature), the student 
has not been able to complete the work 
requisite to the course. An incomplete 
grade must be removed within six 
weeks of the next regular semester. 

Students shall have the option of re- 
peating courses for which they already 
have received a passing grade in addi- 
tion to those which they have failed. 
Recording of grades for all repeated 
courses shall be governed by the fol- 
lowing conditions: 

— a course may be repeated only 
one time. 

— both attempts will be recorded on 
the student's transcript. 

— credit for the course will be given 
only once. 

— for the purpose of determining 
the student's GPA, the average 
grade received for the two at- 
tempts will be used as if it were 
the grade for a single course. 

— a repeated course will be counted 
toward the total number of un- 
successful attempts. 



ATTENDANCE 

The academic program at Lycoming is 
based upon the assumption that there 
is value in class attendance for all stu- 
dents. Individual instructors have the 
prerogative of establishing reasonable 
absence regulations in any course. The 
student is responsible for learning and 
observing these regulations. 



STUDENT RECORDS 

The policy regarding student educa- 
tional records is designed to protect the 
privacy of students against unwarrant- 
ed intrusions and is consistent with 
Section 438 of the General Education 
Provision Act (commonly known as 
the Family Educational Rights and 
Privacy Act of 1974, as amended). The 
details of the College policy on student 
records and the procedures for gaining 
access to student records are contained 
in the current issue of The Pathfinder, 
which is available in the library and 
the Office of the Dean of the College. 



ACADEMIC STANDING AND 
ACADEMIC HONESTY 

Students will be placed on academic 
probation if either the number of 
hours completed or cumulative grade 
point average falls below the following 
standards: 



Semester 


Hours 


Cumulative 


(Full-time) 


Completed 


GPA 


1 


12 


1.66 


2 


24 


1.85 


3 


40 


1.90 


4 


56 


2.00 


5 


72 


2.00 


6 


88 


2.00 


7 


104 


2.00 


8 


120 


2.00 



In order to meet graduation require- 
ments, students must complete 128 cre- 
dit hours. Students who are enrolled 
part time or for fewer than the normal 
four courses per term will be expected 



to complete an equivalent proportion 
of their program each semester. 

Students will be subject to suspension 
from the College if they: 

— are on probation for two consec- 
utive semesters; 

— achieve a grade point average of 
1.00 or below during any one se- 
mester. 

Students will be subject to dismissal 
from the College if they: 

— can not reasonably complete all 
requirements for a degree; 

— exceed 24 semester hours of un- 
successful course attempts (grades 
of F, U, W, WP, WF, and R) ex- 
cept in the case of withdrawal for 
medical or psychological reasons. 

The integrity of the academic pro- 
cess of the College requires honesty in 
all phases of the instructional pro- 
gram. The College assumes that stu- 
dents are committed to the principle of 
academic honesty. Students who fail to 
honor this commitment are subject to 
dismissal. Procedural guidelines and 
rules for the adjudication of cases of 
academic dishonesty are printed in 
The Faculty Handbook and The Path- 
finder (the student academic hand- 
book), copies of which are available in 
the library. 



CREDIT BY EXAMINATION 

Advanced Placement — Entering 
freshmen who have completed an ad- 
vanced course while in secondary 
school and who have taken the appro- 
priate advanced-placement examina- 
tion of the College Entrance Examina- 
tion Board (CEEB) are encouraged to 
apply for credit and advanced place- 
ment at the lime of admission. A grade 
of three or above is considered satis- 
factory. Students should inform the 
Registrar's Office and their academic 
advisor immediately when advanced 
placement examinations have been 
taken. 



College Level Examination Pro- 
gram (CLEP) — Students may earn 
college credit for superior achievement 
through CLEP. By achieving at the 
75th percentile or above on the Gener- 
al Examinations and the 65th percen- 
tile or above on approved Subject Ex- 
aminations, students may earn up to 
50 percent of the course requirements 
for a bachelor of arts degree. Although 
these examinations may be taken after 
enrollment, new students who are com- 
petent in a given area are encouraged 
to take the examinations of their choice 
during the second semester of their 
senior year so that Lycoming will have 
the test scores available for registra- 
tion advisement for the first semester 
of enrollment. Further information 
about CLEP may be obtained through 
the secondary-school guidance office 
or the Office of Admissions at Lycom- 
ing College. Students should inform 
the Registrar's Office and their aca- 
demic advisor immediately when 
CLEP examinations have been taken. 



ACADEMIC HONORS 

Dean's List — Students are admitted 
to the Dean's List at the end of the fall 
and spring semesters if they have com- 
pleted at least 15 credits with other 
than S/U or R grades, and have a min- 
imum grade point average of 3.50 for 
the semester. 

Graduation Honors — Students are 
awarded the bachelor of arts degree, 
the bachelor of fine arts degree, or the 
bachelor of science in nursing degree 
with honors when they have earned 
the following grade point averages 
based on all courses attempted at Ly- 
coming, with a minimum of 64 credits 
(16 units) required for a student to be 
eligible for honors: 

summa cum laude 3.90-4.00 

magna cum laude 3.50-3.89 

cum laude 3.25-3.49 

Academic Honor Awards, Prizes, 
and Societies — Superior academic 



achievement is recognized through the 
conferring of awards and prizes at the 
annual Honors Day convocation and 
Commencement and through election 
to membership in honor societies. 

Societies 

Blue Key Freshmen Men 

Gold Key Freshmen Women 

Beta Beta Beta Biology 

Omicron Delta Epsilon . Economics 

Phi Alpha Theta History 

Phi Sigma Tau Philosophy 

Sigma Pi Sigma Physics 

Pi Sigma Alpha . . . Political Science 

Psi Chi Psychology 

Pi Gamma Mu Social Science 

Phi Kappa Phi . . General Academic 

Prizes and Awards 

American Chemical Society Award — 
The award, sponsored by the Susque- 
hanna Valley Chapter of the society, is 
given to the outstanding senior in 
chemistry who plans to enter the pro- 
fession. 

American Institute of Chemists Prize 

— The prize, given by the Philadelphia 
section of the institute, goes to the sen- 
ior major for excellence in chemistry. 

Byron C. Brunstetter Science Award 

— The award is given for outstanding 
achievement in chemical and biologi- 
cal sciences. 

CRC Press Chemistry Achievement 
Award — The award is given to the 
freshman who has exhibited outstand- 
ing academic achievement in chemistry. 

Chieftain Award — The College's 
most prestigious award is given to the 
senior who has contributed most to 
Lycoming through support of school 
activities; who has exhibited outstand- 
ing leadership qualities; who has 
worked effectively with other members 
of the College community; who has 
evidenced a good moral code; and 
whose academic rank is above the me- 
dian for the preceding senior class. 



Civic Choir Award — The award is 
given to the College choir member 
who has outstanding musical ability 
and who has made significant leader- 
ship contributions to the choir. 

Class of 1907 Prize — The prize is given 
to the senior who has been outstanding 
in the promotion of College spirit 
through participation in athletics and 
other activities. 

Benjamin C. Conner Prize — The prize 
is given to the graduating student who 
has done outstanding work in mathe- 
matics. 

Durkheim Award — The award is giv- 
en to the senior sociology/anthropolo- 
gy major who has done outstanding 
work in the field. 

Bishop William Perry Eveland Prize 

— The prize is given to the senior who 
has shown progress in scholarship, 
loyalty, school spirit, and participation 
in school activities. 

Excellence in Two-Dimensional Art 
Award — The award is given to the 
outstanding senior art major in this 
field. 

Excellence in Three-Dimensional Art 
Award — The award is given to the 
outstanding senior art major in this 
field. 

Excellence in Theatre Performance 
Award — The award is given to the 
student who has been outstanding as a 
performer in the Arena Theatre. 

Excellence in Technical Theatre Award 

— The award is given to the student 
who has been outstanding as a techni- 
cian for the Arena Theatre. 

Excellence in Political Science Award 

— The award goes to the senior politi- 
cal science major who has performed 
with excellence. 

J. W. Ferree Award — Given in memo- 
ry of the first mathematics professor 



12 



at Lycoming's forerunner, the Dickin- 
son Seminary, the award goes to the 
student most active in mathematical 
sciences. 

Faculty Prize — The prize is given to 
the commuting student with satisfac- 
tory scholarship and who has been 
outstanding in promotion of school 
spirit through participation in school 
activities. 

Durant L. Furey III Memorial Prize — 
The prize is given to the senior account- 
ing major who has shown outstanding 
achievement in accounting. 

Gillette Foreign Language Prizes — 
The prizes are given to the French, 
German, and Spanish majors who 
have achieved excellence in foreign 
languages. 

John P. Graham Award — Named in 
honor of a professor emeritus, the 
award is given to the senior English 
major who achieves the highest aver- 
age in English. 

Edward J. Gray Prizes — The prizes 
are given to the graduating students 
with the highest and second highest av- 
erages. 

Dan Gustafson Award — In memory 
of a former member of the English 
Department, the award is given to the 
senior English major whose analytical 
writing demonstrates the highest stan- 
dards of literary and critical excellence. 

IRUSKA Awards — The awards de- 
note membership in the society for 
juniors who are very active on cam- 
pus. 

Junior Book Award — The award is 
given to the outstanding junior politi- 
cal science major. 

Elisha Benson Kline Prize — The prize 
is given to the senior mathematics ma- 
jor with outstanding acheivement in 
the field. 



Charles J. Kocian Awards — The 
awards are given to the accounting, 
business administration, and econom- 
ics majors who show the greatest pro- 
ficiency in statistics; the mathematics 
major who shows the greatest profi- 
ciency in applied mathematics, and the 
graduating senior who shows the great- 
est proficiency in computer science. 

Don Lincoln Larrabee Law Prize — 
The prize is given to the graduating 
student who has shown outstanding 
scholarship in legal principles. 

C. Daniel and Jeanne Little Award — 
Presented in memory of two Lycom- 
ing alumni, the award is given to the 
outstanding student in public adminis- 
tration. 

John C. McCune Memorial Prizes — 
The prizes are given to the senior ma- 
jors in mathematics, biology, chemis- 
try, physics, philosophy, and psycholo- 
gy who have attained the highest aver- 
ages. 

Walter G. Mclver Award — Named af- 
ter Lycoming's former choir director, 
the award is given to the choir member 
who has made outstanding campus 
contributions outside of choir. 

Pennsylvania Institute of Certified 
Public Accountants Award — The 
award is given to the senior accounting 
major who has demonstrated high 
scholastic standing and qualities of 
leadership. 

Pocahantas Award — The award is 
given to Lycoming's outstanding fe- 
male athlete. 

Psi Chi Service Award — The award is 
given for contributions to the Psychol- 
ogy Department. 

Research and Writing Prize in History 
— The prize is given to the student 
who does the best work in History 45. 

Sadler Prize — The prize is given to the 
student with the highest achievement 



in calculus, foundations of mathemat- 
ics, algebra, and analysis. 

Senior Management Award — The 
award is given to the senior business 
major with the best senior project in 
Business Administration 4L 

Senior Scholarship Prize in History — 
The prize is given to the senior major 
with the highest average. 

Service to Lycoming Award — Spon- 
sored by the Office of Student Servic- 
es, the award is given to students who 
have made outstanding contributions 
to Lycoming. 

Frances K. Skeath Award — The 
award is given to the senior with out- 
standing achievement in mathematics. 

J. Milton Skeath Award —J\\t award 
is given for superior undergraduate 
achievement and potential for further 
work in psychology. 

John A. Streeter Memorial Award in 
Economics — The award is given to 
the graduating student with outstand- 
ing achievement in economics. 

Tomahawk Award — The award is giv- 
en to Lycoming's outstanding male 
athlete. 

Trask Chemistry Prize — The prize is 
given to the senior chemistry major 
who has done outstanding work in the 
field. 

Wall Street Journal Award — The 
award is given to the senior business 
major for excellence in the field and 
service to the College community. 

Sol "Woody" Wolf Award — The 
award is given to the junior athlete 
who has shown the most improvement. 

Women of Lycoming Scholarship — 
The scholarship is given to the junior 
woman student who has shown satis- 
factory scholarship, outstanding school 
spirit, and who is active in campus ac- 



13 



tivities. 

Departmental Honors — Honors pro- 
jects are normally undertaken only in a 
student's major, and are available only 
to exceptionally well-qualified stu- 
dents who have a solid background in 
the area of the project and are capable 
of considerable self-direction. The 
prerequisites for registration in an 
honors program are as follows: 

— a faculty member from the de- 
partment(s) in which the honors 
project is to be undertaken must 
agree to be the director and must 
secure departmental approval of 
the project. 

— the director, in consultation with 
the student, must convene a com- 
mittee consisting of two faculty 
members from the department in 
which the project is to be under- 
taken, one of whom is the director 
of the project, and one faculty 
member from each of two other 
departments related to the sub- 
ject matter of the study. 

— the honors committee must then 
certify by their signatures on the 
application that the project in 
question is academically legiti- 
mate and worthy of pursuit as an 
honors project, and that the stu- 
dent in question is qualified to 
pursue the project. 

— the project must be approved by 
the Committee on Individual 
Studies. 

Students successfully complete hon- 
ors projects by satisfying the following 
conditions in accordance with guide- 
lines established by the Committee on 
Individual Studies: 

— the student must produce a sub- 
stantial research paper, critical 
study, or creative project. If the 
end product is a creative project, 
a critical paper analyzing the 
techniques and principles em- 
ployed and the nature of the 
achievement represented in the 
project shall be submitted. 



— the student must successfully ex- 
plain and defend the work in a fi- 
nal oral examination given by the 
honors committee. 

— the honors committee must certi- 
fy that the student has successful- 
ly defended the project, and that 
the student's achievement is clear- 
ly superior to that which would 
ordinarily be required to earn a 
grade of "A" in a regular inde- 
pendent-studies course. 

— the Committee on Individual Stu- 
dies must certify that the student 
has satisfied all of the conditions 
mentioned above. 

Except in unusual circumstances, hon- 
ors projects are expected to involve in- 
dependent study in two consecutive 
unit courses. Successful completion of 
the honors project will cause the desig- 
nation of honors in that department to 
be placed upon the permanent record. 
Acceptable theses are deposited in the 
College library. In the event that the 
study is not completed successfully or 
is not deemed worthy of honors, the 
student shall be re-registered in inde- 
pendent studies and given a final grade 
for the course. 



SPECIAL FEATURES 

Independent Studies — Indepen- 
dent studies are available to any quali- 
fied student who wishes to engage in 
and receive academic credit for any ac- 
ademically legitimate course of study 
for which he or she could not other- 
wise receive credit. It may be pursued 
at any level (introductory, intermedi- 
ate, or advanced) and in any depart- 
ment, whether or not the student is a 
major in that department. Studies pro- 
jects which duplicate catalog courses 
are sometimes possible, and are sub- 
ject to the same provisions which ap- 
ply to all studies projects. In order for 
a student to be registered in an inde- 
pendent-study course, the following 
conditions must be satisfied: 

— an appropriate member of the 
faculty must agree to supervise 



the project and must certify by 
signing the application form that 
the project is academically legiti- 
mate and involves an amount of 
work appropriate for the amount 
of academic credit requested, 
and that the student in question 
is qualified to pursue the project. 

— the studies project must be ap- 
proved by the chairman of the 
department in which the studies 
project is to be undertaken. 

— after the project is approved by 
the instructor and by the chair- 
man of the appropriate depart- 
ment, the studies project must be 
approved by the Committee on 
Individual Studies. 

In addition, participation in indepen- 
dent-studies projects, with the excep- 
tion of those which duplicate catalog 
courses, is subject to the following: 

— students may not engage in more 
than one independent-studies 
project during any given semester. 

— students may not engage in more 
than two independent-studies 
projects during their academic 
careers at Lycoming College. 

As with other academic policies, 
any exceptions to these two rules must 
be approved by the Academic Stand- 
ing Committee. 

Internship Program — An internship 
is a course jointly sponsored by the 
College and a public or private agency 
or subdivision of the College in which 
a student is enabled to earn college cre- 
dit by participating in some active ca- 
pacity as an assistant, aide, or appren- 
tice. At least one-half of the effort ex- 
pended by the intern should consist of 
academic work related to agency situa- 
tions. The objectives of the internship 
program are (1) to further the develop- 
ment of a central core of values, aware- 
nesses, strategies, skills, and informa- 
tion through experiences outside the 
classroom or other campus situations, 
and (2) to facilitate the integration of 
theory and practice by encouraging 



14 



students to relate their on-campus aca- 
demic experiences more directly to so- 
ciety in general and to possible career 
and other post-baccalaureate objec- 
tives in particular. 

Any junior or senior student in 
good academic standing may petition 
the Committee on Individual Studies 
for approval to serve as an intern. A 
maximum of 16 credits can be earned 
through the internship program. 
Guidelines for program development, 
assignment of tasks and academic re- 
quirements, such as exams, papers, re- 
ports, grades, etc., are established in 
consultation with a faculty director at 
Lycoming and an agency supervisor at 
the place of internship. 

Students with diverse majors have 
participated in a wide variety of intern- 
ships, including those with the Allen- 
wood Federal Prison Camp, Lycoming 
County Commissioners Office, Depart- 
ment of Environmental Resources, 
Head Start, Lycoming County Histori- 
cal Society, business and accounting 
firms, law offices, hospitals, social 
service agencies, banks, and Congres- 
sional offices. 

May Term — The May term is a four- 
week voluntary session designed to 
provide students with courses listed in 
the catalog and experimental and spe- 
cial courses that are not normally avail- 
able during the fall and spring semes- 
ters and summer term. Some courses 
are offered on campus; others involve 
travel. A number offer interdiscipli- 
nary credit. Illustrations of the types of 
courses offered during the May term are: 

(a) Study-Travel: Cultural tours of 
Germany, Spain, and France; Archae- 
ological expeditions to the Middle 
East; Anthropological expeditions to 
study tri-cultural communities in New 
Mexico; Utopian Communities; Revo- 
lutionary and Civil War Sites; Colonial 
America on Tour; Art on the East 
Coast; The New Kingdom in Ancient 
Egypt. 

(b) On-Campus: Field Geology, 
Field Ornithology, Energy Economics, 
Writer's Seminar, Psychology of Group 
Processes, Collective Bargaining, 



Aquatic Biology, Medical Genetics, 
Energy Alternatives, White Collar 
Crime, Lasers and their Applications, 
Selected Short Story Writers and their 
Works, Popular Forms of Contempo- 
rary Fiction, Administrative and 
Organizational Behavior of Police, 
Plant and Greenhouse Management, 
and Street Law. 

Although participation in the May 
term is voluntary, student response has 
been outstanding with approximately 
20 percent of the student body enroll- 
ing. In addition to the courses them- 
selves, attractions include small and 
informal classes and reduced tuition 
rates. 

Study Abroad — Students have the 
opportunity to study abroad under 
auspices of approved universities and 
agencies. While study abroad is partic- 
ularly attractive to students majoring 
in foreign languages and literatures, 
this opportunity is open to all students 
in good academic standing. Mastery of 
a foreign language is desirable but not 
required in all programs. Dr. Richard 
Barker, assistant professor of foreign 
languages and literatures, serves as 
coordinator for the Study Abroad 
Program; interested students may con- 
tact him about opportunities available 
and procedural questions. 

NOTE: Lycoming College cannot assume re- 
sponsibility for the health, safety, or welfare of 
any student engaged in or en route to or from 
any off-campus study or activity not under the 
exclusive jurisdiction of this institution. 

Auditors — Any person may audit 
courses at Lycoming at one-fourth tui- 
tion per course. Laboratory and other 
special fees must be paid in full. Ex- 
aminations, papers, and other evalua- 
tion devices are not required of audi- 
tors, but individual arrangements may 
be made to complete such exercises 
with the consent of the instructor. The 
option to audit a course must be de- 
clared during the same period (current- 
ly five days) at the beginning of each 
semester, half-semester, or term as 
drop/add and pass/fail and must be 
completed in the Registrar's Office. 



Part Time Students — Students who 
do not wish to pursue a degree at Ly- 
coming College may, if space permits, 
register for credit or audit courses on 
either a part-time or full-time basis. 
Students who register for one or two 
courses are considered to be enrolled 
part time; students who register for 
three or four courses are considered to 
be enrolled full time. 

Anyone wishing to register as a non- 
degree student must fill out an applica- 
tion form in the Admissions Office, 
pay a one-time application fee of $20, 
and pay the tuition rate in effect at the 
time of each enrollment. After a non- 
degree student has attempted four 
courses, the Dean of the College re- 
serves the right to grant or deny per- 
mission to continue to register in this 
category. 

All non-degree students are subject 
to the general laws and regulations of 
the College as stated in the College 
Catalog and the Student Handbook. 
The College reserves the right to deny 
permission to register to individuals 
who do not meet the standards of the 
College. 

Students who wish to change from a 
non-degree to a degree status must re- 
apply (with no application fee) and 
satisfy all conditions for admission 
and registration in effect at the time of 
application for degree status. 



COOPERATIVE PROGRAMS 

Lycoming has developed several coop- 
erative programs to provide students 
with opportunities to extend their 
knowledge, abilities, and talents in se- 
lected areas through access to the spe- 
cialized academic programs and facili- 
ties of other colleges, universities, acad- 
emies, and hospitals. Although thor- 
ough advisement and curricular plan- 
ning are provided for each of the co- 
operative programs, admission to Ly- 
coming and registration in the pro- 
gram of choice do not guarantee ad- 
mission to the cooperating institution. 
The prerogative of admitting students 
to the cooperative aspect of the pro- 



15 



gram rests with the cooperating insti- 
tution. Students who are interested in 
a cooperative program should contact 
the coordinator during the first week 
of the first semester of their enroll- 
ment at Lycoming. This is necessary to 
plan their course programs in a man- 
ner that will insure completion of re- 
quired courses according to the sched- 
ule stipulated for the program. All co- 
operative programs require special co- 
ordination of course scheduling at Ly- 
coming. 

Engineering — Combining the advan- 
tages of a liberal-arts education and 
the technical training of an engineer- 
ing curriculum, this program is offered 
in conjunction with Bucknell Universi- 
ty and The Pennsylvania State Univer- 
sity. Students complete three years of 
study at Lycoming and two years at 
the cooperating university. Upon satis- 
factory completion of the first year of 
engineering studies, Lycoming awards 
the bachelor of arts degree. When stu- 
dents successfully complete the second 
year of engineering studies, the coop- 
erating university awards the bachelor 
of science degree in engineering. 

At Lycoming, students complete the 
distribution program and courses in 
physics, mathematics, and chemistry. 
Engineering specialties offered at 
Bucknell University include chemical, 
civil, electrical, and mechanical. The 
Pennsylvania State University offers 
aerospace, agricultural, chemical, civil, 
electrical, engineering science, envi- 
ronmental, industrial, mechanical, 
and nuclear engineering. 

Forestry or Environmental Studies — 

Lycoming College offers a cooperative 
program with Duke University in envi- 
ronmental management and forestry. 
Qualified students can earn the bache- 
lor's and master's degrees in five years, 
spending three years at Lycoming and 
two years at Duke. All Lycoming dis- 
tribution and major requirements 
must be completed by the end of the 
junior year. At the end of the first year 
at Duke, the B.A. degree will be award- 
ed by Lycoming. Duke will award the 



professional degree of Master of For- 
estry or Master of Environmental 
Management to qualified candidates 
at the end of the second year. 

The major program emphases at 
Duke are Natural Resources Science/ 
Ecology, Natural Resources Systems 
Science, and Natural Resources Econ- 
omics/Policy. The program is flexible 
enough, however, to accommodate a 
variety of individual designs. An un- 
dergraduate major in one of the natu- 
ral sciences, social sciences, or business 
may provide good preparation for the 
programs at Duke, but a student with 
any undergraduate concentration will 
be considered for admission. All stu- 
dents need at least two courses each in 
biology, mathematics, and economics. 

Students begin the program at Duke 
in July after their junior year at Ly- 
coming with a one-month session of 
field work in natural resource measure- 
ments. They must complete a total of 
60 units which generally takes four 
semesters. 

Some students prefer to complete 
the bachelor's degree before undertak- 
ing graduate study at Duke. The mas- 
ter's degree requirements for these stu- 
dents are the same as for those stu- 
dents entering after the junior year, 
but the 60-unit requirement may be re- 
duced for completed relevant under- 
graduate work of satisfactory quality. 
All credit reductions are determined 
individually and consider the student's 
educational background and objec- 
tives. 

Medical Technology — Students de- 
siring a career in medical technology 
may either complete a bachelor of arts 
program followed by a clinical intern- 
ship at any American Medical Associ- 
ation-accredited hospital, or they may 
complete the cooperative program. 
Students electing the cooperative pro- 
gram normally study for three years at 
Lycoming, during which time they 
complete 24 unit courses, including the 
College distribution requirements, a 
major, and requirements of the Na- 
tional Accrediting Agency for Clinical 
Laboratory Sciences (NAACLS). The 



current requirements of the NAACLS 
are: four courses in chemistry (one of 
which must be either organic or bio- 
chemistry); four courses in biology (in- 
cluding courses in microbiology and 
immunology), and one course in math- 
ematics. 

Students in the cooperative program 
usually major in biology, following a 
modified major of six unit courses that 
exempts them from Ecology (Biology 
24) and Plant Sciences (Biology 25). 
Students must take either Microbiology 
(Biology 21) or Microbiology for the 
Health Sciences (Biology 26), and 
either Animal Physiology (Biology 23) 
or Cell Physiology (Biology 35). The 
cooperative program requires suc- 
cessful completion of a one-year in- 
ternship at an American Medical As- 
sociation - accredited hospital. Lycom- 
ing is affiliated with the following ac- 
credited hospitals: Williamsport, Di- 
vine Providence, Robert Packer, Lan- 
caster, and Abington. Students in the 
cooperative program receive credit at 
Lycoming for each of eight unit cours- 
es in biology and chemistry successful- 
ly completed during the clinical intern- 
ship. Successful completion of the 
Registry Examination is not consid- 
ered a graduation requirement at Ly- 
coming College. 

Students entering a clinical intern- 
ship for one year after graduation 
from Lycoming must complete all of 
the requirements of the cooperative 
program, but are not eligible for the 
biology major exemptions indicated 
above. Upon graduation, such stu- 
dents may apply for admission to a 
clinical program at any hospital. 

Optometry — Through the Acceler- 
ated Optometry Education Curriculum 
Program, students interested in a ca- 
reer in optometry may qualify for ad- 
mission to the Pennsylvania College of 
Optometry after only three years at 
Lycoming College. After four years at 
the Pennsylvania College of Optome- 
try, a student will earn a Doctor of Op- 
tometry degree. Selection of candi- 
dates for the professional segment of 
the program is completed by the ad- 



16 



missions committee of the Pennsylva- 
nia College of Optometry during the 
student's third year at Lycoming. (This 
is one of two routes that students may 
choose. Any student, of course, may 
follow the regular application proce- 
dures for admission to the Pennsylva- 
nia College of Optometry or another 
college of optometry to matriculate 
following completion of his or her 
baccalaureate program.) During the 
three years at Lycoming College, the 
student will complete 24 unit courses, 
including all distribution require- 
ments, and will prepare for his or her 
professional training by obtaining a 
solid foundation in biology, chemistry, 
physics, and mathematics. During the 
first year of study at the Pennsylvania 
College of Optometry, the student will 
take 39 semester hours of basic science 
courses in addition to introductions to 
optometry and health care. Successful 
completion of the first year of profes- 
sional training will complete the course 
requirements for the B.A. degree at 
Lycoming College. 

Most students will find it convenient 
to major in biology in order to satisfy 
the requirements of Lycoming College 
and the Pennsylvania College of Op- 
tometry. Such students are allowed to 
complete a modified biology major 
which will exempt them from two biol- 
ogy courses: Ecology (Biology 24) and 
Plant Sciences (Biology 25). (This 
modified major requires the successful 
completion of the initial year at the 
Pennsylvania College of Optometry). 
Students desiring other majors must 
coordinate their plans with the Health 
Professions Advisory Committee in 
order to insure that they have satisfied 
all requirements. 

Podiatry — Students interested in 
podiatry may either seek admission to 
a college of podiatric medicine upon 
completion of the bachelor of arts de- 
gree or through the Accelerated Podi- 
atric Medical Education-Curriculum 
Program (APMEC). The latter pro- 
gram provides an opportunity for stu- 
dents to qualify for admission to the 
Pennsylvania College of Podiatric 



Medicine (PCPM) or the Ohio College 
of Podiatric Medicine (OCPM) after 
three years of study at Lycoming. At 
Lycoming, students in the APMEC 
program must successfully complete 
24 unit courses, including the distribu- 
tion program and a basic foundation 
in biology, chemistry, physics, and 
mathematics. During the first year of 
study at PCPM or OCPM, students 
must successfully complete a program 
of basic science courses and an intro- 
duction to podiatry. Successful com- 
pletion of the first year of professional 
training will contribute toward the ful- 
fillment of the course requirements for 
the bachelor of arts degree at Lycom- 
ing. 

Sculpture — The Art Department 
with the Johnson Atelier Technical In- 
stitute of Sculpture in Princeton, New 
Jersey, offers a BFA degree in sculp- 
ture. It uses a classical apprenticeship 
approach as its teaching method. This 
ancient method of teaching is combined 
at Johnson with the most modern and 
technically advanced foundry and fab- 
ricating techniques. 

The Art Department offers a syn- 
thesis program that interrelates the 
student experience at both institutions. 
This is achieved by having the student 
rotate between Lycoming and the ateli- 
er so that each form of education is 
preparation for the other. Lycoming 
offers a core academic program, a 
course of study in the Art Department, 
and elective course opportunities. Ly- 
coming gives eight course units of col- 
lege credit to the student for having 
successfully completed one of the ap- 
prenticeship programs at the Johnson 
Atelier. 

All work completed by the student 
at Lycoming by the end of the sopho- 
more year will be applicable to a bach- 
elor of arts degree with a major in art 
should the student decide to withdraw 
from the BFA program. If the student 
should withdraw from the cooperative 
program prior to completing the ap- 
prenticeship at the Johnson Atelier, 
Lycoming will give up to four units of 
credit or one semester's work for the 



internship. If, however, the student 
completes more work at the atelier 
than the four units, that extra work 
will not be credited to the bachelor of 
arts degree; it will only be used as part 
of the bachelor of fine arts degree, and 
then only if the course at the atelier is 
completed. 

This course of study is very rigorous. 
It will require that the student be in- 
volved almost continuously, either at 
Lycoming or at the Johnson Atelier, 
during the four years it will take to 
complete the degree. (See Art Depart- 
ment listing for specific program.) 

Reserve Officers li-aining Corps 
Program (R.O.T.C.) — The program 
provides an opportunity for Lycoming 
students to enroll in R.O.T.C. Lycom- 
ing notes enrollment in and successful 
completion of the program on student 
transcripts. Military Science is a four- 
year program divided into a basic 
course given during the freshman and 
sophomore years and an advanced 
course given during the junior and sen- 
ior years. Students who have not com- 
pleted the basic course may qualify for 
the advanced course by completing 
summer camp between the sophomore 
and junior years. Students enrolled in 
the advanced course receive an annual 
stipend of $1000. Students successfully 
completing the advanced course and 
advanced summer camp between the 
junior and senior years will qualify for 
a commission as a Second Lieutenant 
in the United States Army upon gradu- 
ation, and will incur a service obliga- 
tion in the active Army or Army Re- 
serves. The only expense to the student 
for this program is the $60 advanced 
course uniform deposit. 

Student Enrichment Semester — 

This voluntary program is designed to 
expand academic and life opportunities 
for students and to provide for partici- 
pation in specialized programs and 
courses not available at Lycoming. 
Other members of the program are 
Bucknell and Susquehanna Universi- 
ties, the Williamsport Area Communi- 
ty College, and Bloomsburg, Lock 



17 



Haven, and Mansfield Universities. 
Students other than freshmen enroll 
full or part time for credit, normally 
for one semester or term, at any par- 
ticipating institution in selected cours- 
es. Students in the program remain 
fully enrolled as degree candidates at 
their home institutions. A special op- 
portunity within the program is the 
cross-registration arrangement with 
the Williamsport Area Community 
College, whereby students may enroll 
for less than a full-time course load 
while remaining enrolled in courses at 
Lycoming. 

Washington, United Nations and 
London Semesters and Capitol Se- 
mester Internship Program — With 
the consent of the Department of Po- 
litical Science, selected students are 
permitted to study in Washington, 
D.C., at The American University for 
one semester. They may choose from 
seven different programs: Washington 
Semester, Urban Semester, Foreign 
Policy Semester, International Devel- 
opment Semester, Economic Policy 
Semester, Science and Technology Se- 
mester, American Studies Semester. 

With the consent of either the De- 
partment of History or Political Sci- 
ence, selected students may enroll at 
Drew University in Madison, New Jer- 
sey, in the United Nations Semester, 
which is designed to provide a first- 
hand acquaintance with the world or- 
ganization. Students with special inter- 
ests in world history, international re- 
lations, law, and politics are eligible to 
participate. 

The London Semester programs of 
Drew and The American Universities 
emphasize European history, politics, 
and culture. Interested students partic- 
ipate with the consent of either the De- 
partments of History or Political Sci- 
ence. 

The Capitol Semester Internship 
Program is available to eligible stu- 
dents on a competitive basis. The pro- 
gram is co-sponsored by Pennsylvania's 
Office of Administration and Depart- 
ment of Education. Paid Internships 
are available to students in most ma- 



jors. Interested students should con- 
tact the Career Development Center or 
the Assistant Dean of the College for 
additional information. 

Normally the above special-semester 
programs are open only to juniors. 

NOTE: Lycomint; College cannot assume re- 
sponsibility for the health, safety, or welfare of 
students engaged in or en route to or from any 
off-campus studies or activities which are not 
under the exclusive jurisdiction of this institu- 
tion. 



THE SCHOLAR PROGRAM 

The Lycoming College Scholar Pro- 
gram is a special program designed to 
meet the needs and aspirations of 
highly motivated students of superior 
intellectual ability. The Lycoming 
Scholar satisfies the general distribu- 
tion requirements, but on a more ex- 
acting level and with more challenging 
courses than the average student. Ly- 
coming Scholars also participate in 
special courses and seminars and in 
serious independent study culminating 
in a senior project supervised by their 
major department. 

Students are admitted to the pro- 
gram by invitation of the Scholar 
Council, the group which oversees the 
program. The council consists of four 
students elected by current scholars 
and four faculty selected by the Dean 
of the College. The guidelines govern- 
ing selection of new scholars are flexi- 
ble: academic excellence, intellectual 
curiosity, and creativity are all taken 
into account. Students who desire to 
participate in the Scholar Program but 
are not invited may petition the Schol- 
ar Council for consideration. 

To remain in the program, students 
must maintain a GPA of 3.0 or better. 
Students dropping below this average 
will be placed on Scholar probation 
until their average improves, or they 
are asked to leave the program. To 
graduate as a Scholar, a student must 
have at least a 3.0 cumulative average. 
Scholars must take the First Year Schol- 
ar Seminar during their first semester 
in the program. In addition, the fol- 



lowing distribution requirements must 
be met. (Slightly modified require- 
ments exist for nursing students and 
students in the cooperative programs; 
a list of these requirements can be ob- 
tained from the Scholar Council.) 

A. English. Scholars must display 
above-average writing skills by the end 
of the sophomore year, as certified by 
the Department of English and the 
Scholar Council. This requirement 
may be met by obtaining a sufficiently 
high score on an apppropriate CLEP 
examination or by a grade of "B" in 
English 6. Students not meeting the re- 
quirement in either of these ways by 
the end of the freshman year will be 
asked to do extra work until the com- 
petency is reached. Beyond English 6, 
the requirement is one literature course 
numbered 20 or higher. 

B. Language/Mathematical Scienc- 
es. Scholars must satisfy the require- 
ment in either language or mathemati- 
cal sciences. Language: Scholars must 
complete two courses numbered 10 or 
higher (excluding courses taught in 
English). Mathematical Sciences: The 
mathematics placement test determines 
whether a Scholar must take two or 
three courses for distribution. These 
courses must be numbered 12 or high- 
er. If only two courses are required. 
Mathematics 17 may not be included. 
Only one computer science course may 
be used to fulfill the mathematical sci- 
ences requirement. 

C. Philosophy/Religion. Scholars 
must satisfy this requirement in either 
of the two areas. Philosophy: Two 
courses numbered 20 or higher. Relig- 
ion: Two courses numbered 22 or high- 
er. 

D. Fine Arts. Scholars must satisfy 
the requirement in one of four areas. 
Art: Two options are available in art. 
Either two courses from Art 22, 23, 
24, 31, 32, 33, and 34 (Art History), or 
two courses from Art 11, 15, 20, and 25 
(Studio Art). Music: Two courses from 
Music 17, 30, or higher. Theatre: Two 
courses from Theatre 14 or higher, ex- 
cluding Theatre 18. Literature: Two lit- 
erature courses from English 20 or 
higher. Foreign Languages and Litera- 



ls 



ture 25, or other foreign language and 
literature courses taught in English. 

E. Natural Sciences. Scholars must 
satisfy the requirements in one of three 
areas. Astronomy/Physics: Two cours- 
es numbered 11 or higher. Biology: 
Two courses numbered 10 or higher. 
Chemistry: Two courses numbered 10 
or higher. 

K History/Social Sciences. Scholars 
must satisfy the requirements in one of 
five areas. Economics: Two courses 
numbered 10 or higher. History: Two 
courses, one of which must be num- 
bered 20 or higher. Political Science: 
Two courses numbered 15 or higher. 
Psychology: Two courses including 
Psychology 10 and one course num- 
bered 24 or higher (excluding Psychol- 
ogy 38). Sociology/Anthropology: Two 
courses including Sociology 10 and one 
course numbered 30 or higher. 

G. Physical Education. Scholars 



must satisfy the same physical educa- 
tion requirement stipulated by the Col- 
lege for all students. 

H. Designated Courses. In addition 
to completing the distribution require- 
ments. Scholars will be required to 
complete four upper-level courses 
(numbered 30 and above) chosen from 
a list of "designated" courses selected 
and maintained by the Scholar Coun- 
cil. Each full-time Lycoming instruc- 
tor is invited to nominate one of 
his/her courses having special depth 
and merit for inclusion on this list. 
The Scholar Council may alter the list 
from time to time. A scholar may use 
no more than two such designated 
courses from any one department to 
satisfy this requirement. Normally, 
Scholars will not begin taking desig- 
nated courses until their sophomore 
year. 

I. Senior Project. In the senior year. 



scholars must successfully complete an 
independent studies or departmental 
honors project which has been ap- 
proved in advance by the Independent 
Studies Committee and the Scholar 
Council. This project must be present- 
ed orally and be accepted by the Schol- 
ar Council. 

J. Scholars must complete a major 
and 32 units, exclusive of the First Year 
Scholar Seminar. 

K. In the case of transfer students 
and those who seek to enter the pro- 
gram after their freshman year and in 
other cases deemed by the Scholar 
Council to involve special or extraor- 
dinary circumstances, the Council shall 
have the right to grant exceptions and 
make adjustments to the Scholar dis- 
tribution requirements provided that 
in all cases such exceptions and adjust- 
ments would still satisfy the regular 
College distribution requirements. 




19 



Curriculum 



Numbers 1-9 Elementary courses in de- 
partments where such courses are 
not counted as part of the student's 
major. 
Numbers 10-19 Freshman level courses 
Numbers 20-29 Sophomore level 

courses 
Numbers 30-39 Junior level courses 
Numbers 40-49 Senior level courses 
Numbers 50-59 Non-catalog courses 

(offered on a limited basis) 
Numbers 60-69 Applied Music 
Numbers 70-79 Internships 
Numbers 80-89 Independent Study 
Numbers 90-99 Independent Study for 
Department Honors 

Courses not in sequence are listed sep- 
arately, as: 

Drawing Art 11 

Color Theory Art 12 

Courses which imply a sequence are 
indicated with a dash between, mean- 
ing that the first semester must be tak- 
en prior to the second, as: 

Intermediate French 

French 10-11 

All students have the right of access to 
all courses. 



ACCOUNTING 

Professor: Richmond (Chairperson) 
Assistant Professors: Kuhns, Wienecke 

The purpose of the accounting major 
is to help prepare the student for a ca- 
reer within the accounting profession, 
whether public, private, or govern- 
mental, through a curriculum stressing 
pre-professional education. 

A major consists of Accounting 10, 
20-21, 30, 40, 41, 43, 45, Mathematics 
13, Computer Science 15, and one unit 
to be selected from Accounting 25, 26, 
31, 42, 44, 46, 47, and 48 or Internship. 
Business JO may be substituted for Ac- 
counting JO if a student changes ma- 
jors. Duplicate credit will not be grant- 
ed. 

Students seeking entry into the pub- 
lic accounting field are advised to in- 



vestigate the professional require- 
ments for certification in the state in 
which they intend to practice so that 
they may meet all educational require- 
ments prior to graduation. All majors 
are advised to enroll in Economics 10 
and 11, Business 35, 36, and 38, and 
one of the following: Business 33, Ec- 
onomics 20, or 37. 

Three minors are offered by the De- 
partment of Accounting. The follow- 
ing courses are required to complete a 
minor in Financial Accounting: Ac- 
counting 10, 20, 21, 43, 47 and one 
from 25 or 46. A minor in Managerial 
Accounting requires the completion of 
Accounting 10, 20, 30, 31, and 44. To 
obtain a minor in Federal Income Tax, 
a student must complete Accounting 
10, 20, 21, 41 and 42. 

10 ELEMENTARY ACCOUNTING THEORY 
An introductory course in recording, classi- 
fying, summarizing, and interpreting the 
basic business transaction. Problems of 
classification and interpretation of accounts 
and preparation of financial statements are 
studied. Prerequisite: Second-semesler 
freshman or consent of instructor 

20-21 INTERMEDIATE ACCOUNTING 
THEORY 

An intensive study of accounting statements 
and analytical procedures with an emphasis 
upon corporate accounts, various decision 
models, price-level models, earnings per 
share, pension accounting, accounting for 
leases, and financial statement analysis. 
Prerequisite: Accounting 10. 

25 FINANCIAL STATEMENT ANALYSIS 
Deals with the analysis of financial state- 
ments as an aid to decision making. The 
theme of the course is understanding the fi- 
nancial data which are analyzed as well as 
the methods by which they are analyzed and 
interpreted. This course should prove of 
value to all who need a thorough under- 
standing of the uses to which financial 
statements are put as well as to those who 
must know how to use them intelligently 
and effectively. This includes accountants, 
security analysts, lending officers, credit 
analysts, managers, and all others who 
make decisions on the basis of financial 
data. Prerequisite: Accounting 10 or Busi- 
ness 10. May term. 

26 GOVERNMENT AND FUND 
ACCOUNTING 

This course is designed to introduce account- 
ing for not-for-profit organizations. Muni- 
cipal accounting and reporting are studied. 



Prerequisite: Accounting 10 or Business 10. 
One-half unit of credit. 

30-31 COST AND BUDGETARY 
ACCOUNTING THEORY 
Methods of accounting for material, labor, 
and factory overhead expenses consumed in 
manufacturing using job order, process, 
and standard costing. Application of cost 
accounting and budgeting theory to deci- 
sion making in the area of make or buy, ex- 
pansion of production and sales, and ac- 
counting for control are dealt with. Prereq- 
uisite: Accounting 20 and Mathematics IS 
or consent of instructor. 

40 AUDITING THEORY 

A study of the science or art of verifying, 
analyzing, and interpreting accounts and re- 
pons. The goal of the course is to empha- 
size concepts which will enable students to 
understand the philosophy and environ- 
ment of auditing. Special attention is given 
to the public accounting profession, study- 
ing auditing standards, professional ethics, 
the legal liability inherent in the attest func- 
tion, the study and evaluation of internal 
control, the nature of evidence, the growing 
use of statistical sampling, the impact of 
electronic data processing, and the basic ap- 
proach to planning an audit. Finally, vari- 
ous audit reports expressing independent 
expert opinions on the fairness of financial 
statements are studied. Prerequisite: Ac- 
counting 21, Mathematics 13, and Comput- 
er Science 15. 

41 FEDERAL INCOME TAX 
ACCOUNTING AND PLANNING 

Analysis of the provisions of the Internal 
Revenue Code relating to income, deduc- 
tions, inventories, and accounting methods. 
Practical problems involving determination 
of income and deductions, capital gains and 
losses, computation and payment of taxes 
through withholding at the source and 
through declaration are considered. Planning 
transactions so that a minimum amount of 
tax will result is emphasized. Prerequisite: 
Accounting 10 or consent of instructor. 

42 FEDERAL INCOME TAX 
ADMINISTRATION AND PLANNING 
An analysis of the provisions of the Internal 
Revenue Code relating to partnerships, 
estates, trusts, and corporations. An exten- 
sive series of problems is considered, and 
effective tax planning is emphasized. Pre- 
requisite: Accounting 41. 

43 ADVANCED ACCOUNTING I 

An intensive study of partnerships, install- 
ment and consignment sales, branch ac- 
counting, bankruptcy and reorganization, 
estates and trusts, government entities, non- 
profit organizations, and accounting and 
reporting for the SEC. Prerequisite: Ac- 
counting 21. One-half unit of credit. 



20 



44 CONTROLLERSHIP 

Control process in the organization. Gener- 
al systems theory, financial control systems, 
centralization-decentralization, perform- 
ance measurement and evaluation, forecasts 
and budgets, and marketing, production 
and finance models for control purposes. 
Prerequisite: Accounling 31 or consent of 
instructor A tternate years. 

45 AUDITING PRACTICE 

An audit project is presented, solved and 
the auditor's report written. THIS 
COURSE IS LIMITED TO STUDENTS 
WHO HAVE EITHER COMPLETED OR 
ARE ENROLLED IN ACCOUNTING 40. 
One-half unit of credit. Grade will be 
recorded as "S" or "U." 

46 SEMINAR ON APB OPINIONS AND 
FASB STANDARDS 

A seminar course for accounting majors 
with library assignments to gain a workable 
understanding of the highly technical opin- 
ions of the Accounting Principles Board 
and standards of the Financial Accounting 
Standards Board. One term paper. Possible 
trip to New York City to attend a public 
hearing of the Financial Accounting Stan- 
dards Board. Prerequisite: Accounting 10. 
May term. 

47 ADVANCED ACCOUNTING II 
Certain areas of advanced accounting theo- 
ry, including business combinations, consol- 
idated financial statements, and accounting 
and reporting for the Securities and Ex- 
change Commission are covered. Prereq- 
uisite: Accounting 21. One-half unit of cred- 
it. 

48 CONTEMPORARY PROBLEMS FOR 
CPA CANDIDATES 

Problems from the Accounting Practice sec- 
tions of past C.P.A. examinations, which 
require a thorough knowledge of the core 
courses in their solution, are assigned. The 
course is intended to meet the needs of 
those interested in public accounting and 
preparation for the Certified Public Ac- 
countants Examination. Prerequisite: Ac- 
counting 30 or consent of instructor One- 
half unit of credit. Grade will be recorded 
as "S" or "U." 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Interns in accounting typically work off 
campus under the supervision of a public or 
private accountant. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Typical examples of recent studies in ac- 
counting are: computer program to generate 
financial statements, educational core for 
pubUc accountants, inventory control, and 
church taxation. 



90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 



ACCOUNTING — 
MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES 

Assistant Professor: Kuhns 
(Coordinator) 

The accounting-mathematical sciences 
interdisciplinary major is designed to 
offer, within a liberal-arts framework, 
courses which will aid in constructing 
mathematical models for business de- 
cision making. Students obtain the 
necessary substantial background in 
both mathematical sciences and ac- 
counting. 

Required accounting courses are: 
Accounting 10, 20, 21, 30, 31, 41, 42. In 
mathematical sciences required cours- 
es are: Computer Science 15 and 37 
and Mathematics 12, 18, 19, 38, and 13 
or 32. Recommended courses include: 
Mathematics 20, 33; Business 23, 34, 
35, 36, 38, 39; Computer Science 26; 
Economics 10, 11; Psychology 15, 24; 
and Sociology 10. 



AMERICAN STUDIES 

Professor: Piper 
(Coordinator) 

The American studies major offers a 
comprehensive program in American 
civilization which introduces students 
to the complexities underlying the de- 
velopment of America and its contem- 
porary life. The 13 major courses in- 
clude: 

FOUR CORE COURSES — The 

primary integrating units of the major, 
these team-taught courses will teach 
you how to think of ideas from differ- 
ent points of view and how to correlate 
information and methods from vari- 
ous disciplines: 



America As a Civilization (First se- 
mester of major study) 

American Studies — Research and 
Methodology (Second semester) 

American Tradition in the Arts and 
Literature (Third semester) 

Internship or Independent Study (Jun- 
ior and/or senior year) 

CONCENTRATION AREAS — 

Six courses in one option and three in 
the other are needed. Six primary con- 
centration-option courses in American 
Arts or American Society build around 
the insights gained in the core courses. 
They focus particular attention on 
areas most germane to academic and 
vocational interests. The three addi- 
tional courses from the other option 
give further breadth to understanding 
of America. Students also will be en- 
couraged to take elective courses relat- 
ing to other cultures. 

American Arts Concentration Option 

American Art — Art 24 
American Art of the 20th Century — Art 32 
19th Century American Literature — English 22 
20th Century American Literature — English 23 
American Music — Music 18 or 19 
American Theatre 

American Society Concentration 
Option 

U.S. Social and Intellectual History to 1877 

— History 42 

U.S. Social and Intellectual History since 1877 

— History 43 

American Economic Development 
Racial and Cultural Minorities 

— Sociology 34 

Students should design their American 
Studies major in consultation with the 
program coordinator or a member of 
the American Studies Committee. 

10 AMERICA AS A CIVILIZATION 

An analysis of the historical, sociocultural, 
economic, and political perspectives of 
American civilization with special attention 
to the inter-relationships between these vari- 
ous orientations. 

11 AMERICAN STUDIES — RESEARCH 
AND METHODOLOGY 

The study and application of various re- 
search methods, including new trends in 



21 



historical study, quantitative analysis, cross- 
cultural studies, and on-site inspection. 

12 AMERICAN TRADITION IN THE 
ARTS AND LITERATURE 
The relationships of the arts and literature 
to the various historical periods of Ameri- 
can life. 

70-79 or 80-89 INTERNSHIP OR 

INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See Index) 
An opportunity to relate the learning in the 
core courses and the concentration areas to 
an actual supervised off-campus learning 
situation or independent study project. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
HONORS (See Index) 



ART 

Associate Professors: Bogle 

(Chairperson), Shipley 
Assistant Professor: Lesko 
Part-time Instructor: Hanks 
Adjunct Faculty at Johnson Atelier: 

Van Tongeren, Barre, Lash, Pitynski 

The Art Department offers two degree 
programs: a bachelor of arts degree 
and a bachelor of fine arts in sculpture. 

The B.A. degree: 

To complete a bachelor of arts degree 
with a major in art, a student must 
complete one of the following three 
tracks: 

Ihack I — Two-Dimensional 

The two-dimensional track consists 
of Drawing I and II (Art 11 and 21), Fig- 
ure Modeling I (Art 16), Two-Dimen- 
sional Design (Art 15), and Painting I 
and II (Art 20 and 30). Printmaking I 
and II (Art 28 and 38) may be substi- 
tuted for Painting I and II (Art 20 and 
30). Students must also take Art 22 
and 23 (Survey of Art) and two addi- 
tional courses in art history (Art 24, 
31, 32, 33, 34, 39). Studio Research 
(Art 46) is required along with partici- 
pation in a senior exhibition. 

Track II — Threc-Dimensional 

The three-dimensional track con- 



sists of Drawing I and II (Art 11 and 
21), Figure Modeling (Art 16), Sculp- 
ture 1 and II (Art 25 and 35), and ei- 
ther Figure Modeling II (Art 26) or 
Sculpture III (Art 45). Students must 
also take Art 22 and Art 23 (Survey of 
Art) and two additional courses in art 
history (Art 24, 31, 32, 33, 34, 39). 
Studio Research (Art 46) is required 
along with participation in a senior ex- 
hibition. 

Track III — Commercial Design 

The commercial design track con- 
sists of Drawing I and II (Art 11 and 
21), Color Theory (Art 12), Two-Di- 
mensional Design (Art 15), Figure 
Modeling I (Art 16), Survey of Art 
(Art 22 and 23), Photography I (Art 
27), Special Projects in Commercial 
Design (Art 42), Layout and Design 
(GCO 511), Typographic Composition 
(GCO 512), and Process Camera (GCO 
521). Course descriptions for the last 
three required courses are shown un- 
der Mass Communication offerings 
available at Williamsport Area Com- 
munity College. 

The following courses are recom- 
mended: Photography II (Art 37), In- 
ternship (Art 70-79), Advertising 
(Business 32), Writing for Special Au- 
diences (English 16), Introduction to 
Mass Communication (Mass Comm 
10), Social Psychology (Psy 24). 

The BFA degree in sculpture: 

The student completes a specified 
course of study in the Art Department, 
the Lycoming College distribution re- 
quirements, and one of the field spe- 
cialization apprenticeship programs at 
the Johnson Atelier in Princeton, New 
Jersey. 

The Art Department course of study 
consists of 12 courses in studio and art 
history: Figure Modeling I and II (Art 
16 and 26), Sculpture I and II (Art 25 
and 35), Drawing I and II (Art U and 
21), Introduction to Photography (Art 
27), 2-D Design (Art 15), Survey of Art 
(Art 22 and 23), and two additional 
courses in Art History (Art 24, 31, 32, 
33, 34, 39). 

Twelve additional course units are 



required of the student. The student 
must meet the requirements of the dis- 
tribution program within these courses. 

The student must also complete one 
of the field specialization apprentice- 
ships at the Johnson Atelier Technical 
Institute of Sculpture in Princeton, 
New Jersey. This requires the student 
to be at the Johnson Atelier for a peri- 
od of between 16 and 23 1/2 months. 
The student receives eight course units 
of credit at Lycoming College for suc- 
cessfully completing the field speciali- 
zation apprenticeship at Johnson Ate- 
lier. It is expected that the work for the 
apprenticeship component will be 
completed during the summers and the 
junior year. 

Admission to the BFA degree pro- 
gram is on the basis of meeting the ad- 
mission standards of Lycoming Col- 
lege, and passing a portfolio review 
and interview by members of the Ly- 
coming College Art Department. 

Three minors are being offered by 
the Art Department. Requirements for 
each follow: Art History: Art 22, 23, 
and two advanced history courses; 
Sculpture: Art 16, 26, 25, and 35 plus 
one of the following: 21, 29, or 45; 
Painting: Art II, 15, 20, 30, and either 
21 or 23. 

II DRAWING I 

Study of the human figure with gesture and 
proportion stressed. Student is made famil- 
iar with different drawing techniques and 
media. Some drawing from nature. Offered 
in alternate semesters with Drawing II and 
III. 



12 COLOR THEORY 

A study of the physical and emotional 
aspects of color. Emphasis will be placed on 
the study of color as an aesthetic agent for 
the artist. The color theories of Johannes It- 
ten will form the base for this course with 
some study of the theories of Albert Mun- 
sell, Faber Berren, and Wilhelm Ostwald. 

15 TWO-DIMENSIONAL DESIGN 

The basic fundamentals found in the two- 
dimensional arts: line, shape, form, space, 
color, and composition are taught in rela- 
tionship to the other two-dimensional arts. 
Perceptual theories and their relationships 
to what and why we see what we see in art 
are discussed with each problem. 



22 



16 FIGURE MODELING I 

Understanding the figure will be approached 
through learning the basic structures and 
proportions of the figure. The course is con- 
ceived as a three-dimensional drawing class. 
At least one figure per student will be cast. 

19 CERAMICS I 

Emphasis placed on pottery design as it re- 
lates to function of vessels and the design 
parameters imposed by the characteristics 
of clay. The techniques of ceramics are 
taught to encourage expression rather than 
to dispense merely a technical body of in- 
formation. 

20 PAINTING I 

An introduction of painting techniques and 
materials. Coordination of color, value, 
and design within the painting is taught. 
Some painting from the figure. No limita- 
tions as to painting media, subject matter, 
or style. Prerequisite: Art 15 or consent of 
instructor. 

21 DRAWING II 

Continued study of the human figure. Em- 
phasis is placed on realism and figure- 
ground coordination with the use of value 
and design. Prerequisite: Art II. 

22 SURVEY OF ART: PRE-HISTORY 
THROUGH THE MIDDLE AGES 

A survey of Western architecture, sculpture, 
and painting. Emphasis is on the interrela- 
tion of form and content and on the related- 
ness of the visual arts to their cultural envi- 
ronment: Paleohthic Art, Near East, Egypt, 
Greece, Rome, and Medieval Europe. 

23 SURVEY OF ART: FROM THE 
RENAISSANCE THROUGH THE 
MODERN AGE 

A survey of Western architecture, sculpture, 
and painting. Emphasis is on the interrela- 
tion of form and content and on the related- 
ness of the visual arts to their cultural envi- 
ronment: 14th - 20th centuries. 

24 AMERICAN ART OF THE 18TH AND 
I9TH CENTURIES 

The development of the arts in America 
from Colonial times through the 19th cen- 
tury; from the unknown folk artist to popu- 
lar artists such as Winslow Homer and 
Thomas Eakins. 

25 SCULPTURE I 

An introduction to the techniques, materi- 
als, and ideas of sculpture. Clay, plaster, 
wax, wood, and other materials will be 
used. The course will be concerned with 
ideas about sculpture as expression, and 
with giving material form to ideas. 



26 FIGURE MODELING II 

Will exploit the structures and understand- 
ings learned in Figure Modeling I to pro- 
duce larger, more complete figurative works. 
There will be a requirement to cast one of 
the works in plaster. Prerequisite: Art 16 
and consent of instructor 

27 INTRODUCTION TO PHOTOGRAPHY 

Objectives of the course are to develop tech- 
nical skills in the use of photographic equip- 
ment (cameras, films, darkroom, print 
maker) and to develop sensitivity in the are- 
as of composition, form, light, picture 
quahty, etc. Each student must own or have 
access to a 35mm camera. 

28 PRINTMAKING 1 

Introduction to the techniques of silkscreen, 
intaglio, monotype, and hthography print- 
ing. One edition of at least six prints must 
be completed in each area. Prerequisite: Art 
II or 15 or consent of instructor 

29 CERAMICS II 

Continuation of Ceramics I. Emphasis on 
use of the wheel and technical aspects such 
as glaze making and kiln firing. Prerequi- 
site: Art 19. 

30 PAINTING U 

Emphasis is placed on individual style and 
technique. Artists and movements in art are 
studied. No limitations as to painting me- 
dia, subject matter, or style. Prerequisite: 
Art 20. 

31 20TH CENTURY EUROPEAN ART 

Stylistic developments in Europe from 1880 
to the present, including Cubism, Fauvism, 
Expressionism, Dada, and Surrealism. Pi- 
casso, Matisse, Kandinsky, and Mondrian 
are among the major artists studied. 

32 AMERICAN ART OF THE 20TH 
CENTURY 

Painting, sculpture, and architecture in the 
United States from 1900 to the present with 
emphasis on developments of the 1950's and 
I960*s: an inquiry into the meaning and his- 
torical roots of contemporary art. 

33 19TH CENTURY EUROPEAN ART 
Emphasis on painting, sculpture, and archi- 
tecture of Western Europe from 1760 to 
1900, including the work of late ISth-century 
artists David and Goya and 19th-century de- 
velopments from Romanticism through 
Post-Impressionism. 

34 ART OF THE RENAISSANCE 
Painting, sculpture, and architecture in Ita- 
ly and the Northern countries from the late 
13th century through the early 16th century. 
Anists include Giotto, Donatello, Alberti, 



Leonardo da Vinci, Michelangelo, Van 
Eyck, Durer, and Bruegel. 

35 SCULPTURE II 

A continuation of Sculpture I (Art 25). Em- 
phasis is on advanced technical processes. 
Casting of bronze and aluminum sculpture 
will be done in the school foundry. Prereq- 
uisite: Art 25. 

37 PHOTOGRAPHY II 

To extend the skills developed in Photogra- 
phy I by continued growth in technical ex- 
pertise including instruction in the use and 
capabilities of large format view cameras. 
Emphasis is placed on conceptual and aes- 
thetic aspects of photography. Prerequisite: 
Art 27. 

38 PRINTMAKING II 

Further study of the techniques of silk- 
screen, intaglio, monotype, and lithography 
printing with emphasis on multi plate and 
viscosity printing. Two editions of at least 
six prints must be completed in each of two 
areas. Prerequisite: Art 28. 

39 WOMEN IN ART 

A survey of women anists from a variety of 
viewpoints — aesthetic, historical, social, 
political and economic — which seeks to 
understand and integrate the contributions 
of women artists into the mainstream of the 
history of art. No prerequisite. 

40 PAINTING III 

Professional quality is stressed. There is 
some experimentation with new painting 
techniques and styles. 

41 DRAWING III 

Continued study of human figure, individu- 
al style, and professional control of drawing 
techniques and media are now emphasized. 

42 SPECIAL PROJECT IN COMMERCIAL 
DESIGN 

Concentrated research, preparation, and ex- 
ecution of one major project in commercial 
design chosen by the student in consultation 
with the instructor. Preliminary concepts, 
preparatory layout and design and finished 
work will culminate in a portfolio and pre- 
sentation. Prerequisite: permission of the 
Art Department. 

45 SCULPTURE III 

In Sculpture III the student is expected to 
produce a series of sculptures that follow a 
conceptual and technical line of develop- 
ment. Prerequisites: Art 16, 25, and 35. 

46 STUDIO RESEARCH 

Independent research in an elective studio 
area, conducted under the supervision of 



23 



the appropriate faculty member, includes 
creation of work which may be incorporat- 
ed in the senior group exhibition. Student 
works in private studio assigned by the de- 
partment. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Commercial design, interior design, and 
photography programs in local businesses, 
and museum work at the Lycoming County 
Historical Museum. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Recent studies in anatomy. Aspects of the art 
nouveau, lithography, photography, pottery, 
problems in illustration, and watercolor. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 



ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS 

Professor: Fineman (on leave) 
Associate Professor: Erickson 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant Professor: Fisher, Keig 

The department offers two majors. 
The major in astronomy is specifically 
designed to train students in the field 
of planetarium education; it also may 
serve as a basis for earning state certi- 
fication as a secondary school teacher 
of general science. The major in phys- 
ics can prepare students for graduate 
work in physics, astronomy, and relat- 
ed physical sciences, for the coopera- 
tive program in engineering, for state 
certification as secondary school 
teachers of physics, or for technical 
positions in industry. 

Astronomy 

The major in astronomy requires As- 
tronomy II, either 12 or 13, 30, 44, 45, 
and 46; Physics 25 and 26; Mathemat- 
ics 18 and 19; and Chemistry 10 and 11 
or 30 and 31. Juniors and seniors ma- 
joring in astronomy are also required 
to register for four semesters of As- 
tronomy 49 (non-credit colloquia). In 
addition, the following cognate cours- 
es are recommended: Physics 27 and 
33; Philosophy 21, 22, and 33; Music 
22; and Art 27. 



3 OBSERVATIONAL ASTRONOMY 

A methods course providing the opportuni- 
ty to make a variety of astronomical obser- 
vations, both visually and photographically, 
with and without telescopes. The planetari- 
um is used to familiarize the student with 
the sky at various times during the year and 
from different locations on earth. May or 
summer term only. 

4 FIELD GEOLOGY 

A methods course introducing the field 
techniques needed to study the geology of 
an area. May or summer term only. 

5 HISTORY OF ASTRONOMY 

A comprehensive view of the evolution of 
astronomical thought from ancient Greece 
to the present, emphasizing the impact that 
astronomical discoveries and the conquest 
of space have had on Western culture. May 
or summer term only. 

1 PRINCIPLES OF ASTRONOMY (B) 

11 PRINCIPLES OF ASTRONOMY (A) 

A summary of current concepts of the uni- 
verse from the solar system to distant galax- 
ies. Describes the techniques and instru- 
ments used in astronomical research. Pre- 
sents not only what is reasonably well 
known about the universe, but also consid- 
ers some of the major unsolved problems. 
Astronomy I and II share the same three 
hours of lecture and two hours of laborato- 
ry each week. II has one additional hour 
each week for more advanced mathematical 
treatment of the material. Credit may not 
be earned for both I and II. Corequisite for 
II: Mathematics 17 or consent of instructor. 

2 EARTH SCIENCE (B) 

12 EARTH SCIENCE (A) 

A study of the physical processes that con- 
tinually affect the planet Earth, shaping our 
environment. Describes how past events 
and lifeforms can be reconstructed from 
preserved evidence to reveal the history of 
our planet from its origin to the present. Em- 
phasizes the ways in which geology, meteor- 
ology, and oceanography interrelate with 
man and the environment. Astronomy 2 
and 12 share the same three hours of lecture 
and two hours of laboratory each week. 12 
has one additional hour each week for more 
advanced mathematical treatment of the 
material. Credit may not be earned for both 
2 and 12. Corequisite for 12: Mathematics 
17 or consent of instructor 

13 METEOROLOGY 

The general properties of the atmosphere 
and their measurements will be discussed in 
terms of basic physical and chemical laws. 
T\vo basic themes will guide the approach, 
i.e., the atmosphere behaves like a giant 
heat engine, and weather patterns exist 



from a micro-to-macro scale. May or sum- 
mer term only. Alternate years. 

30 PLANETARIUM TECHNIQUES 

A methods course covering major aspects 
of planetarium programming, operation 
and maintenance. Students are required to 
prepare and present a planetarium show. 
Upon successfully completing the course, 
students are eligible to become planetarium 
assistants. Three hours of lecture and dem- 
onstration and three hours of practical 
training per week. Prerequisites: Astronomy 
I or II (Principles of Astronomy) or consent 
of instructor. Alternate years. 

44 RELATIVITY AND COSMOLOGY 

A detailed presentation of the special theory 
of relativity, and a short view of the general 
theory and its classical proofs. Man's con- 
cepts of the universe, with particular atten- 
tion to alternative modern cosmological 
models. Discussion of the Cosmological 
Principle, its rationale, and its implications. 
Four hours of lecture per week. Prerequi- 
sites: Astronomy II (Principles of Astrono- 
my A) and Physics 25 (Introductory Physics 
with Calculus 1). Alternate years. Cross- 
listed as Physics 44. 

45 STELLAR EVOLUTION 

The physical principles governing the inter- 
nal structure and external appearance of 
stars. Mechanisms of energy generation and 
transport within stars. The evolution of 
stars from initial formation to final stages. 
The creation of chemical elements by nucle- 
osynthesis. Four hours of lecture per week. 
Prerequisites: Astronomy II (Principles of 
Astronomy A) and Physics 26 (Introductory 
Physics with Calculus II). Alternate years. 

46 STELLAR DYNAMICS AND 
GALACTIC STRUCTURE 

The motion of objects in gravitational 
fields. Introduction to the n-body problem. 
The relation between stellar motions and 
the galactic potential. The large scale struc- 
ture of galaxies in general and of the Milky 
Way Galaxy in particular. Four hours of lec- 
ture per week. Prerequisites: Astronomy II 
(Principles of Astronomy A) and Physics 25 
(Introductory Physics with Calculus I). Al- 
ternate years. 

49 ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS 
COLLOQUIA 

This non-credit but required course for jun- 
iors and seniors majoring in astronomy and 
physics offers students a chance to meet and 
hear active scientists in astronomy, physics, 
and related scientific areas talk about their 
own research or professional activities. In 
addition, majors in astronomy and physics 
must present two lectures, one given during 
the junior year and one given during the 



24 



senior year, on the results of a literature sur- 
vey or on individual research. Students ma- 
joring in this department are required to at- 
tend four semesters during the junior and 
senior years. A letter grade will be given 
when the student gives a lecture. Otherwise 
the grade will be S/U. Students in the Coop- 
erative Program in Liberal Arts and Engi- 
neering are required to attend two semesters 
and present one lecture during their junior 
year. One hour per week. Cross-listed as 
Physics 49. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Independent studies may be undertaken in 
most areas of astronomy. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 



Physics 

The major in physics requires Physics 
25, 26, 31, 32, and four additional 
physics courses numbered 27 and 
above. Up to two courses chosen from 
Astronomy 11, 12, 13, 45, and 46 may 
substitute for two of the four physics 
electives. Also required are Mathemat- 
ics 18 and 19, and Chemistry 10 and 11 
or 30 and 31. Juniors and seniors ma- 
joring in physics are required to regis- 
ter for four semesters of Physics 49 
(non-credit colloquia). In addition, the 
following cognate courses are recom- 
mended: Mathematics 20 and 21 (these 
are required for the cooperative engi- 
neering program and by most gradu- 
ate schools); Computer Science 15 (re- 
quired for the cooperative engineering 
program); and Philosophy 21, 22, and 
33. A foreign language is recommend- 
ed for students planning on graduate 
study. 

6 ENERGY ALTERNATIVES 

A physicist's definition of work, energy, and 
power. The various energy sources available 
for use, such as fossil fuels, nuclear fission 
and fusion, hydro, solar, wind, and geo- 
thermal. The advantages and disadvantages 
of each energy conversion method, includ- 
ing availability, efficiency, and environmen- 
tal effects. Present areas of energy research 
and possible future developments. Projec- 
tions of possible future energy demands. 
Exercises and experiments in energy collec- 
tion, conversion, and utilization. May or 
summer term only. 



15-16 PHYSICS WITH LIFE SCIENCE 
APPLICATIONS 
The basic concepts, principles, and laws of 
physics are presented in this noncalculus in- 
troductory physics course. Topics include 
mechanics, elastic properties of matter, flu- 
ids, thermodynamics, electricity and mag- 
netism, waves, optics, and radioactivity. 
Many of the examples and problems used to 
illustrate the physics are selected from the 
life sciences. Three hours of lecture, one 
hour of recitation, and one Ihree-hour labo- 
ratory per week. Prerequisite: Mathematics 
17 or consent of instructor. (Credit may not 
be earned for both 15 and 25 or for both 16 
and 26.) 

25-26 INTRODUCTORY PHYSICS WITH 
CALCULUS 
A mathematically rigorous introduction to 
physics designed for majors in physics, as- 
tronomy, chemistry, and mathematics. 
Topics include mechanics, thermodynamics, 
electricity and magnetism, waves, optics, 
and modern physics. Five hours of lecture 
and recitation and one three-hour laborato- 
ry per week. Corequisite: Mathematics 
18-19 (Calculus I and II). (Credit may not be 
earned for both 15 and 25 or for both 16 and 
26.) 

27 ELECTRONICS 

D.C. and A.C. circuit and network theory, 
active devices such as transistors, opera- 
tional amplifiers, integrated circuits, and in- 
troduction to digital electronics will be cov- 
ered. Three lectures and two two-hour labo- 
ratory sessions per week. Prerequisites: 
Physics 16 or 26, and Mathematics 9 or 18 
or consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

31 MECHANICS 

Kinematics and dynamics of single particles 
and systems of particles. Rigid bodies. In- 
troduction to the mechanics of continuous 
media. Moving reference frames. Lagrangi- 
an mechanics. Four hours of lecture and 
three hours of laboratory per week. Prereq- 
uisites: Physics 25 (Introductory Physics 
with Calculus 1) and Mathematics 19 (Cal- 
culus II). 

32 ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 
The electromagnetic field, electrical poten- 
tial, magnetic field, and electric and mag- 
netic properties of matter. Electric circuits. 
Maxwell's equations. Laboratory includes 
electronics as well as classical electricity and 
magnetism. Four hours of lecture and three 
hours of laboratory per week. Prerequisite: 
Physics 26 (Introductory Physics with Cal- 
culus II). 

33 OPTICS 

Geometrical optics, optical systems, physi- 
cal optics, interference, Fraunhofer and 



Fresnel diffraction, and coherence and 
lasers will be covered. Three hours of lec- 
ture and three hours of laboratory per 
week. Prerequisites: Physics 16 or 26, and 
Mathematics 9 or 18 or consent of instruc- 
tor. Alternate years. 

37 THERMODYNAMICS AND 
STATISTICAL MECHANICS 
Classical thermodynamics will be present- 
ed, showing that the macroscopic properties 
of a system can be specified without a 
knowledge of the microscopic properties of 
the constituents of the system. Then statisti- 
cal mechanics will be developed, showing 
that these same macroscopic properties are 
determined by the microscopic properties. 
Four hours of lecture and recitation per 
week. Prerequisites: Physics 26 (Introduc- 
tory Physics with Calculus II) and Mathe- 
matics 19 (Calculus II). Alternate years. 

38 ATOMIC AND MOLECULAR PHYSICS 

The development of the principles and 
methods of quantum mechanics from the 
earliest evidence of quantization. Structure 
and spectra of atoms and molecules. Exten- 
sion of quantum theory to the solid slate. 
Four hours of lecture and recitation and one 
three-hour laboratory per week. Prerequi- 
site: Physics 26 (Introductory Physics with 
Calculus II) and Mathematics 19 (Calculus 
II). Alternate years. 

44 RELATIVITY AND COSMOLOGY 

A detailed presentation of the special theory 
of relativity, and a short view of the general 
theory and its classical proofs. Man's con- 
cepts of the universe, with particular atten- 
tion to alternative modern cosmological 
models. Discussion of the Cosmological 
Principle, its rationale, and its implications. 
Four hours of lecture per week. Prerequi- 
sites: Astronomy 11 (Principles of Astrono- 
my A) and Physics 25 (Introductory Physics 
with Calculus 1). Alternate years. Cross-list- 
ed as Astronomy 44. • 

47 NUCLEAR AND PARTICLE PHYSICS 
The course will consider properties of nu- 
clei, nuclear models, radioactivity, nuclear 
reactions (including fission and fusion), and 
properties of elementary particles. The in- 
teractions of nuclear particles with matter 
and the detection of nuclear particles will be 
covered. It will be shown how observed 
phenomena lead to theories on the nature of 
fundamental interactions, how these forces 
act at the smallest measurable distances, 
and what is expected to occur at even small- 
er distances. Four hours of lecture and reci- 
tation and two hours of laboratory per 
week. Prerequisites: either Physics 26 (In- 
troductory Physics with Calculus II) or 
Physics 16 (Physics with Life Science Ap- 
plications II), Mathematics 19, and either 



25 



Physics 38 (Atomic and Molecular Physics) 
or Chemistry 10. Alternate years. 

48 INTRODUCTION TO QUANTUM 
MECHANICS 

Basic concepts and formulation of quantum 
theory. The free particle, the simple har- 
monic oscillator, the hydrogen atom, and 
central force problems will be discussed. 
Both time-independent and time-dependent 
penurbation theory will be covered. Four 
hours of lecture and recitation. Prerequi- 
site: either Physics 26 (Introductory Physics 
with Calculus II) or Chemistry 31 (Physical 
Chemistry II), and Mathematics 21 (Differ- 
ential Equations). Cross-listed as Chemistry 
39. 

49 ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS 
COLLOQUIA 

This non-credit but required course for jun- 
iors and seniors majoring in astronomy and 
physics offers students a chance to meet and 
hear active scientists in astronomy, physics, 
and related scientific areas talk about their 
own research or professional activities. In 
addition, majors in astronomy and physics 
must present two lectures, one given during 
the junior year and one given during the 
senior year, on the results of a literature sur- 
vey or on individual research. Students ma- 
joring in this department are required to at- 
tend four semesters during the junior and 
senior years. A letter grade will be given 
when the student gives a lecture. Otherwise 
the grade will be S/U. Students in the Cooi> 
erative Program in Liberal Arts and Engi- 
neering are required to attend two semesters 
and present one lecture during their junior 
year. One hour per week. Cross-listed as 
Astronomy 49. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Interns in physics work off campus under 
the supervision of professional physicists 
employed by local industries or hospitals. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Independent studies may be undertaken in 
most areas of physics. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 



BIOLOGY 

Associate Professors: Angstatit 
(Chairperson), Diehl, Zaccaria 

Assistant Professors: Gabriel, 
Pottmeyer, Zimmerman 

A major consists of eight biology 



courses, including 10-11, 21, 22, 23, 24, 
and 25. With departmental consent. 
Biology 26 may be substituted for Bi- 
ology 21. Only two courses numbered 
below 20 may count toward the major. 
Departmental internships cannot be 
used to fulfill the eighth required 
course. In addition, three units of 
chemistry and two units of mathemati- 
cal science are required. The chemistry 
requirement must include at least one 
unit of organic chemistry chosen from 
Chemistry 15, 20, or 21. The mathe- 
matical science courses must be chosen 
from Computer Science 15 and Mathe- 
matics 9, 13, 17 or above, or their 
equivalent. Certain specific exceptions 
to the core program will be made for 
three-year students enrolled in cooper- 
ative programs. Such exceptions are 
noted under the particular cooperative 
program described in the Academic 
Program chapter of the catalog. Stu- 
dents interested in these programs 
should contact the program director 
before finalizing their individual pro- 
grams. Credit may not be earned for 
both Biology 1 and 10 or for both Biol- 
ogy 2 and 11. Consent of instructor 
may replace Biology 10-11 as a prere- 
quisite for all biology courses. 

A minor in Biology requires the 
completion of four upper-level (20's or 
higher) courses, with their appropriate 
prerequisites. At least two of these 
must be from the 20's series of courses. 
A minor with a special name (e.g.. En- 
vironmental Science) may be designed 
by an individual. 

1-2 PRINCIPLES OF BIOLOGY 

An investigation of biological principles, in- 
cluding ecological systems, form and func- 
tion in .selected representative organisms 
(especially man), cell theory, molecular biol- 
ogy, reproduction, inheritance, adaptation, 
and evolution. The course is designed pri- 
marily for students not planning to major in 
the biological sciences. Three hours of lec- 
ture and one I wo-hour laboratory per week. 

3 FIELD BIOLOGY FOR TEACHERS 

A methods course for students preparing to 
teach biology. Sources and methods of col- 
lecting and preserving various plant and an- 
imal materials. Summer term only. 

5-6 HUMAN BIOLOGY 

An introduction to the physics and chemis- 



try relative to biological systems. Human 
anatomy, physiology, and developmental 
biology will be surveyed. An introduction 
to microbiology with emphasis given to 
host-pathogen relationships and the im- 
mune response. Three hours of lecture and 
one three-hour laboratory per week. Not 
open to students who have received credit 
for Biology 13-14. 

10-11 INTRODUCTION TO BIOLOGY 

An introduction to the study of biology de- 
signed for students planning to major in the 
biological sciences. Major topics considered 
include the origin of life, cellular respiration 
and photosynthesis, genetics, development, 
anatomy and physiology, ecology, behavior, 
and evolution. Three hours of lecture and 
one three-hour laboratory per week. 



13-14 



HUMAN ANATOMY AND 
PHYSIOLOGY 



Using the organ-systems approach, the 
course is an introduction to the human 
body — its anatomy, physiology, and normal 
development — with particular attention to 
structure and function at all levels of its 
biological organization (molecular through 
organismal). Three hours of lecture, one 
hour of discussion, and one three-hour lab 
per week. Prerequisite: Chemistry IS or 
Chemistry 20 or consent of instructor 

21 MICROBIOLOGY 

A study of microorganisms. Emphasis is 
given to the identification and physiology 
of microorganisms as well as to their role in 
disease, their economic importance, and in- 
dustrial applications. Three hours of lecture 
and two two-hour laboratory periods per 
week. Prerequisite: Biology 10-11. Not open 
to students who have received credit for Bi- 
ology 26. 

22 GENETICS 

A general consideration of the principles 
governing inheritance, including treatment 
of classical, molecular, cytological, physio- 
logical, microbial, human, and population 
genetics. Three hours of lecture and two 
two-hour laboratory periods per week. 
Prerequisite: Biology 10-11. 

23 ANIMAL PHYSIOLOGY 

The mechanisms and functions of animal 
systems, including the autonomic, endo- 
crine, digestive, cardio-vascular, respiratory, 
renal, nervous, and reproductive systems. 
Mammalian physiology is stressed. Three 
hours of lecture and one three-hour labora- 
tory per week. Prerequisite: Biology lO-II. 

24 ECOLOGY 

The study of the principles of ecology with 
emphasis on the role of chemical, physical, 
and biological factors affecting the distribu- 
tion and succession of plant and animal 



26 



populations and communities. Included will 
be field studies of local habitats as well as 
laboratory experimentation. Two hours of 
lecture and one four-hour laboratory per 
week. Prerequisite: Biology 10-11. 

25 PLANT SCIENCES 

A survey of the structure, development, 
function, classification, and use of plants 
and related organisms. The study will com- 
prise four general topic areas: form, includ- 
ing morphology and anatomy of plants in 
growih and reproduction; function, con- 
centrating on nutrition and metabolism pe- 
culiar to photosynthetic organisms; classifi- 
cation systems and plant identification, and 
human uses of plants. Three hours of lec- 
ture and one three-hour laboratory per 
week. Prerequisite: Biology 10-11. 

26 MICROBIOLOGY FOR THE HEALTH 
SCIENCES 

A study of microorganisms with emphasis 
given to their taxonomy and their role in 
various aspects of human infectious disease. 
Mechanisms for treating and preventing in- 
fectious diseases will be presented. Labora- 
tory to include diagnostic culture proce- 
dures, antibiotic sensitivity testing, serology, 
anaerobic techniques and a study of hemo- 
lytic reactions. Three hours of lecture and 
four hours of laboratory per week. Prereq- 
uisites: one year of introductory level biolo- 
gy, one year of chemistry or consent of in- 
structor Not open to students who have re- 
ceived credit for Biology 21. 

28 AQUATIC BIOLOGY 

A field-oriented course dealing with 
freshwater ecosystems. Studies will include 
a survey of the plankton, benthos, and fish 
— as well as the physical and chemical char- 
acteristics of water that influence their dis- 
tribution. Several local field trips and a one- 
week trip to a field station will familiarize 
students with the diversity of habitats and 
the techniques of limnologists. May term 
only. Prerequisites: Biology 10-11. 

30 COMPARATIVE ANATOMY OF 
VERTEBRATES 

Detailed examination of the origins, struc- 
ture, and functions of the principal organs 
of the vertebrates. Special attention is given 
to the progressive modification of organs 
from lower to higher vertebrates. Three 
hours of lecture and one four-hour labora- 
tory per week. Prerequisite: Biology 10-11. 
Alternate years. 

31 HISTOLOGY 

A study of the basic body tissues and the 
microscopic anatomy of the organs and 
structures of the body which are formed 
from them. Focus is on normal human his- 
tology. Three hours of lecture and one four- 



hour laboratory per week. Prerequisite: Bi- 
ology 10-11. Alternate years. 

32 PLANT AND GREENHOUSE 
MANAGEMENT 

A course concerned with the care of house- 
plants and the management of small green- 
houses. Class time will include lectures, dis- 
cussions, demonstrations, greenhouse exer- 
cises, and field trips to local greenhouses. 
Topics will include the theoretical and prac- 
tical aspects of the care and feeding, propa- 
gation, light and water requirements, and 
disease control for many of the common 
house and greenhouse plants. Prerequisite: 
Biology 1-2 or 10-11. May term only. 

33 ECONOMIC AND 
SYSTEMATIC BOTANY 

Structure and classification of plants with 
emphasis on those species, particularly food 
and drug plants, having significance for 
human affairs. Three hours of lecture and 
one three-hour laboratory per week. Pre- 
requisites: Biology 10-11, Biology 25. Alter- 
nate years. 

34 INVERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY 
Comparative study of the invertebrate 
phyla with emphasis on phylogeny, physiol- 
ogy, morphology, and ecology. Two three- 
hour lecture/ laboratory periods per week. 
Prerequisite: Biology 10-11. Alternate years. 

35 CELLULAR PHYSIOLOGY 

Physicochemical background of cellular 
function: functions of membrane systems 
and organelles; metabolic pathways; bio- 
chemical and cellular bases of growth, devel- 
opment and responses of organisms. Three 
hours of lecture and one three-hour labora- 
tory per week. Prerequisite: Biology 10-11 
and a year of chemistry. Alternate years. 

39 MEDICAL GENETICS 

This course is concerned with the relation- 
ships of heredity to disease. Discussions will 
focus on topics such as chromosomal ab- 
normalities, metabolic variation and dis- 
ease, somatic cell genetics, genetic screen- 
ing, and immunogenetics. Laboratory exer- 
cises will offer practical experiences in ge- 
netic diagnostic techniques. Prerequisite: 
Biology 1-2 or 10-11. May term only. 

40 PARASITOLOGY AND MEDICAL 
ENTOMOLOGY 

The biology of parasites and parasitism. 
Studies on the major groups of animal par- 
asites and anthropod vectors of disease will 
involve taxonomy and life cycles. Emphasis 
will be made on parasites of medical and 
veterinary importance. Three hours of lec- 
ture and one three-hour laboratory per 
week. Prerequisite: Biology 10-11. Alternate 
vears. 



41 VERTEBRATE EMBRYOLOGY 

A study of the development of vertebrates 
from fertilization to the fully formed fetus. 
Particular attention is given to the chick and 
human as representative organisms. Two 
three-hour lecture/ laboratory periods per 
week. Prerequisite: Biology 10-11. Alternate 
years. 

42 ANIMAL BEHAVIOR 

A study of the causation, function, evolu- 
tion, and biological significance of animal 
behaviors in their normal environment and 
social contexts. Three hours of lecture and 
one four-hour laboratory each week. Pre- 
requisite: Biology 10-11. Alternate years. 

44 BIOCHEMISTRY 

Emphasis is given to the metabolism of car- 
bohydrates, lipids, amino acids, proteins, 
and nucleic acids; integration of metabo- 
lism; and biochemical control mechanisms, 
including allosteric control, induction, re- 
pression, as well as the various types of in- 
hibitive control mechanisms. Three hours 
of lecture, one three-hour laboratory and 
one hour of arranged work per week. Pre- 
requisite: Chemistry 20-21 or Chemistry 15, 
or consent of instructor Cross-listed as 
Chemistry 44. Alternate years. 

45 RADIATION BIOLOGY 

A study of the effects of ionizing and non- 
ionizing irradiations on cells, tissues and or- 
ganisms. Consideration will be given to re- 
pair mechanisms and how repair deficien- 
cies elucidate the nature of irradiation dam- 
age. Three hours of lecture and one three- 
hour lab per week. Prerequisites: Biology 
10-11, one year of chemistry. Alternate years. 

46 PLANT ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 

A study of plant physiology as a function of 
plant anatomy. Metabolic relationships and 
environmental factors will be examined 
from a background of the structure and de- 
velopment of cells, tissues, organs, and 
whole plants. Three hours of lecture and 
one three-hour laboratory per week. Pre- 
requisites: Biology 10-11, Biology 25. Alter- 
nate years. 

47 IMMUNOLOGY 

The course introduces concepts concerning 
how pathogens cause disease and host de- 
fense mechanisms against infectious dis- 
eases. Characterization of and relationships 
between antigens, haptens, and antibodies 
are presented. Serological assays will in- 
clude: agglutination precipitations, immu- 
nofluorescence, Immunoelectrophoresis, 
and complement fixation. Other topics are: 
immediate and delayed hypersensitivities 
(i.e. allergies such as hay fever and poison 
ivy), immunological renal diseases, immu- 
nohematology (blood groups, etc.), the 



27 



chemistry and function of complement au- 
toimmunity, and organ graft rejection phe- 
nomena. Three hours of lecture, one ihree- 
hour laboratory, and one hour of arranged 
work per week. Prerequisite: Biology lO-II. 
Alternate years. 

48 ENDOCRINOLOGY 

This course begins with a survey of the role 
of the endocrine hormones in the integra- 
tion of body functions. This is followed by 
a study of the control of hormone synthesis 
and release, and a consideration of the 
mechanisms by which hormones ac- 
complish their effects on target organs. Two 
three-hour lecture/ laboratory periods per 
week. Prerequisite: Biology io-l I. Alternate 
years. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Recent samples of internships in the depart- 
ment include ones with the Department of 
Environmental Resources, nuclear medicine 
or rehabilitative therapies at a local hospi- 
tal. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Departmental studies are experimentally 
oiiented and may entail either lab or field 
work. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 

Examples of recent honors projects have in- 
volved stream analysis, gypsy moth re- 
search, drug synthesis and testing. 



BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

Professor: HoUenback 
Associate Professor: Weaver 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant Professors: Gordon, 

Liebman 
Lecturer: Larrabee 

To graduate with a major in business 
administration, a student must com- 
plete one of two tracks: 

Track I — Business Management 

This track is designed to train stu- 
dents in the functions of today's profit 
and nonprofit organizations. The pro- 
gram provides a well-balanced prepa- 
ration for a wide variety of careers, in- 
cluding general administration, per- 
sonnel administration, commercial 



banking, investments and portfolio 
management, security analysis, corpo- 
rate financial management, general 
marketing, sales, product manage- 
ment, advertising, retail merchandis- 
ing, and production and manufactur- 
ing management. 

Required courses are Business 10-11, 
23, 28-29, 38-39, 40, and 41, and 
Mathematics 13. Business 32 or 43 
may be substituted for Business 29, 
and Business 33 may be substituted for 
Business 39. Accounting 10 may be 
substituted for Business 10 if the stu- 
dent is transferring into the business 
administration major, but duplicate 
credit will not be granted. 

Majors are also urged to enroll in 
Economics 10 and 11, Business 35 and 
36, Mathematics 12, and Computer 
Science 15. Majors also are encouraged 
to take a foreign language. The addi- 
tional elective offerings are intended 
to add depth in the areas of finance, 
marketing, and management. 

Track II — Management Science 

This track is designed to train stu- 
dents in the quantitative aspects of 
business administration. It provides 
excellent undergraduate preparation 
for graduate study in management sci- 
ence, operations research, and quanti- 
tative business administration. The 
program also provides a solid prepara- 
tion for careers in production control, 
systems analysis, research, forecast- 
ing, industrial and technical sales and 
any of the functional areas of business 
where quantitative training would be 
an added qualification. 

Required courses are Business 10-11, 
23, 38-39, 46; Economics 10, 11, 41; 
Mathematics 18-19, 12, 13, 38, and 
Computer Science 15. Accounting 10 
may be substituted for Business 10 if 
the student is transferring into the 
business administration major. 

10-11 MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING 

The business firm is a decision-making in- 
stitution adapting to a constantly changing 
environment. Future administrators and 
managers are introduced to their steward- 
ship responsibilities by use of accounting 
and statistical techniques as tools in plan- 



ning and controlling the organization. 

23 QUANTITATIVE BUSINESS ANALYSIS 
Techniques of quantitative analysis useful in 
making business decisions. Topics include: 
decision theory, inventory models, network 
models, queuing, forecasting, and utility 
Prerequisite: Mathematics 13 or consent of 
instructor 

28-29 MARKETING MANAGEMENT 

Planning, organization, and control of the 
distribution activities of the firm, and an 
analysis and evaluation of the marketing 
system, its institutions, and processes. Ap- 
plication of marketing principles and the 
development of strategies for specific mar- 
keting problems. Product, channel flow, 
promotion, and pricing strategies explored. 
Readings, cases, and games. 

32 ADVERTISING 

Nature, scope, methods, and effects of pro- 
motion. Techniques of analysis and control 
in the use of advertising and publicity as 
tools in developing business strategy. 

33 INVESTMENTS 

An introduction to the financial sector of 
the economy and the structure and func- 
tions of financial markets and the agencies 
involved; brokerage houses and stock ex- 
changes; the various types of investments 
available. Techniques used to evaluate fi- 
nancial securities. Also covered are recent 
developments in investment theory. 

34 INSURANCE 

Analysis of the major insurance methods of 
overcoming risk, including life, accident, 
health, marine, and social insurance. Fideli- 
ty and surety bonds. Commercial and gov- 
ernment plans. 



35 LEGAL PRINCIPLES I 

Lectures and analysis of cases on the na- 
ture, sources, and fundamentals of the law 
in general, and particularly as relating to 
contracts, agency, and negotiable instru- 
ments. Open only to juniors and seniors. 

36 LEGAL PRINCIPLES II 

Lectures on the fundamentals and history 
of the law relating to legal association, real 
property, wills, and estates. Open only to 
Juniors and seniors. 

38-39 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT 

Financial planning, analysis, and control in 
corporations. Development and application 
of financial principles. Financial market, 
profit planning, ratio analysis, working 
capital management, interest rates and 
capital budgeting, financial and operating 
leverage, cost of capital, valuation, divi- 



28 



dend policy, long-and short-term financing, 
leases, mergers, and acquisitions. Prerequi- 
site: Business II or Accounting 20, and 
Business 23. 

40 MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS 
Structural characteristics and functional re- 
lationships of a business organization as 
well as the problems encountered in coor- 
dinating the internal resources of a firm. 
Emphasis on administrative efficiency and 
procedures. 

41 BUSINESS POLICIES 

Planning, organization, and control of 
business operations; setting of goals; coor- 
dination of resources, development of poli- 
cies. Analysis of strategic decisions encom- 
passing all areas of a business, and the use 
and analysis of control measures. Emphasis 
on both the internal relationship of various 
elements of production, finance, market- 
ing, and personnel, and the relationship of 
the business entity to external stimuli. Read- 
ings, cases, and games. Prerequisites: Busi- 
ness 23, 28-29. 38-39, and 40, or consent of 
instructor Seniors only. 

42 PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT 

An introduction to the managerial prob- 
lems of recruiting, selecting, training, and 
retraining the human resources of the firm. 
Emphasis is placed on the interrelationship 
of personnel policies with management ob- 
jectives and philosophies in such areas as 
fringe benefits, wage and salary policies, 
union activities, and health and safety. 

43 RETAIL MANAGEMENT I 

Planning, organization, and control of the 
retailing firm. Competitive strategy devel- 
opment through store location, layout, ad- 
ministration organization, buying, and 
pricing. Cases, readings, and papers. 

45 MARKETING RESEARCH 

This is a study of the principles and practic- 
es of Marketing Research. The focus is on 
the development and application of Market- 
ing Research Studies. Topics covered include 
selection of a research design, project plan- 
ning and scheduling, data specification and 
gathering, quantitative methods to analyze 
data, interpretation of data, and research 
report writing. Readings, cases, and re- 
search project. Prerequisite: Mathematics 
13, Business 28, or consent of instructor 

46 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 

An introduction to the planning, organiz- 
ing, and controlling of operations in a pro- 
ductive facility. The course also incor- 
porates quantitative techniques used in pro- 
duction- and operations-management appli- 
cations. Topics include: capacity and layout 
planning, facility locations, job design and 



work measurement, production planning 
and scheduling, inventory and quality con- 
trol. Prerequisite: Business 23 or consent of 
instructor 

47 CREATIVE ADVERTISING 

A workshop concerned with theme, copy, 
and effective presentation of advertisements 
for print media, radio, and direct mail. Pri- 
marily an exploration of creativity through 
analysis of works of artists and writers with 
application to practical advertising, and tai- 
lored to the interests of individual students. 
May term. 

48 SALES SEMINAR 

The role of selling in the economy. The art of 
creative selling; application of theories from 
the behavioral sciences to selling through the 
analysis of sales situations and techniques. 

49 MANAGING THE SMALL BUSINESS 
How the potential businessman proceeds in 
establishing, operating, and profiting from 
a small business operation. Considered and 
analyzed are such aspects as marketing, 
managing, financing, promoting, insuring, 
establishing, developing, and staffing the 
small retail, wholesale service, and manu- 
facturing firm. May term. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Typical examples are marketing analysis for 
a paper products firm, planning a branch 
store, hotel and real estate management, 
banking and insurance. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Examples of recent studies are: the eco- 
nomic impact of a college on a community; 
a marketing strategy for a local firm enter- 
ing the consumer market. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 
A recent project was a study of the evolution 
of anti-trust legislation in the United States. 



CHEMISTRY 

Professors: Hummer, Radspinner 
Associate Professor: Franz 

(Chairperson) 
Part-time Instructor: Baggett 

A major in chemistry consists of 
Chemistry 10-11, 20-21, 30-31, 32 and 
33; Physics 25-26; Mathematics 18, 19 
and one of the following courses: 



Mathematics 13, 20, 21, 32, or Com- 
puter Science 15. Mathematics 20 and 
21 and French or German are strongly 
recommended for students planning 
on graduate study in chemistry. To be 
certified in secondary education, 
chemistry majors must also pass two 
biology courses numbered 10 or higher. 
A minor in Chemistry requires com- 
pletion of four courses numbered 20 
or higher; at least one must be taken 
from each of the following groups: 
Group A (20, 21, 40, 41, 44, 45) and 
Group B (26 or 32, 30, 31, 33, 39, 43). 
Named minors in specialized areas 
may be designed by students with de- 
partmental approval. 

8 CHEMICAL PRINCIPLES 

An introduction to the principles of inor- 
ganic chemistry. Topics include atomic and 
molecular structure, nomenclature, gases, 
solutions, acids and bases, kinetics, equihb- 
rium, oxidation-reduction, and stoichiom- 
etry. The approach is primarily descriptive, 
with illustrations drawn mostly from the 
health sciences. Along with Chemistry 15, 
this course is designed for those students 
who require only two semesters of chemis- 
try, and is not intended for students plan- 
ning to enroll in chemistry courses num- 
bered 20 or above. Three hours lecture, one 
hour discussion, and one three-hour labo- 
ratory period each week. Prerequisite: high 
school algebra or Math 5. Not open for 
credit to students who have received credit 
for Chemistry 10. 

10 GENERAL CHEMISTRY I 

A quantitative introduction to the concepts 
and models of chemistry. Topics include stoi- 
chiometry, atomic and molecular structure, 
nomenclature, bonding, thermochemistry, 
gases, solutions, and chemical reactions. 
The laboratory introduces the student to 
methods of separation, purification, and 
identification of compounds according to 
their physical properties. This course is de- 
signed for students who plan to major in 
one of the sciences. Three hours lecture, 
one hour discussion and one three-hour lab- 
oratory period each week. Prerequisite: 
placement in Chemistry 10 is determined in 
part by a student's score on the mathematics 
placement examination. Not open for credit 
to students who have received credit for 
Chemistry 8, except by permission of the 
Chemistry Department. 

11 GENERAL CHEMISTRY II 

A continuation of Chemistry 10, with em- 
phasis placed on the foundations of analyti- 
cal, inorganic, and physical chemistry. Top- 



29 



ics include kinetics, general and ionic equi- 
libria, acid-base theory, electrochemistry, 
thermodynamics, nuclear chemistry, coor- 
dination chemistry, and descriptive inorgan- 
ic chemistry of selected elements. The labo- 
ratory treats aspects of quantitative and 
qualitative inorganic analysis. Three hours 
lecture, one hour discussion, and one three- 
hour laboratory period each week. Prereq- 
uisite: Chemistry 10 or consent of the Chem- 
istry Department. 

15 BRIEF ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 

A descriptive study of the compounds of 
carbon. This course will illustrate the prin- 
ciples of organic chemistry with material 
relevant to students in medical technology, 
biology, nursing, forestry, education and the 
humanities. Topics include nomenclature, 
alkanes, arenes, functional derivatives, ami- 
no acids and proteins, carbohydrates and 
other naturally occurring compounds. This 
course is designed for students who require 
only one semester of organic chemistry. 
Three hours lecture, one hour discussion, 
and one four-hour laboratory period each 
week. Prerequisite: Chemistry 8 or 10. Not 
open for credit to students who have re- 
ceived credit for Chemistry 20. 

20-21 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 

A systematic study of the compounds of 
carbon, including both aliphatic and aro- 
matic series. The laboratory work introduc- 
es the student to simple fundamental meth- 
ods of organic synthesis, isolation, and 
analysis. Three hours lecture and one four- 
hour laboratory period each week. Prereq- 
uisite: Chemistry II. 

26 CLINICAL ANALYSIS 

A presentation of selected wet-chemical and 
instrumental methods of quantitative analy- 
sis with an orientation toward clinical appli- 
cations in medical technology. Topics in- 
clude: general methods and calculations; 
solutions; titrations; photometric analyses 
(colorimetric, atomic absorption, flame 
emission); electrochemical methods (ion-se- 
lective electrodes, coulometry), automation. 
Lecture, recitation, and laboratory daily. 
Prerequisite: Chemistry 10-11 or consent of 
instructor. May not be taken for credit fol- 
lowing Chemistry 32. May term only. 

30-31 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY 

A study of the fundamental principles of 
theoretical chemistry and their applications. 
The laboratory work includes techniques in 
physicochemical measurements. Three 
hours lecture and one four-hour laboratory 
period each week. Prerequisite: Chemistry 
II, Mathematics 19, and one year of physics 
or consent of instructor 

32 ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY 

A study of the fundamental methods of 



gravimetric, volumetric, and elementary in- 
strumental analysis together with practice in 
laboratory techniques and calculations of 
these methods. Two hours lecture and two 
three-hour laboratory periods each week. 
Prerequisite: Chemistry II or consent of in- 
structor 

33 ADVANCED INORGANIC CHEMISTRY 
A study of modern theories of atomic and 
molecular structure and their relationship to 
the chemistry of selected elements and their 
compounds. Three hours lecture and one 
four-hour laboratory period each week. 
Prerequisite: Chemistry 30, Mathematics 
19, and one year of physics or consent of in- 
structor 



39 INTRODUCTION TO QUANTUM 
MECHANICS 

After presenting the origin, basic concepts, 
and formulation of quantum mechanics 
with emphasis on its physical meaning, the 
free particle, simple harmonic oscillator, 
and central-force problems will be investi- 
gated. Both time-independent and time-de- 
pendent perturbation theory will be covered. 
The elegant operator formalism of quantum 
mechanics will conclude the course. Four 
hours of lecture and recitation. Prerequi- 
sites: Mathematics 21, either Chemistry 31 
or Physics 26, and consent of instructor 
Cross-listed as Physics 48. 

40 ADVANCED ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 

Selected topics, which may include mecha- 
nisms of organic reactions, synthesis, de- 
tailed structure and chemistry of natural 
products, polynuclear hydrocarbons, and 
aromatic heterocyclics. Three hours lecture. 
Prerequisite: Chemistry 21. 

41 QUALITATIVE ORGANIC ANALYSIS 
Theory and application of the systematic 
identification of pure organic compounds 
and mixtures. Two hours lecture and two 
three-hour laboratory periods each week. 
Prerequisite: Chemistry 21. 

43 ADVANCED ANALYTICAL 
CHEMISTRY 

A study of advanced analytical methods 
with emphasis on chromatographic, electro- 
chemical, and spectroscopic methods of in- 
strumental analysis. Three hours lecture 
and one four-hour laboratory period each 
week. Prerequisite: Chemistry 31 and 32 or 
consent of instructor. 

44 BIOCHEMISTRY 

Emphasis is given to the metabolism of car- 
bohydrates, lipids, amino acids, proteins, 
and nucleic acids; integration of metabo- 
lism; and biochemical control mechanisms, 
including allosteric control, induction, re- 
pression, as well as the various types of in- 



hibitive control mechanisms. Prerequisite: 
Chemistry 21 or 15 or consent of instructor 
Cross-listed as Biology 44. 

45 SPECTROSCOPY AND MOLECULAR 
STRUCTURE 

Theory and practice of molecular structure 
determination by spectroscopic methods. 
Three hours lecture. Pre- or co-requisites: 
Chemistry 31, 33, or consent of instructor 

48 CHEMISTRY COLLOQUIUM 

A seminar in which faculty, students, and 
invited professional chemists discuss their 
own research activities or those of others 
which have appeared in recent chemical lit- 
erature. Prerequisite: Three semesters of 
non-credit Chemistry Colloquium taken 
during the junior and senior years. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

The student will ordinarily work under su- 
[jervision in an industrial laboratory and 
submit a written report on his project. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
The student will ordinarily work on a labo- 
ratory research project and will write a the- 
sis on his work. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 
The student will ordinarily work on a labo- 
ratory research project with emphasis being 
on the student's showing initiative and mak- 
ing a scholarly contribution. A thesis will be 
written. 



CRIMINAL JUSTICE 

Assistant Professor: Strauser 
(Coordinator) 

This major is designed to acquaint stu- 
dents with the American criminal-jus- 
tice system and to provide an under- 
standing of the social, psychological, 
philosophical, and political contexts 
within which the system of criminal 
justice functions. Its aim is to develop 
students' intellectual and scientific 
skills in raising and attempting to an- 
swer important questions about the 
system of justice and its place in socie- 
ty. The program offers opportunity 
for intern experience in the field, and 
prepares for careers in the areas of law 
enforcement, probation and parole, 
prisons, and treatment services. 
The major has two tracks. Track I 



30 



prepares for careers in law enforce- 
ment. Track II prepares for careers in 
corrections. 

Track I — Law Enforcement. The 

major consists of 10 courses, distribut- 
ed as follows: 

A. Professional courses in criminal 
justice (three courses) 
Introduction to the Criminal Jus- 
tice System (Sociology and Anthro- 
pology 15) 

Introduction to Law Enforcement 
(Sociology and Anthropology 23) 
The American Prison System (So- 
ciology and Anthropology 39) 

B. Courses in the social, psychologi- 
cal, philosophical, and political 
context of the justice system (seven 
courses) 

Criminology (Sociology and An- 
thropology 30) and either Juvenile 
Delinquency (Sociology and An- 
thropology 21) or Racial and Cul- 
tural Minorities (Sociology and 
Anthropology 34) (two courses) 
Abnormal Psychology (Psychology 
16) (one course) 

America as a Civilization (Ameri- 
can Studies 10), Afro-American 
History (History 28) or United 
States Social and Intellectual His- 
tory Since 1877 (History 43) (one 
course) 

Law and Society (Political Science 
35) and Civil Rights and Liberties 
(Political Science 31) (two courses) 
Philosophical Issues in Criminal 
Justice (Philosophy 18) (one course) 

C. Internship or practicum in law en- 
forcement. (Recommended but not 
required for the major) 

Track II — Corrections. The major 
consists of 10 courses, distributed as 
follows: 

A. Professional courses in criminal 
justice (three courses) 
Introduction to the Criminal Jus- 
tice System (Sociology and Anthro- 
pology 15) 

The American Prison System (So- 
ciology and Anthropology 39) 
Introduction to Human Services 
(Sociology and Anthropology 22) 



B. Courses in the social, psychologi- 
cal, philosophical, and political 
context of the justice system (seven 
courses) 

Criminology (Sociology and An- 
thropology 30) and either Juvenile 
Delinquency (Sociology and An- 
thropology 21) or Racial and Cul- 
tural Minorities (Sociology and 
Anthropology 34) (two courses) 
Abnormal Psychology (Psychology 
16) (one course) 

America as a Civilization (Ameri- 
can Studies 10), Afro- American 
History (History 28) or United 
States Social and Intellectual His- 
tory Since 1877 (History 43) (one 
course) 

Law and Society (Political Science 
35) and Civil Rights and Liberties 
(Political Science 31) (two courses) 
Philosophical Issues in Criminal 
Justice (Philosophy 18) (one course) 

C. Internship or practicum in correc- 
tions. (Recommended but not re- 
quired for the major.) Prerequi- 
sites: Mathematics 13, Psychology 
31, and Psychology 39. These pre- 
requisites may be waived in certain 
cases by the coordinating commit- 
tee. 

Majors should seek advice concern- 
ing course selection from members of 
the coordinating committee and should 
note course prerequisites in planning 
their programs. 



ECONOMICS 

Professors: Opdahl (Chairperson), 
Rabold 

The major has two tracks. Track I is 
designed for the student whose primary 
interest lies in business management; 
Track II is designed for students with 
an interest in graduate work, teaching, 
government or non-business careers, 
and for those with less well-defined in- 
terests. 

Track I — Managerial Economics 



requires: Economics 10, 11, 32, and 41; 
Business 10-11 or Accounting 10 and 
20; Business 38 and 39, plus two elec- 
tives from Economics 20, 31, 35, 37, 
43, and Business 40. Business 33 (In- 
vestments) may be substituted for 
Business 39 (Financial Management 
II). 

Track II — Political Economy re- 
quires: Economics 10, 11, 30, 31, 40, 
and five electives of which three must 
be in economics and two in political 
science, all selected with the advice 
and consent of the student's adviser or 
department chairman. Economics 41 
(Managerial Economics) may be sub- 
stituted for Economics 30 (Intermedi- 
ate Microeconomics). 

In addition, the following courses 
are recommended: all majors — Math 
13 and Business 23; majors planning 
graduate work — Math 12-18; Track II 
majors — Business 10-11. 

A minor in Economics requires the 
completion of Economics 10 and 11 
and three other economics courses 
numbered 20 or above, selected by the 
student with prior approval of the de- 
partment chairperson. 



2 CONSUMER ECONOMICS 

A course in "family" or "practical" eco- 
nomics, designed to teach students how 
they and their families can be intelligent 
consumers: that is, how they can spend, 
save, and borrow so as to maximize the val- 
ue they receive for the income they have. 
Treats subjects such as intelligent shopping; 
the uses and abuses of credit; investing sav- 
ings; buying insurance, automobiles, and 
houses; medical care costs; estates and wills, 
etc. Alternate years. 

10 PRINCIPLES OF POLITICAL 
ECONOMY I 

Macroeconomics. Deals with problems of 
the economic system as a whole. What in- 
fluences the level of national income and 
employment? What is inflation and why do 
we have it? What is the role of government 
in a modern capitalistic system? How does 
business organize to produce the goods and 
services we demand? How are the American 
financial and banking system organized? 
What is the nature of American unionism? 
What are the elements of government fi- 
nance and fiscal policy? 



31 



11 PRINCIPLES OF POLITICAL 
ECONOMY II 

This course focuses upon microeconomics 
and selected current economic problems. It 
deals with the relatively small units of the 
economy such as the Hrm and the family. 
Analyzes demand and supply. Discusses 
how business firms decide what and how 
much to produce and how goods and servic- 
es are priced in different types of markets. 
Also considers such problems as economic 
growih, international trade, poverty, dis- 
crimination, ecology, and alternative eco- 
nomic systems. 

20 MONEY AND BANKING 

Covers business fluctuations and monetary 
and fiscal policy; the financial organization 
of society; the banking system; credit insti- 
tutions; capital markets, and international 
fmancial relations. Prerequisite: Economics 
10 and 11. 

11 ECONOMIC SYSTEMS OF THE WEST 
(CAPITALISM AND SOCIALISM) 
A comparative analysis of the underlying 
ideologies, the basic institutions, and the 
performance of selected economic systems 
extant in the West. Alternate years. 

23 SOVIET-TYPE ECONOMICS 

An analysis of the ideologies, institutions, 
and performance of Soviet-type economics, 
with emphasis upon Marxian theory and 
the economy of the U.S.S.R.; comparison 
of selected Eastern European and Chinese 
approaches to communism. Alternate years. 

14 URBAN PROBLEMS 

The application of economic theory to the 
study of significant social, political, and ec- 
onomic problems associated with urbaniza- 
tion, including poverty, employment, edu- 
cation, crime, health, housing, land use and 
the environment, transportation, and pub- 
lic finance. Analysis of solutions offered. 
Alternate years. 

25 ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICS 

A study of the relationship between envi- 
ronmental decay and economic growth, 
with particular reference to failures of the 
price and property-rights systems; applica- 
tion of cost/benefit analysis, measures 
aimed at the creation of an ecologically 
viable economy. Alternate years. 

30 INTERMEDIATE MICROECONOMICS 

An advanced analysis of contemporary the- 
ory regarding consumer demand, produc- 
tion costs and theory, profit maximization, 
market structures, and the determinants of 
returns to the factors of production. Pre- 
requisite: Economics 10 and 11. Alternate 
years. 



31 INTERMEDIATE MACROECONOMICS 
An advanced analysis of contemporary the- 
ory and practice with regard to business 
fiuctuations, national income accounting, 
the determination of income and employ- 
ment levels, and the use of monetary and 
fiscal policy. Prerequisite: Economics 10 
and 11. Alternate years. 

32 GOVERNMENT AND THE ECONOMY 

An analytical survey of government's efforts 
to maintain competition through antitrust 
legislation; to supervise acceptable cases of 
private monopoly through public-utility 
regulation and via means of regulatory 
commissions, and to encourage or restrain 
various types of private economic activities. 
Prerequisite: Economics 10 and 11 or con- 
sent of instructor 

35 LABOR PROBLEMS 

The history of organized labor in the United 
States, including the structure of unions, 
employers' opposition to unions, the role of 
government in labor-management relations, 
the economic impact of unions. Alternate 
years. 

37 PUBLIC FINANCE 

An analysis of the fiscal economics of the 

public sector, including the development, 
concepts, and theories of public expendi- 
tures, taxation, and debt at all levels of 
American government. Includes also the 
use of fiscal policy as an economic control 
device. Prerequisite: Economics 10 and 11 or 
consent of instructor 

40 HISTORY OF ECONOMIC THOUGHT 

A discussion of the origins, development, 
and significance of the economic ideas em- 
bodied in the works of Smith, Marx, 
Schumpeter, Keynes, and others. Prerequi- 
site: Economics 10 and 11 or consent of in- 
structor Alternate years. 

41 MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS 

The application of economic theory and 
methodology to the solution of business 
problems. Subjects include: optimizing 
techniques, risk analysis, demand theory, 
production theory, cost theory, linear pro- 
gramming, capital budgeting, market struc- 
tures, and the theory of pricing. Prerequi- 
site: Economics 10 and II. 

43 INTERNATIONAL TRADE 

A study of the principles, theories, develop- 
ment, and policies concerning international 
economic relations, with particular refer- 
ence to the United States. Subjects covered 
include: U.S. commercial policy and its de- 
velopment, international trade theory, tariffs 
and other protectionist devices, internation- 
al monetary system and its problems, bal- 



ance of payments issues. Alternate years. 
Prerequisite: Economics 10 and II. 

45 DEVELOPMENT OF 

UNDERDEVELOPED NATIONS 
A study of the theories and problems of cap- 
ital accumulation, allocation of resources, 
technological development, growth, plan- 
ning techniques, and institutions and inter- 
national relations encountered by the devel- 
oping nations. Alternate years. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Typically off campus in business, banking, 
or government, supervised by assigned em- 
ployee of sponsoring organization. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Superior students may select independent 
study in various courses, particularly in 
preparation for graduate school. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 



EDUCATION 

Associate Professor: Keesbury 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant Professor: Conrad 
Instructor: Cherrington 

Lycoming believes that the liberal arts 
provide the best preparation for future 
teachers, thus all education students 
complete a liberal-arts major in addi- 
tion to the certification requirements. 
Students can be certified in elementary 
education or one or more of the fol- 
lowing secondary areas: biology, chem- 
istry, English, French, general science 
(with biology or astronomy/physics 
tracks), German, mathematics, phys- 
ics, social studies, and Spanish. All 
teacher-education programs are ap- 
proved by the Pennsylvania Depart- 
ment of Education, and Pennsylvania 
certificates are recognized in most oth- 
er states whether through reciprocal 
agreements or by transcript evaluation. 
Education 20 and Psychology 38 are 
prerequisites to all other offerings in 
the Department of Education. Educa- 
tion 20 should be taken at least two se- 
mesters before the professional semes- 
ter. 



32 



Students seeking elementary certifi- 
cation must complete Mathematics 7, 
Education 40, 41, 42, and 43 as prereq- 
uisites to the professional semester 
(Education 45, 47, and 48). 

Students interested in the teacher- 
education program should consult 
with a member of the department no 
later than the first semester of the 
sophomore year. Application for the 
professional semester must be made 
before September 15 of the junior year. 
The Department of Education will ad- 
mit to the professional semester those 
applicants who have a minimum 
cumulative grade point average of 
2.00, are in good academic standing, 
have satisfactorily completed the jun- 
ior year participation requirements 
(secondary students only), have paid 
the student teaching fee, and have re- 
ceived a positive recommendation. 
The recommendation will be based 
upon: (a) recommendations from each 
student's major department; (b) rec- 
ommendations from two additional 
faculty outside the Department of Ed- 
ucation; (c) a screening interview con- 
ducted by the department, and (d) a 
writing sample from each student ap- 
plicant. Major departments have dif- 
ferent criteria for their recommenda- 
tions. Therefore, students should con- 
sult with the chairman of their major 
department about those requirements 
as soon as they begin to study for certi- 
fication. 

5 DEVELOPMENTAL SEMINAR 

The course focuses on developing reading 
and study skills which are useful in college. 
Reading comprehension, vocabulary build- 
ing, and critical reading are especially em- 
phasized. Study skills, including time man- 
agement, textbook reading, reading-study 
systems, notetaking, test-taking skills, and 
library reference skills are also stressed. 
Open only to freshmen who are enrolled in 
English 5 or with consent of instructor. One- 
half unit of credit. 

20 INTRODUCTION TO THE STUDY OF 
EDUCATION 

A study of teaching as a profession with 
emphasis on the economic, social, political, 
and religious conditions which influence 
American schools and teachers. Considera- 
tion is given to the school environment, the 



curriculum, and the children with the inten- 
tion that students will examine more ration- 
ally their own motives for entering the pro- 
fession. Prerequisite: Sophomore standing 
or consent of instructor. 

32 INSTRUCTIONAL MEDIA AND 
COMMUNICATIONS 
A study of the value, design, construction, 
and application of the visual and auditory 
aids to learning. Practical experience in the 
handling of audio-visual equipment and 
materials is provided. Application of audio- 
visual techniques. Application of the visual 
and auditory aids to learning. Students will 
plan and carry out actual teaching assign- 
ments utilizing various A-V devices. 

39 PUBLIC SCHOOL CURRICULUM 

An examination of the various curricula of 
the public schools and their relationships to 
current practices. Special attention will be 
given to the meaning and nature of the cur- 
riculum, the desirable outcomes of the cur- 
riculum, conflicting and variant concep- 
tions of curricular content, modern tech- 
niques of curricular construction, criteria 
for the evaluation of curricula, the curricu- 
lum as a leaching instrument. Emphasis will 
be placed upon the curriculum work within 
the teaching field of each individual. 

40 TEACHING LANGUAGE ARTS AND 
CHILDREN'S LITERATURE IN THE 
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 

A course designed to consider the principal 
means of communication, oral and written, 
including both practical and creative uses. 
Attention will be given to listening, speak- 
ing, written expression, linguistics and 
grammar, spelling, and handwriting. Stress 
will be placed upon the interrelatedness of 
the language arts. Children's literature will 
be explored as a vehicle for developing crea- 
tive characteristics in children and for en- 
suring an appreciation of the creative writ- 
ing of others. Observation and participation 
in Greater Williamsport elementary schools. 
Prerequisites: Education 20 and Psychology 
38 or consent of instructor. 

41 TEACHING THE SOCIAL STUDIES IN 
THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 
Studies and experiences to develop a basic 
understanding of the structure, concepts, 
and processes of anthropology, economics, 
geography, history, political science, and so- 
ciology as they relate to the elementary 
school social-science curriculum. Practical 
applications, demonstrations of methods, 
and the development of integrated teaching 
units using tests, reference books, films, 
and other teaching materials. Observation 
and participation in Greater Williamsport 
elementary schools. Prerequisites: Educa- 
tion 20 and Psychology 38 or consent of in- 



structor 

42 TEACHING SCIENCE IN THE 
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 

Science methods and materials interpreting 
children's science experiences and guiding 
the development of their scientific concepts. 
A study of the science content of the curric- 
ulum, its material, and use. Observation 
and participation in Greater Williamsport 
elementary schools. Prerequisites: Educa- 
tion 20 and Psychology 38 or consent of in- 
structor. 

43 TEACHING READING IN THE 
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 

A basic course in the philosophy and ration- 
ale for the implementation of an elementary 
developmental-reading program from kin- 
dergarten through sixth grade. Emphasis is 
upon designing a reading instructional pro- 
gram which reflects the nature of the learn- 
ing process and recognizes principles of 
child development through examination of 
the principles, problems, methods, and ma- 
terials used in elementary reading programs. 
Observation and participation in Greater 
Williamsport elementary schools. Prerequi- 
sites: Psychology 38, Education 20, 40, 41, 
and 42, or consent of instructor. 

45 METHODS OF TEACHING IN THE 
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL (PART OF 
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 
The course emphasizes the relationship be- 
tween the theoretical studies of physical, so- 
cial, and cognitive development and the ele- 
mentary classroom environment. Particular 
consideration will be given to the appropri- 
ate age and developmental level of the stu- 
dents with an emphasis upon selection and 
utilization of methods in all the elementary 
subject areas, including art and music. Spe- 
cific attention will be given to the develof)- 
ment of strategies for structuring lesson 
plans, for maintaining classroom control, 
and for overall classroom management. Di- 
rect application will be made to the individ- 
ual student-teaching experience. Prerequi- 
sites: Math 7, Education 40, 41, 42, and 43, 
or consent of instructor 

46 METHODS OF TEACHING IN THE 
SECONDARY SCHOOL (PART OF 
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 

A study of materials, methods, and tech- 
niques of teaching with emphasis on the stu- 
dent's major. Stress is placed on the selec- 
tion and utilization of visual and auditory 
aids to learning. Students will teach demon- 
stration lessons in the presence of the in- 
structor and the members of the class and 
will observe superior teachers in Greater 
Williamsport secondary schools. Prerequi- 
sites: Education 20, Psychology 38, and the 
participation experience. 



33 



47 PROBLEMS IN CONTEMPORARY 
AMERICAN EDUCATION (PART OF 
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 
Seminar in the issues, problems, and 
challenges encountered by teachers in the 
American public schools, especially those 
related to the student-teaching experience. 

48 STUDENT TEACHING IN THE 
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL (PART OF 
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 
Two units. Exceeds state-mandated mini- 
mum requirements. Professional laboratory 
experience under the supervision of a select- 
ed cooperating teacher in a public elementa- 
ry school in Greater Williamsport. Organiz- 
es learning experiences. Actual classroom 
experience.* 

49 STUDENT TEACHING IN THE 
SECONDARY SCHOOL (PART OF 
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 
Two units. Exceeds state-mandated mini- 
mum requirements. Professional laboratory 
experience under the supervision of a select- 
ed cooperating teacher in a public secon- 
dary school in Greater Williamsport. Or- 
ganized learning experience. Emphasis on 
actual classroom experience, responsibility 
in the guidance program, and out-of-class 
activities.* 

*Studenl teachers are required to follow the 
calendar of the school district to which they 
are assigned. 



ENGLISH 

Professor: Van Marter 
Associate Professors: Jensen 

(Chairperson), Rife 
Assistant Professors: Gold, Moses, 

Wild 
Visiting Instructor: Hartsock 

A major consists of nine courses not 
including English 3, 5 or 6. These nine 
courses must include English 17, 20, 
21, 22, 23, and one from English 35 
and 36. 

The remaining electives may include 
any course from English 12 and above 
not already taken to satisfy the preced- 
ing requirements. With the consent of 
the Department of English, an appro- 
priate course from the offerings of 
other departments may be substituted 
for an English elective. 



Majors seeking secondary certifica- 
tion in English are required to take 
English 35 and English 38. 

The Department of English partici- 
pates with seven others in the Ameri- 
can Studies interdisciplinary major, in 
which American literature courses 
constitute an important part of the 
American-arts concentration area. 

Because of its emphasis on commu- 
nication skills, a major or a minor in 
English is excellent preparation for a 
wide range of professions. In addition 
to preparing students for graduate 
work or for teaching, a major or a mi- 
nor in English can be valuable for 
those interested in a career in law, min- 
istry, publishing, editing or writing, 
and business, to name a few. 

Two minors are available in the De- 
partment of English. A minor in Eng- 
lish Literature consists of five litera- 
ture courses numbered 12 and above, 
three of which must be numbered 20 
or above, and at least one of which 
must be numbered 30 or above. With 
prior written consent of the depart- 
ment, one writing course may be sub- 
stituted for a literature course. A mi- 
nor in Writing consists of English 16 or 
17; 18 and 38; 28 or 37; and a senior 
practicum in an extended writing pro- 
ject. At least three of these courses 
must be numbered 20 or above. With 
prior written consent of the depart- 
ment, one literature course may be 
substituted for a writing course with 
the following restriction: 16 or 17 and a 
senior practicum are required for the 
writing minor. 

3 BASIC WRITING AND 

COMMUNICATION SKILLS 
Intensive practice in using basic grammar 
and spelling conventions and in writing 
sentences, paragraphs, and essays; major 
emphasis on the development and organiza- 
tion of concepts. This course does nol sub- 
stitute for English 5 or 6 and may not be 
taken to satisfy the English distribution re- 
quirement. 

5 WORKSHOP IN DEVELOPMENTAL 
WRITING 

Classroom and laboratory instruction in or- 
ganizing and writing the detailed paragraph 
and illustrative expository theme, with ma- 



jor emphasis on spelling, grammar, and 
sentence structure. Writing assignments and 
classroom exercises designed to ensure mas- 
tery of the student's special problems in ba- 
sic writing. 

One-half unit grade of "S" will be as- 
signed when the student has successfully 
completed all of the work in the course. Re- 
quired of, and limited to, those who have 
not been exempted from English 5. 

6 COMPOSITION 

Extensive practice in analytical writing. Spe- 
cial emphasis on developing the composing 
skills needed to articulate and defend a po- 
sition in various situations requiring the use 
of written English. 

12 INTRODUCTION TO LITERATURE 

An introduction to the study of literature 
designed for the general student and utiliz- 
ing one of the following approaches: major 
literary genres, selected literary masterpiec- 
es, or traditional themes in literature. 

16 WRITING FOR SPECIAL AUDIENCES 
Intensive practice in writing and presenting 
information to various audiences within the 
student's own discipline. Includes training 
in the use of graphics and in basic library re- 
search methods. Prerequisite: a grade of C 
or better in English 6 or consent of instruc- 
tor. Alternate years. 

17 CRITICAL WRITING 

Designed to provide intermediate students 
of literature with the critical skills necessary 
for an understanding of poetry, fiction, dra- 
ma, and film. Intensive reading and exten- 
sive practice in writing the critical essay. Re- 
quired of English majors. 

18 NEWSWRITING FOR THE PRINT 
MEDIA 

Analysis of and practice in the basic forms 
of newswriting: the elements of news, lead, 
style, and .structure. Frequent workshop 
sessions for detailed critiques and discus- 
sion of student writing. Alternate years. 

20 BRITISH LITERATURE I 

Literary forms, themes, and authors from 
the Anglo-Saxon through the Neo-Classical 
periods. Such writers as Chaucer, Spenser, 
Shakespeare, Milton, Swift, Pope, and 
Johnson; representative works from Beo- 
wulf to Sterne's Sentimental Journey. 

21 BRITISH LITERATURE II 

Literary movements and authors from the 
Romantic Period to the present. Particular 
emphasis on such writers as Blake, Words- 
worth, Shelley, Keats, Tennyson, Browning, 
Arnold, Hardy, Yeats, Eliot. 



34 



22 AMERICAN LITERATURE I 

Brief survey of American literature and 
thought before 1800, followed by more in- 
tensive study of the literature and thought 
of the period 1800-1900. Major focus on the 
works of Emerson, Thoreau, Poe, Haw- 
thorne, Melville, Whitman, Dickinson, and 
Howells. 

23 AMERICAN LITERATURE II 

Major writers, movements, and tendencies 
in American literature during the present 
century. Such forces as naturalism, realism, 
and modernism; such writers as James, 
Dreiser, Hemingway, Faulkner, Frost, Eliot, 
and Stevens. 

24 THE SHORT STORY 

Historical and critical study of the short 
story. Consideration of representative ex- 
amples of the form with emphasis on Amer- 
ican and European writers of the 19th and 
20th centuries. 

25 THE NOVEL 

Historical study of the development of the 
novel from the 18th through the 20th cen- 
turies. Novels analyzed both as works of 
prose art and as turning points in the devel- 
opment of the novel. Alternate years. 

26 LITERATURE AND FILM 

The relationship between the conventions 
of literature and film with emphasis on ex- 
amination of representative literary and 
film works. Media comparison to reveal the 
problems of adaptation. 

28 CREATIVE WRITING WORKSHOP: 
FICTION AND POETRY 
A beginning course in the theory and prac- 
tice of writing fiction and poetry. Students 
may concentrate in either genre or both. Al- 
ternate years. 

30 ROMANTIC LITERATURE 

A study of the major poetry and fiction, 
plus some non-fiction prose, written during 
the years, 1789-1832. Emphasis on the work 
of at least three poets, two novelists, and as- 
sorted prose writers. Alternate years. 

31 MODERN FICTION 

Study of the novels and short fiction of 
such major British and American figures as 
Conrad, Forster, Woolf, Lawrence, Joyce, 
Hemingway, Faulkner, Nabokov, and 
Bellow. 

32 MODERN POETRY 

A study of the poetry written in this century, 
beginning with Yeats and Eliot and continu- 
ing through such writers as Frost, Williams, 
Moore, Stevens, Auden, Lowell, Roethke, 
Thomas, Ginsberg, and Rich. Alternate 



years. 

33 COMEDY, TRAGEDY, AND THE 
MODERN THEATRE 

Introduction to the theories of comedy and 
tragedy as those theories help us to deepen 
our response to the theatre. Major focus on 
plays, including musicals, from Ibsen and 
Shaw to the present. Alternate years. 

34 WOMEN AND LITERATURE 

Through an examination — literary, social, 
and historical — of selected British and 
American literature by women, this course 
will seek to identify those elements which 
distinguish women's particular contribution 
to the literary canon. Alternate years. 

35 CHAUCER 

A study of the major works with emphasis 
on The Canterbury Tales and Troilus and 
Criseyde. Some attention to the traditions 
out of which these works arose. Required of 
majors seeking secondary certification in 
English. Alternate years. 

36 SHAKESPEARE 

A study of representative plays: comedies, 
tragedies, histories, romances. Attention 
given to Shakespeare's life and times. Alter- 
nate years. 

37 PUBLIC RELATIONS AND 
PUBLICITY WRITING 
Communication and publicity techniques in 
the field of public relations focused on writ- 
ing for the media. The news and feature re- 
lease, newsletter, and house organ. Prereq- 
uisite: English 18 or consent of instructor 
Alternate years. 

38 LINGUISTICS AND THE ANALYSIS OF 
THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE 
Introduction to methods of analyzing spok- 
en and written English. Classroom work 
supported by weekly tutorials, in which the 
student gains practical experience in identi- 
fying, diagnosing, and correcting basic 
communications problems. Required of 
majors seeking secondary certification in 
English. Alternate years. 

40 SELECTED WRITERS 

An intensive study of no more than three 
writers, selected on the basis of student and 
faculty interest. Possible combinations in- 
clude: Frost, Hemingway, and Faulkner; 
O'Connor, Welty, and Porter; Spenser and 
Milton; Hawthorne, Melville, and Dickens; 
Woolf, Forster, and Lawrence; Joyce and 
Yeats. May be repeated for credit if the writ- 
ers are different. Alternate years. 

41 TOPICS IN LITERATURE 
Examination of a literary theme, idea, or 



movement as it appears in one or more 
types of literature and as it cuts across vari- 
ous epochs. Possible topics include: Ameri- 
can Novelists and Poets of the Jazz Age and 
Depression; Religion and Literature; Gothic 
Tradition in American Literature; Realism 
in the Novel; Literary Modernism; Litera- 
ture and Mythology; The Hero in Litera- 
ture. May be repeated for credit if the topic 
is different. Alternate years. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Interns typically work off campus in a pro- 
fession related to their career interest such 
as law, public relations, journalism, and 
others. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Recent studies include The Arthurian Leg- 
end, Shakespeare's Women, D. H. Law- 
rence, and T. S. Eliot: The Social Vision. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 
Recent projects include The Creative Pro- 
cess in Literature and Art and Images of 
Women in the I890's. 



FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND 
LITERATURES 

Associate Professors: Flam, Maples, 

MacKenzie (Chairperson) 
Assistant Professor: Barker 

Study of foreign languages and litera- 
tures offers opportunity to explore 
broadly the varieties of human experi- 
ence and thought. It contributes both 
to personal and to international under- 
standing by providing competence in a 
foreign language and a critical ac- 
quaintance with the literature and cul- 
ture of foreign peoples. A major can 
serve as entree to careers in business, 
industry, government, publishing, ed- 
ucation, journalism, social agencies, 
translating, and writing. It prepares 
for graduate work in literature or lin- 
guistics and the international fields of 
politics, commerce, law, health, and 
area studies. 

French, German, and Spanish are 
offered as major fields of study. The 
major consists of at least eight courses 
numbered 10 or above. Majors seeking 



35 



teacher certification and students 
planning to enter graduate school are 
advised to begin study of a second for- 
eign language. The department en- 
courages the development in breadth 
of programs, including allied courses 
from related fields or a second major, 
and also individual or established in- 
terdisciplinary majors combining in- 
terest in several literatures or area or 
cross-cultural studies; for example, In- 
ternational Studies, 20th Century 
Studies, the Major in Literature. Ma- 
jors, teacher certification candidates, 
and all students are encouraged to 
spend at least a semester of study 
abroad by applying to one of the many 
programs available. The department 
maintains a file of such programs. 

Courses taught in English: Foreign 
Languages and Literatures 25, French 
28 (Section A) and Spanish 32 (Section 
A). 

Foreign Languages and Literatures 

25 CONTINENTAL LITERATURE 

A study of such major continental authors 
as Cervantes, Dostoevsky, Chekhov, Dante, 
Ibsen, Proust, Gide, Kafka, Hesse, Goethe, 
Sartre, Camus, Brecht, and lonesco. Works 
read in English translation will vary and be 
organized around a different theme or top- 
ic; recent topics have been existentialism, 
modernism, drama, the Weimar era, and 
20th century Scandinavian and German 
prose writers. Prerequisite: None. May be 
repealed for credit with consent of instruc- 
tor May be accepted toward the English 
major with consent of the Department of 
English. 

38 FOREIGN LANGUAGE: SYSTEMS 
AND PROCESS 

Study of basic linguistic concepts as a tool 
for language learning and teaching. Discu-S- 
sion and application of language teaching 
techniques, including work in the language 
laboratory. Designed for future teachers of 
one or more languages and normally taken 
in the junior year. Students should arrange 
through the Department of Education to 
fulfill in the same semester the requirements 
of a participation experience in area 
schools. Prerequisite: consent of instructor 

French 

A major consists of a minimum of 
eight courses numbered 10 or above, 
including at least two from 40, 42, 44, 



and 46. In addition, all majors who 
wish to be certified for teaching must 
pass courses 21-22, and Foreign 
Languages and Literatures 38 (the lat- 
ter course with a C or better.) 

A minor in French consists of at 
least four courses numbered 20 and 
above. Courses 10 and 11 may be 
counted toward the minor, but then 
the minor must consist of at least five 
courses, three of which must be num- 
bered 20 and above. 

1-2 ELEMENTARY FRENCH 

The aim of the course is to acquire the fun- 
damentals of the language with a view to 
using them. Regular practice in speaking, 
understanding, and reading. 

10-11 INTERMEDIATE FRENCH 

Review and development of the fundamen- 
tals of the language for immediate use in 
speaking, understanding, and reading with 
a view to building confidence in self- 
expression. Prerequisite: French 2 or equiv- 
alent. 

21-22 FRENCH LANGUAGE PRACTICE 
Further training in speaking, listening com- 
prehension, reading, and writing. Includes 
extensive work in grammar. Prerequisite: 
French 11 or equivalent. 

28 MODERN FRANCE 

A course designed to familiarize students 
with political and social structures and cul- 
tural attitudes in contemporary French soci- 
ety. Materials studied may include such 
documents as newspaper articles, interviews 
and sociological surveys, and readings in 
history, religion, anthropology, and the arts. 
Some attention to the changing education 
system and the family and to events and 
ideas which have shaped French society. 
May include some comparative study of 
France and the United States. 

English Section: Not applicable toward 
satisfying the foreign language distribution 
requirement. Prerequisite: none. 

French Section: Offers readings, papers, 
and interviews in French for students with 
sufficient language skill. Can be applied to- 
ward the foreign language distribution re- 
quirement. Prerequisite: French 21 or con- 
sent of instructor. 

40 FRENCH LITERATURE TO 1800 

Major authors and movements from Ihc 
Medieval, Renaissance, Classical and En- 
lightenment periods. Includes the chanson 
de geste, Villon, Montaigne, Corneille, Ra- 
cine, Moliere, Voltaire and Rousseau. Pre- 
requisite: French 22 or 28 or consent of in- 



structor. Alternate years. 

42 FRENCH LITERATURE OF THE I9TH 
CENTURY 

The dimensions of the Romantic sensibility: 
Musset, Hugo, Vigny, Balzac, Stendhal. 
Realism and Naturalism in the novels of 
Flaubert and Zola. Reaction in the poetry 
of Baudelaire, Rimbaud, Verlaine, and 
Mallarme. Prerequisite: French 22 or 28 or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

44 MODERN FRENCH THEATRE 

Major trends in French drama from the 
turn of the century to Existentialism and the 
Theatre of the Absurd, Giraudoux, Anouilh, 
Sartre, Camus, Beckett lonesco. Genet, 
Adamov, and others. Prerequisite: French 
22 or 28 or consent of instructor. Alternate 
years. 

46 FRENCH LITERATURE OF THE 20TH 
CENTURY 

Representative poets and novelists of mod- 
ern France. Readings selected from the 
works of authors such as Proust, Gide, 
Aragon, Giono, Mauriac, Celine, Malraux, 
Saint-Exup^ry, Camus, the "new novelists" 
(Robbe-Grillet, Butor, Sarraute, LeCl^zio), 
and the poetry of Apollinaire, Val^ry, the 
Surrealists (Breton, Reverdy, Eluard, Char), 
Saint- John Perse, Supervielle, PrSvert, and 
others. Some attention to works of French- 
speaking African writers. Prerequisite: 
French 22 or 28 or consent of instructor Al- 
ternate years. 

49 ADVANCED LANGUAGE PRACTICE 
Intensive practice for advanced students 
who wish to improve further their spoken 
and written French. Includes work in oral 
comprehension, phonetics, pronunciation, 
oral and written composition, and transla- 
tion. Prerequisite: one course from French 
40, 42, 44, 46 or consent of instructor. 

10-19 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Examples of recent studies in French in- 
clude translation, existentialism, the classi- 
cal period, enlightenment literature, and 
Saint-Exup^ry. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 



German 

A major consists of a minimum of 
eight courses numbered 10 or above. 
One unit of Foreign Languages and 
Literatures 25 may be included in the 
major with permission. German 40 or 



36 



German 47 is required of all majors. 

All majors who wish to be certified 
for teaching must pass German 33 and 
34. In addition to the eight courses for 
the major they must also pass Foreign 
Languages and Literatures 38 with a 
grade of C or better. All majors are 
urged to enroll in History 41, Music 37, 
Political Science 20 and Theatre 35. 

A minor in German consists of at 
least four courses numbered 20 and 
above. Courses 10 and 11 may be 
counted toward the minor, but then 
the minor must consist of at least five 
courses, three of which must be num- 
bered 20 and above. 

1-2 ELEMENTARY GERMAN 

Aim of course is to acquire the fundamen- 
tals of the language with a view to using 
them. Regular practice in speaking, under- 
standing, and reading. 

10-11 INTERMEDIATE GERMAN 

Review and development of fundamentals 
of the language for immediate use in speak- 
ing, understanding, and reading with a view 
to building confidence in self-expression. 
Prerequisite: German 2 or equivalent. 

21-22 COMPREHENSIVE REVIEW AND 
LANGUAGE PRACTICE 
A two-semester course designed to review 
and develop skills in speaking, listening, 
writing and reading. Grammar and vocabu- 
lary building are stressed with intensive re- 
view, writing practice and some reading on 
contemporary issues in German-speaking 
countries. As the course progresses, greater 
emphasis is placed on speaking, listening 
comprehension, and translation. Some at- 
tention is given to the development of the 
language and its relationship to Enghsh. 
Prerequisite: German II or equivalent. 

33 SURVEY OF GERMAN LITERATURE 
AND CIVILIZATION I 

Designed to acquaint the student with im- 
portant periods of German literature, repre- 
sentative authors, and major cultural devel- 
opments in Germany, Austria, and Switzer- 
land. The course deals with literature and 
culture from the Early Middle Ages through 
the 18th century. Prerequisite: German 22 
or consent of instructor 

34 SURVEY OF GERMAN LITERATURE 
AND CIVILIZATION II 

Designed to acquaint the student with im- 
portant periods of German literature, repre- 
sentative authors, and major cultural devel- 
opments in Germany, Austria, and Switzer- 



land. The course deals with literature and 
culture from the 19th century to the present. 
Prerequisite: German 22 or consent of in- 
structor 

40 GOETHE 

A study of the life and works of Goethe. 
Goethe's significance in the Classical period 
and later. Readings in the major works. Pre- 
requisite: German 33 or 34 or consent of in- 
structor 

41 CLASSICAL GERMAN DRAMA 

The development of das klassische Drama 
with emphasis on works of Lessing, Goethe, 
Kleist, and Schiller. Prerequisite: German 
33 or 34 or consent of instructor 

43 THE NOVELLE 

The German Novelle as a genre relating to 
various literary periods. Prerequisite: Ger- 
man 33 or 34 or consent of instructor 

45 GERMAN POETRY 

A study of selected poets or the poetry of 
various literary periods. Possible topics in- 
clude: Romantic poetry, Heine, Rilke, and 
Benn. Prerequisite: German 33 or 34 or 
consent of instructor 

47 CONTEMPORARY GERMAN 
LITERATURE 

Representative poets, novelists and drama- 
tists of contemporary Germany, Switzerland 
and Austria covering the period from 1945 
to the present. Readings selected from 
writers such as: Borchert, Boll, Brecht, 
Benn, Frisch, Diirrenmatt, Bichsel, Han- 
dke, Walser, Grass and others. Prerequisite: 
German 33 or 34 or consent of instructor 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Examples of recent studies in German in- 
clude Classicism, Germanic Mythology, 
Hermann Hesse, the dramas of Frisch, and 
Diirrenmatt. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 

Greek 

Greek is not offered as a major. 

1-2 NEW TESTAMENT GRAMMAR AND 
READINGS 

Fundamentals of New Testament Greek 
grammar and readings of selected passages 
of the Greek text. Alternate years. 

11 READINGS IN THE SYNOPTIC 
GOSPELS 
A comparative study of the synoptic tradi- 



tion in Greek. Prerequisite: Greek 2 or 
equivalent. Alternate years. 

12 READINGS IN THE PAULINE 
EPISTLES 

Selected readings from the letters of Paul in 
Greek. Prerequisite: Greek II or equivalent. 
Alternate years. 

Hebrew 

Hebrew is not offered as a major. 

1-2 OLD TESTAMENT GRAMMAR AND 
READINGS 

Fundamentals of Old Testament Hebrew 
grammar and readings of selected passages 
of the Hebrew text. Alternate years. 

11-12 INTERMEDIATE OLD TESTAMENT 
HEBREW 
A critical reading of the Hebrew text with 
special attention being given to exegetical 
questions. The text read varies from year to 
year. Prerequisite: Hebrew 2 or equivalent. 
Alternate years. 

Spanish 

A major consists of eight courses num- 
bered 10 or above. Foreign Languages 
and Literatures 38 does not count to- 
ward the major. 

All majors who wish to be certified 
for teaching in secondary school must 
pass Foreign Languages and Litera- 
tures 38 (grade of C or better) and 
Spanish 49. 

A minor in Spanish consists of at 
least four courses numbered 20 and 
above. Courses 10 and 11 may be 
counted toward the minor, but then 
the minor must consist of at least five 
courses, three of which must be num- 
bered 20 and above. 

1-2 ELEMENTARY SPANISH 

Aim of course is to acquire the fundamen- 
tals of the language with a view to using 
them. Regular practice in speaking, under- 
standing, and reading. 

10-11 INTERMEDIATE SPANISH 

Review and development of fundamentals 
of the language for immediate use in speak- 
ing, understanding, and reading with a view 
to building confidence in self-expression. 
Prerequisite: Spanish 2 or equivalent. 

l\-n COMPREHENSIVE REVIEW AND 
LANGUAGE PRACTICE 
This course consists of a thorough review of 
grammar, drills for oral comprehension and 



37 



expression, discussion of readings and the 
writing of compositions. It is designed to 
develop the student's ability to read, write 
and converse in Spanish with confidence. 
Prerequisite: Spanish 11 or equivalent. 

32 HISPANIC CULTURE 

To introduce students to the Spanish-speak- 
ing people — their values, customs and insti- 
tutions, with reference to the geographic 
and historical forces governing present-day 
Spain and Spanish America. Prerequisite: 
Spanish 22 or consent of instructor. Alter- 
nate years. 

33 SURVEY OF SPANISH LITERATURE 
AND CIVILIZATION 

Designed to acquaint the student with im- 
portant periods of Spanish literature, repre- 
sentative authors, and major socio-econom- 
ic developments. The course deals with the 
literature from the beginning to the present. 
Prerequisite: Spanish 22 or consent of in- 
structor Alternate years. 

35 SURVEY OF SPANISH-AMERICAN 
LITERATURE AND CIVILIZATION 

Designed to acquaint the student with im- 
portant periods of Spanish-American litera- 
ture, representative authors, and major so- 
cio-economic developments. The course 
deals with the literature, especially the essay 
and poetry, from the 16th century to the 
present. Prerequisite: Spanish 22 or consent 
of instructor Alternate years. 

44 SPANISH LITERATURE OF THE 
GOLDEN AGE 

A study of representative works and princi- 
pal literary figures in the poetry, prose, and 
drama of the 16th and 17th centuries. Pre- 
requisite: Spanish 33, 35, or consent of in- 
structor 

45 MODERN HISPANIC LITERATURE 
Readings of important works of drama, po- 
etry, and prose from the major periods of 
19th and 20th century Spanish and Latin- 
American literature. Prerequisite: Spanish 
33, 35, or consent of instructor 

49 ADVANCED LANGUAGE PRACTICE 
Intensive practice for advanced students 
who wish to improve further their spoken 
and written Spanish. Includes work in oral 
comprehension, pronunciation, oral and 
written composition, and translation. Pre- 
requisite: One Spanish course at the 30 's 
level or consent of instructor Alternate 
years. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Recent studies include literary, linguistic. 



and cultural topics and themes such as ur- 
ban problems as reflected in the modern 
novel. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 



HISTORY 

Professor: Piper 

Associate Professor: Larson 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant Professor: Morris 

A major consists of 10 courses, includ- 
ing 10, 11, and 45. At least seven cours- 
es must be taken in the department. 
The following courses may be counted 
toward fulfilling the major require- 
ments: American Studies 10, Political 
Science 39, Religion 26 and 28. Other 
appropriate courses outside the de- 
partment may be counted upon de- 
partmental approval. For history ma- 
jors who student teach in history, the 
major consists of nine courses. In ad- 
dition to the courses listed below, spe- 
cial courses, independent study, and 
honors are available. Special courses 
recently taught and anticipated include 
a biographical study of European 
Monarchs, the European Left, the In- 
dustrialization and Urbanization of 
Modern Europe, Utopian Movements 
in America, the Peace Movement in 
America, The Vietnam War, and 
American Legal History. History ma- 
jors are encouraged to participate in 
the internship program. 

Three minors are offered by the De- 
partment of History. The following 
courses are required to complete a mi- 
nor in American History: History 12, 
13, and three courses in American his- 
tory numbered 20 and above. A minor 
in European History requires the com- 
pletion of History 10, II, and three 
courses in European history numbered 
20 and above. To obtain a minor in 
History (without national or geo- 
graphic designation), a student must 
complete six courses in history, of 
which three must be chosen from His- 



tory 10, 11, 12 and 13 and three must be 
history courses numbered 20 and 
above. 

5 SELECTED THEMES IN WESTERN 
CIVILIZATION 

A survey of the political, economic, social, 
and cultural values and institutions in West- 
ern Civilization from the time of classical 
Greece to the present. One-half unit of 
credit. (Not open to students who have had 
History 10 and J J.) 

10 EUROPE 1500-1815 

An examination of the political, social, cul- 
tural, and intellectual history of Europe and 
its relations with other areas of the world 
from 1500 to 1815. 

11 EUROPE 1815 -Present 

An examination of the political, social, cul- 
tural, and intellectual history of Europe and 
its relations with other areas of the world 
from 1815 to the present. 

12 UNITED STATES HISTORY 1607-1877 

A study of the men, measures, and move- 
ments which have been significant in the de- 
velopment of the United States between 
1607 and 1877. Attention is paid to the prob- 
lems of minority groups as well as to major- 
ity and national influences. 

13 UNITED STATES HISTORY 1877-Present 
A study of the men, measures, and move- 
ments which have been significant in the de- 
velopment of the United States since 1877. 
Attention is paid to the problems of minori- 
ty groups as well as to majority and nation- 
al influences. 

20 ANCIENT HISTORY 

A study of the ancient western world, in- 
cluding the foundations of the western tra- 
dition in Greece, the emergence and expan- 
sion of the Roman state, its experience as a 
republic, and its transformation into the 
Empire. The course will focus on the social 
and intellectual life of Greece and Rome as 
well as political and economic changes. Al- 
lernale years. 

22 MEDIEVAL EUROPE AND ITS 
NEIGHBORS 

The history of Europe from the dissolution 
of the Roman Empire to the mid-l5th cen- 
tury The course will deal with the growing 
estrangement of western Catholic Europe 
from the Byzantium and Islam, culminating 
in the Crusades; the rise of the Islamic Em- 
pire and its later fragmentation; the devel- 
opment and growth of feudalism; the con- 
flict of empire and papacy, and the rise of 
the towns. Alternate years. 



38 



23 EUROPE IN THE ERA OF THE 
WORLD WARS 

An intensive study of the political, econom- 
ic, social, and cultural history of Europe 
from 1900-1945. Topics include the rise of 
irrationalism, the origins of the First World 
War, the Communist and Fascist Revolu- 
tions, and the attempts to preserve peace 
before 1939. Prerequisite: History II or con- 
sent of instructor 

24 CONTEMPORARY EUROPE 

An intensive study of the political, econom- 
ic, social, and cultural history of Europe 
since 1945. Topics include the post-war eco- 
nomic recovery of Europe, the Sovietization 
of Eastern Europe, the origins of the Cold 
War, decolonization, and the flowering of 
the welfare state. Prerequisite: History II or 
consent of instructor 

25 FRENCH REVOLUTION AND 
NAPOLEON 

An analysis of the political, social, and in- 
tellectual background of the French Revolu- 
tion, a survey of the course of revolutionary 
development, and an estimate of the results 
of the Napoleonic conquests and adminis- 
tration. Prerequisite: History 10 or consent 
of instructor Alternate years. 

26 COLONIAL AMERICA AND THE 
REVOLUTIONARY ERA 

The establishment of British settlements on 
the American continent, their history as col- 
onies, the causes and events of the Ameri- 
can Revolution, the critical period following 
independence, and proposal and adoption 
of the United States Constitution. Alternate 



11 20TH CENTURY UNITED STATES 

This course begins with the Progressive Era 
and includes the political, economic, and so- 
cial developments in the 20th century. Em- 
phasis will be placed on the domestic and 
international demands which have faced the 
United States in the period following World 
War II. 

28 AFRO-AMERICAN HISTORY 

A study of the experiences and participation 
of Afro-Americans in the United States. 
The course includes historical experiences 
such as slavery, abolition, reconstruction, 
and urbanization. It also raises the issue of 
the development and growth of white rac- 
ism, and the effect of this racism on con- 
temporary Afro-American social, intellec- 
tual, and political life. Alternate years. 

29 LATIN AMERICAN HISTORY 

An examination of the native civilization, 
the age of discovery and conquest, Spanish 
colonial policy, the independence move- 



ments, and the development of modern in- 
stitutions and governments in Latin Ameri- 
ca. Alternate years. 

31 HISTORY OF WORLD WAR II 

A comprehensive examination of World 
War II emphasizing the effect of ideological, 
economic, and political forces on the formu- 
lation of military strategy and the conduct 
of operation; the nature and extent of the 
expansion of government powers; and the 
experience of war from the perspective of 
ordinary civilians and military alike. Does 
not count toward distribution. 

33 CONFLICT IN WESTERN 
CIVILIZATION 

An in-depth study of the changing nature of 
war and its relationship to the development 
of Western Civilization since the end of the 
Middle Ages. Particular emphasis will be 
placed on the role of war in the development 
of the modern nation state and the origins 
and nature of total war. Alternate years. 

34 DIPLOMATIC HISTORY OF EUROPE 
SINCE 1789 

A survey of the development of the Europe- 
an-states system and the relations between 
the European states since the beginning of 
the French Revolution. Prerequisite: Histo- 
ry II or consent of instructor. Alternate 
years. 

35 THE CRISIS OF LIBERALISM AND 

NATIONALISM, EUROPE 1848-1870 
An in-depth investigation of the crucial 
"Middle Years" of 19th century Europe 
from the revolutions of 1848 through the 
unification of Germany. The course centers 
on the struggles for power within the major 
states of Europe at this time, and how the 
vehicle of nationalism was used to bring 
about one type of solution. Alternate years. 

37 AGE OF JEFFERSON AND JACKSON 

The theme of the course is the emergence of 
the political and social characteristics that 
shaped modern America. The personalities 
of Thomas Jefferson, John Marshall, John 
Randolph, Aaron Burr, and Andrew Jack- 
son receive special attention. Special consid- 
eration is given to the first and second party 
systems, the decline in community cohesive- 
ness, the westward movement, and the 
growing importance of the family as a unit 
of social organization. Alternate years. 

38 CIVIL WAR AND RECONSTRUCTION 
The problems and events leading to war, the 
political and military history of the war, and 
the bitter aftermath to the Compromise of 

1877. 

39 20TH CENTURY UNITED STATES 
RELIGION 



The study of historical and cultural develop- 
ments in American society which relate to 
religion or what is commonly called relig- 
ion. This involves consideration of the insti- 
tutional and intellectual development of 
several faith groups as well as discussion of 
certain problems, such as the persistence of 
religious bigotry and the changing modes of 
church-state relationships. Alternate years. 

40 HISTORY OF RENAISSANCE 
THOUGHT 

A study of the classical, humanist, and 
scholastic elements involved in the develop- 
ment of the Renaissance outlook on views 
and values, both in Italy and in Northern 
Europe. The various combinations of social 
and political circumstances which constitute 
the historical context of these intellectual 
developments will be noted. Alternate years. 

41 HISTORY OF REFORMATION 
THOUGHT 

A study of the ideas and systems of ideas 
propounded prior to the Reformation, but 
which are historically related to its incep- 
tion, and of the ideas and systems of ideas 
involved in the formulation of the major 
Reformation Protestant traditions, and in 
the Catholic Reformation. Included are the 
ideas of the humanists of the Reformation 
Era. Alternate years. 

42 UNITED STATES SOCIAL AND 
INTELLECTUAL HISTORY TO 1877 

A study of the social and intellectual experi- 
ence of the United States from its colonial 
antecedents through reconstruction. Among 
the topics considered are Puritanism, trans- 
cendentalism, community life and organiza- 
tion, education, and social-reform move- 
ments. Prerequisites: two courses from His- 
tory 12, 13, 28, or consent of instructor 

43 UNITED STATES SOCIAL AND 
INTELLECTUAL HISTORY SINCE 1877 
A study of the social and intellectual experi- 
ence of the United States from reconstruc- 
tion to the present day. Among the topics 
considered are social Darwinism, pragma- 
tism, community life and organization, ed- 
ucation and social reform movements. Pre- 
requisites: two courses from History 12, 13, 
28 or consent of instructor. 

45 HISTORICAL METHODS 

This course focuses on the nature and mean- 
ing of history. It will open to the student 
different historical approaches and will pro- 
vide the opportunity to explore these ap- 
proaches in terms of particular topics and 
periods. Majors are required to enroll in 
this course in either their junior or senior 
year. The course is open to other students 
who have two courses in history or consent 
of instructor. 



39 



70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Typically, history interns work for local 
government agencies engaged in historical 
projects or for the Lycoming County 
Historical Museum. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Recent topics include studies of the immi- 
gration of American blacks, political dis- 
sension in the Weimer Republic, Indian re- 
lations before the American Revolution, 
and the history of Lycoming County. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 



INTERNATIONAL STUDIES 

Associate Professor: Larson 
(Coordinator) 

The major is designed to integrate an 
understanding of the changing social, 
political, and historical environment 
of Europe today with study of Europe 
in its relations to the rest of the world, 
particularly the United States. It stress- 
es the international relations of the 
North Atlantic community and offers 
the student opportunity to emphasize 
either European studies or internation- 
al relations. The program provides 
multiple perspectives on the cultural 
traits that shape popular attitudes and 
institutions. Study of a single country 
is included as a data-base for compari- 
sons, and study of its language, as a 
basis for direct communication with 
its people. 

The program is intended to prepare 
a student either for graduate study or 
for careers which have an internation- 
al component. International obliga- 
tions are increasingly assumed by gov- 
ernment agencies and a wide range of 
business, social, religious, and educa- 
tional organizations. Opportunities 
are found in the fields of journalism, 
publishing, communications, trade, 
banking, advertising, management, 
and tourism. The program also offers 
flexible career preparation in a variety 
of essential skills, such as research, 
data analysis, report writing, language 



skills, and the awareness necessary for 
dealing with people and institutions of 
another culture. Preparation for relat- 
ed careers can be obtained through the 
guided selection of courses outside the 
major in the areas of business, eco- 
nomics, foreign languages and litera- 
tures, government, history, and inter- 
national relations or through a second 
major. Students should design their 
programs in consuUation with mem- 
bers of the Committee on Internation- 
al Studies. 

By completing six to eight addition- 
al courses in the social sciences (which 
include those courses needed to com- 
plete a major in economics, history, 
political science, or sociology/anthro- 
pology) and the required program in 
education, students can be certified 
for the teacher education program in 
social studies. By completing a major 
in the foreign language (five or more 
courses) and the education program, 
students can be certified to teach that 
language. The International Studies 
program also encourages participation 
in study-abroad programs, as well as 
the Washington and United Nations 
semesters. 

The major includes II courses select- 
ed as follows: 

International Relations Courses — 

Four or two courses (if two, then four 
must be taken from Area Courses). 
Courses within this group are designed 
to provide a basic understanding of 
the international system and of Eu- 
rope's relations with the rest of the 
world. Political Science 25 is required. 

Political Science 25: World Politics 
Economics 43: International Trade 
History 34: European Diplomatic History 
Political Science 39: American Foreign Pol- 
icy 
Area Courses — Four or two courses 
(if two, then four must be taken from 
International Relations Courses). 
Courses within this group are designed 
to provide a basic understanding of 
the European political, social, and ec- 
onomic environment. History 11 and 
Economics 22 are required. 



History 11: Europe 1815-Present 
Economics 22: Economic Systems of the 

West 
Political Science 20: European Politics 
History 23: Europe in the Era of the World 

Wars 
History 24: Contemporary Europe 



National Courses 

Language — Two courses in one lan- 
guage. 

French 21, plus one course numbered 22 or 

above (except 28) 
German 21, plus one course numbered 22 or 

above 
Spanish 21, plus one course numbered 22 or 

above 



Country — One course. The student 
must select, according to his or her 
language preparation, one Europe- 
an country which will serve as a spe- 
cial interest area throughout the 
program. The country selected will 
serve as the base for individual pro- 
jects in the major courses wherever 
possible. 

France — French 28: Modern France 
Germany — History 80: Topics in German 

History 
Spain — Spanish 32: Hispanic Culture 



Elective Course — One course which 
should involve further study of some 
aspect of the program. Appropriate 
courses are any area or international re- 
lations courses not yet taken, History 
10, 33; Economics 23, 45; Political Sci- 
ence 26, 27, 38, 46; related foreign-lit- 
erature courses counting toward the 
fine-arts requirement and internships. 



49 SENIOR SEMINAR 

A one-semester seminar, taken in the senior 
year, in which students and several faculty 
members will pursue an integrative topic in 
the field of international studies. Students 
will work to some extent independently. 
Guest speakers will be invited. The seminar 
will be open to qualified persons from out- 
side the major and the College. Prerequisite: 
consent of instructor. 



40 



LITERATURE 



Associate Professor: Maples 
(Coordinator) 

This major recognizes literature as a 
distinct discipline beyond national 
boundaries and combines the study of 
any two literatures in the areas of Eng- 
lish, French, German, and Spanish. 
Students can thus explore two litera- 
tures widely and intensively at the up- 
per levels of course offerings within 
each of the respective departments 
while developing and applying skills in 
foreign languages. The major prepares 
students for graduate study in either of 
the two literatures studies or in com- 
parative literature. 

The major requires at least six litera- 
ture courses, equally divided between 
the two literatures concerned. The six 
must be at the advanced level as deter- 
mined in consultation with advisers 
(normally courses numbered 20 and 
above in English and 40 and above in 
foreign languages). In general, two of 
the advanced courses in each literature 
should be period courses. The third 
course, taken either as a regular course 
or an independent study, may have as 
its subject another period, a particular 
author, genre, or literary theme, or 
some other unifying approach or idea. 
Beyond these six, the major must in- 
clude at least two additional courses 
from among those counting toward a 
major in the departments involved. 
Any prerequisite courses in the respec- 
tive departments (for example: English 
6, French 21-22 or 28, German 21-22, 
Spanish 21-22) should be taken during 
the freshman year. Students should de- 
sign their programs in consultation 
with a faculty member from each of 
the literatures concerned. Programs 
for the major must be approved by the 
departments involved. 



MASS COMMUNICATION 



Instructor: Nason (Chairperson) 



The major in mass communication 
combines a liberal arts foundation 
with a professional sequence through a 
selection of courses from the Depart- 
ments of Art, Business Administra- 
tion, English, Political Science, Psy- 
chology, Sociology and Anthropology, 
and Mass Communication. It also 
draws upon specialized courses from 
the graphic arts department of the Wil- 
liamsport Area Community College. 
Students completing the program are 
qualified to pursue either career op- 
tions or graduate study in mass com- 
munication, advertising, broadcasting, 
journalism, or public relations. 

Students majoring in mass communi- 
cation must complete the Core Curric- 
ulum and one sequence, as well as the 
College distribution requirements. 

A minor in Mass Communication 
consists of Mass Comm 10 and any 
four of the following courses: Mass 
Comm 11, 24, 27, 28, 30, 31. 

I. THE CORE CURRICULUM 

REQUIRED OF ALL STUDENTS 

Two Theory Courses 

Mass Comm 10 Introduction to Mass 

Communication 
Mass Comm 30 Theories of Mass 

Communication 

A Media Regulation Course 
Mass Comm 31 Mass Media Law and 
Regulation 

A Production Course (Choice of one. Cer- 
tain of these courses are required in spe- 
cific sequences.) 

GCO 511 Layout and Design 

GCO 512 Typographic Composition 

Mass Comm 24 Television Production 

A Writing Course (Choice of one. Certain 
of these courses are required in specific 
sequences.) 

Eng 16 Writing for Special Audiences 
Eng 18 Newswriting for the Print Media 
Mass Comm 19 Newswriting for the 

Broadcast Media 
Pol Sci 34 Political Newswriting 

Mass Comm 27 Scriptwriting for Radio 
and Television 

A Research Course (Choice of one. Certain 
of these courses are required in specific 
sequences.) 

Pol Sci 48 Public Opinion and Polling 
Soc 47 Research Methods in Sociology 



Psy 32 Sensory Experimental Psychology 
Psy 24 Social Psychology 

Bus 45 Marketing Research 

An applied Media Experience Course 
(Choice of one.) 

Mass Comm 48-49 Practicum 

Mass Comm 70-79 Internship 

Mass Comm 80-89 Independent Study 

NOTE: Mass Communication core courses 
may be utilized both to meet the core re- 
quirements and to complete sequence re- 
quirements. Since some core courses must 
be used to meet sequence requirements stu- 
dents should review carefully sequence re- 
quirements in selecting courses. 

II. SEQUENCE REQUIREMENTS 

Mass Communication majors must com- 
plete at least one sequence. All sequence re- 
quirements are in addition to the core cur- 
riculum but the same course may be used to 
meet the core requirements as well as the re- 
quirements of sequences. 

Advertising Sequence: 

Bus 28-29 Marketing Management 

Bus 32 Advertising 

Pol Sci 48 Public Opinion and Polling or 
Bus 45 Marketing Research or 

Soc 47 Research Methods in Sociology 
GCO 511 Layout and Design 

GCO 512 Typographic Composition 

Mass Comm 11 Oral Communication 
Art 27 Photography I or 

Art 15 Two-dimensional Design 

Bus 47 Creative Advertising is 

strongly recommended, though 
not required, for this sequence. 

Broadcasting Sequence: 



Mass Comm 19 


Newswriting for 




Broadcast Media 


Pol Sci 34 


Political Newswriting 


Mass Comm 11 


Oral Communication 


Mass Comm 31 


Mass Media Law and 




Regulation 


Mass Comm 28 


Radio Programming 




and Production 


Mass Comm 24 


Television Production 


Mass Comm 27 


Scriptwriting for Radio 




and Television 


Eng 26 


Film and Literature or 


Theall 


Introduction to Film 



Journalism Sequence: 

Eng 16 Writing for Special Audiences 
Eng 17 Critical Writing 

Eng 18 Newswriting for Print Media 

Pol Sci 34 Political Newswriting 

Pol Sci 11 State and Local Government 
Soc 34 Racial and Cultural Minorities 
Pol Sci 48 Public Opinion and Polling 
Art 27 Photography I 

GCO 511 Typographic Composition 



41 



Public Relations Sequence: 

Eng 16 Writing for Special Audiences 
Eng 18 Newswriting for Print Media 

Eng 37 Public Relations and Publicity 
Bus 28-29 Marketing Management 

Pol Sci 48 Public Opinion and Polling or 
Sec 47 Research Methods in Sociology 
Art 27 Photography I 

Mass Comm 24 Television Production 
Mass Comm II Oral Communication 

10 INTRODUCTION TO MASS 
COMMUNICATION 

Theories of the process of mass communi- 
cation and introduction to the mass media; 
attention will be given to problems of cen- 
sorship and media ethics. Analysis of the 
mass media's impact on society; emphasis 
will be placed on the social, psychological, 
and political implications of the media's 
shaping influence on man and institutions. 

11 FUNDAMENTALS OF ORAL 
COMMUNICATION 

The dynamics of oral communication. The 
development of elementary principles of 
simple oral communication through lec- 
tures, prepared assignments in speaking, 
and informal class exercises. Utilizes video- 
taf>e sequences for feedback to students. 

19 NEWSWRITING FOR THE 
BROADCAST MEDIA 
Analysis of and practice in newswriting for 
broadcast: the news story, the newscast, and 
the interview. Frequent workshop sessions 
for critiques of student writing and oral 
presentations. Alternate years. 

24 TELEVISION PRODUCTION 

Technical, aesthetic, organizational, and 
business aspects of video programs. Study 
and use of basic equipment to produce stan- 
dard formats on videotape. 

27 SCRIPTWRITING FOR RADIO AND 
TELEVISION 

Analysis of differences between radio and 
television writing requirements, station for- 
mats, standard program forms, script stan- 
dards, writing and criticism. Alternate 
years. 

28 RADIO PROGRAMMING AND 
PRODUCTION 

Contemporary broadcast programming 
techniques including station scheduling, 
program development and analysis, and im- 
plementation in real and hypothetical situa- 
tions. Emphasis on management functions. 
Alternate years. 

30 THEORIES AND ISSUES IN MASS 
COMMUNICATION 

An analysis of current theories dealing with 



mass communication systems and the be- 
havior and attitudes of, and effects on, 
their audiences. The course also examines 
contemporary mass media issues with an 
emphasis on developing critical thinking 
skills. Prerequisite: Mass Comm 10. 

MASS MEDIA LAW AND REGULATION 
An examination of the legal structure and 
the system by which mass communication is 
controlled in this society. The forces which 
shape, influence, and make policy will be 
considered. Cross-listed as Political Science 
36. Prerequisite: junior or senior standing 
or consent of instructor 



48-49 



PRACTICUM IN MASS 
COMMUNICATION 



Utilization of mass communication princi- 
ples, techniques, and skills in an applied set- 
ting through work experience in a com- 
munication agency or organization. This 
experience is coordinated with regular class 
meetings to analyze and evaluate relation- 
ships between theory and practice. Prereq- 
uisite: upper division status and consent of 
instructor 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Interns usually work off campus in a field 
related to their communication sequence; 
some may work with the campus radio sta- 
tion. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Studies involve research related to the com- 
munication sequence of the student. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 
Through special arrangement, the following 
courses offered at the Williamsport Area 
Community College are available only to 
students in the mass communication major 
and in the art track III major in Commer- 
cial Design. The WACC courses are taken as 
part of the student's semester schedule and 
are listed with Lycoming offerings during 
registration periods. 



Graphic Arts 

511 LAYOUT AND DESIGN 

Analysis of materials, tools, and techniques 
used in preparation of copy for reproduc- 
tion; paste-up and color separation over- 
lays. 4 cr. 

512 TYPOGRAPHIC COMPOSITION 
Fundamentals of typesetting. Theory and 
practice in the care and use of composing 
machines, both hot (mechanical) and cold 
(photo). 4 cr. 



521 PROCESS CAMERA 

Concepts and techniques of darkroom pro- 
cedure for reproduction of line and halftone 
copy on process camera. 4 cr. 



MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES 

Associate Professors: Getchell, Haley 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant Professors: DeSilva, 

Sprechini, Roy 
Instructor: Troxel 
Part-time Instructor: Dotzel 

The Department of Mathematical Sci- 
ences offers major programs in com- 
puter science and mathematics. 

Computer Science 

A major in computer science consists 
of 11 courses: Mathematics 16, 18, and 
19, and Computer Science 15, 26, 27, 
44, 45, and three other computer sci- 
ence courses numbered 30 or above, 
one of which must be 31 or 37. Recom- 
mended extradepartmental courses: 
Physics 27, Philosophy 25, and Psy- 
chology 37. 

A minor in Computer Science con- 
sists of Computer Science 26, 27, and 
two other computer science courses 
numbered 20 or above. 

15 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER 
SCIENCE 

Introduction to programming, utilizing Pas- 
cal. Topics include program structure, com- 
puter configuration, memory allocation, al- 
gorithms, and applications. Includes labo- 
ratory experience on the PDPl 1/70 comput- 
er. Prerequisite: credit for or exemption 
from Mathematics 5. 

26 PRINCIPLES OF ADVANCED 
PROGRAMMING 

Principles of effective programming using 
Pascal, including structured programming, 
stepwise refinement, assertion proving, 
style, debugging, control structure, decision 
tables, finite state machines, recursion, and 
encoding. Prerequisite: a grade ofCor bet- 
ter in Computer Science IS or consent of in- 
structor. 

27 DATA STRUCTURES 
Representation of data and algorithms asso- 
ciated with data structures. Topics include 



42 



representation of lists, trees, graphs and 
strings, algorithms for searching and sort- 
ing. Prerequisite: a grade of C or belter in 
Computer Science 26 or consent of instruc- 
tor Corequisite: Mathematics 16. 

31 INTRODUCTION TO NUMERICAL 
ANALYSIS 

Study and analysis of tabulated data leading 
to interpolation, numerical integration, nu- 
merical solutions of differential equations, 
and systems of equations. Prerequisite: 
Computer Science 15 and Mathematics 19. 
Alternate years. Cross- listed as Mathemat- 
ics 31. 

37 COMPUTATIONAL MATRIX ALGEBRA 
An introduction to some of the algorithms 
which have been developed for producing 
numerical solutions to such linear algebraic 
problems as solving systems of linear equa- 
tions, inverting matrices, computing the ei- 
genvalues of a matrix, and solving the linear 
least-squares problem. Prerequisite: Com- 
puter Science 15 and Mathematics 19 or con- 
sent of instructor Alternate years. Cross- 
listed as Mathematics 37. 

39 DATABASE SYSTEMS 

External storage structures, hashed files, in- 
dexed files; relational, network, and hierar- 
chical data models; relational algebra and 
the relational calculus; design theory for re- 
lational databases; query optimization; 
concurrent operations; database protection. 
Prerequisite: Computer Science 27. Alter- 
nate years. 

44 MACHINE LANGUAGE 

Principles of machine language program- 
ming; computer organization and represen- 
tation of numbers, strings, arrays, and list 
structures at the machine level; interrupt 
programming, relocatable code, linking 
loaders; interfacing with operating systems. 
Prerequisite: a grade ofC or better in Com- 
puter Science 26 or consent of instructor 

45 SYSTEMS PROGRAMMING 

The emphasis in this course is on the algo- 
rithms used in programming the various 
parts of a computer system. These parts in- 
clude assemblers, loaders, editors, interrupt 
processors, input/output schedulers, pro- 
cessor and job schedulers, and memory 
managers. Prerequisite: Computer Science 
27 and 44. 

46 COMPILER CONSTRUCTION 

The emphasis in this course is on the con- 
struction of translators for programming 
languages. Topics include lexical analysis, 
block structure, grammars, parsing, pro- 
gram representation, and run-time organi- 
zation. Prerequisite: Computer Science 27. 
Alternate years. 



10-19 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 

Mathematics 

A major in mathematics consists of 10 
units of courses in the mathematical 
sciences: Computer Science 15, Mathe- 
matics 18, 19, 20, 24, 34, 42, and three 
other mathematics courses numbered 
above 20, one of which may be re- 
placed by Mathematics 12, 14, or 16. 
Students seeking secondary certifica- 
tion in mathematics are required to 
complete Mathematics 30 and 36 and 
are advised to enroll in Philosophy 17. 
In addition, all majors are advised to 
elect Philosophy 25 and 33, Physics 25 
and 26. 

In addition to the regular courses 
listed below, special courses are occa- 
sionally available. Recent topics in- 
clude computer graphics and discrete 
probability. 

A minor in Mathematics consists of 
Mathematics 20, 24, and two other 
mathematics courses numbered above 
20. 

5 INDIVIDUALIZED LABORATORY 
INSTRUCTION IN BASIC ALGEBRA 
A self-paced study of arithmetic and deci- 
mal numerals, fractions, the real number 
line, factoring, solutions to linear and quad- 
ratic equations, graphs of linear and quad- 
ratic functions, expressions with rational 
exponents, algebraic functions, exponential 
functions, and inequalities. THIS COURSE 
IS LIMITED TO STUDENTS PLACED 
THEREIN BY THE MATHEMATICS 
DEPARTMENT. One-half unit of credit. 

1 MATHEMATICS IN ELEMENTARY 
EDUCATION 

This course is intended for prospective ele- 
mentary-school teachers and is required of 
all those seeking elementary certification. 
Topics include systems of numbers and of 
numeration, computational algorithms, en- 
vironmental and transformation geometry 
measurement, and mathematical concept 
formation. Observation and participation 
in Greater Williamsport elementary schools. 
Corequisite: any education course mmtbered 
40 or above which is specifically required 
for elementary certification or consent of 
instructor. 



9 INTRODUCTION TO CALCULUS 

An intuitive approach to the calculus con- 
cepts with applications to business, biology, 
and social-science problems. Not open to 
students who have completed Mathematics 
18. Prerequisite: credit for or e.xemption 
from Mathematics 5. Alternate years. 

12 FINITE MATHEMATICS FOR 
DECISION MAKING 

An introduction to some of the principal 
mathematical models, not involving calcu- 
lus, which are used in business administra- 
tion, social sciences, and operations re- 
search. The course will include both deter- 
ministic models such as graphs, networks, 
linear programming and voting models, and 
probabilistic models such as Markov chains 
and games. Prerequisite: credit for or ex- 
emption from Mathematics 5. 

13 INTRODUCTION TO STATISTICS 
Empirical distributions of measurements, 
probability and random variables, discrete 
and continuous probability distributions, 
statistical inference from small samples, lin- 
ear regression and correlation, analysis of 
enumerative data. Prerequisite: credit for or 
exemption from Mathematics 5. 

14 MULTIVARIATE STATISTICS 

The study of statistical techniques used in 
experimental designs where more than one 
random variable is involved. Techniques in- 
clude analysis of variance, analysis of 
covariance, multiple regression and correla- 
tion, factor analysis and canonical correla- 
tions, contingency tables, discriminative 
analysis, and non-parametric techniques. 
Further topics will be chosen from cluster 
analysis, time series analysis, and repeated 
measure analysis. Extensive use of the PDP 
11/70 computer and the BMDP statistical 
package is made. Prerequisite: Mathematics 
13 or its equivalent. Alternate years. 

16 DISCRETE MATHEMATICS 

An introduction to discrete structures. Top- 
ics include equivalence relations, partitions 
and quotient sets, mathematical induction, 
recursive functions, elementary logic, dis- 
crete number systems, elementary combina- 
torial theory, and general algebraic struc- 
tures emphasizing semi-groups, groups, lat- 
tices, Boolean algebras, graphs and trees. 
Prerequisite: Computer Science 15 or con- 
sent of instructor 

17 PRECALCULUS MATHEMATICS 

The study of logarithmic, exponential, trig- 
onometric, polynomial, and rational func- 
tions, their graphs, and elementary proper- 
ties. Prerequisite: credit for or exemption 
from Mathematics 5. 



43 



18 CALCULUS WITH ANALYTIC 
GEOMETRY I 

Differentiation of algebraic functions, 
graphing plane curves, applications lo relat- 
ed rate and extremal problems, integration 
of algebraic functions, areas of plane re- 
gions, volumes of solids or revolution, and 
other applications. Prerequisite: a grade of 
C or better in Mathematics 17 or its equiva- 
lent or consent of instructor. 

19 CALCULUS WITH ANALYTIC 
GEOMETRY II 

Differentiation and integration of transcen- 
dental functions, parametric equations, 
polar coordinates, the conic sections and 
their applications, infinite sequences, and 
series expansions. Prerequisite: a grade ofC 
or better in Mathematics 18 or consent of 
instructor. 

20 MULTIVARIATE CALCULUS WITH 
MATRIX ALGEBRA 

Vectors, linear transformations and their 
matrix representations, determinants, ma- 
trix inversion, solutions to systems of linear 
equations, differentiation and integration 
of multivariate functions, vector field theo- 
ry and applications. Prerequisite: a grade of 
C or better in Mathematics 19 or consent of 
instructor 

21 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 

A study of ordinary differential equations 
and their applications: first-order linear dif- 
ferential equations, the Picard Existence 
Theorem, solution by separation of varia- 
bles, solution by numerical methods; sec- 
ond-order linear differential equations, so- 
lution by variation of parameters, solution 
by power series, solution by Laplace trans- 
forms; system of first-order equation, solu- 
tions by eigenvalues; qualitative theory, sta- 
bility theory asymptotic behavior, and the 
Poincare-Bendixon theorem. Besides the 
usual applications in physics and engineer- 
ing, considerable attention will be given to 
modern applications in the social and life 
sciences. Prerequisite: a grade of Cor better 
in Mathematics 19 or consent of instructor. 
Alternate years. 

23 COMPLEX VARIABLES 

Complex numbers, analytic functions, com- 
plex integration, Cauchy's theorems and 
their applications. Corequisite: Mathemat- 
ics 20. Alternate years. 

24 FOUNDATIONS OF MATHEMATICS 
Topics regularly included are the nature of 
mathematical systems, essentials of logical 
reasoning, and axiomatic foundations of set 
theory. Other topics frequently included are 
approaches to the concepts of infinity and 
continuity, and the construction of the real 



number system. The course serves as a bridge 
from the elementary calculus to advanced 
courses in algebra and analysis. Prerequisite: 
Mathematics 19 or consent of instructor 

30 TOPICS IN GEOMETRY 

An a.xiomatic treatment of Euclidean geom- 
etry, and an introduction to related geome- 
tries. Prerequisite: Mathematics 18. Alter- 
nate years. 

31 INTRODUCTION TO NUMERICAL 
ANALYSIS 

Study and analysis of tabulated data lead- 
ing to interpolation, numerical integration, 
numerical solutions of differential equa- 
tions, and systems of equations. Prerequi- 
site: Computer Science 15 and Mathematics 
19. Alternate years. Cross-listed as Compu- 
ter Science 31. 

32-33 MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS I-II 
A study of probability, discrete and contin- 
uous random variables, expected values and 
moments, sampling, point estimation, sam- 
pling distributions, interval estimation, test 
of hypotheses, regression and linear hy- 
potheses, experimental design models. Co- 
requisite: Mathematics 20. Alternate years. 

34 MODERN ALGEBRA 

An integrated approach to groups, rings, 
fields, and vector spaces and functions 
which preserve their structure. Prerequisite: 
Mathematics 24. 

36 CONCEPTS OF MATHEMATICS IN 
SECONDARY EDUCATION 

A course designed for mathematics majors 
who are planning to teach at the secondary 
level. Emphasis will be placed on the mathe- 
matics that forms the foundation of secon- 
dary mathematics. Ideas will be presented 
to familiarize the student with various cur- 
riculum proposals, to provide for innova- 
tion within the existing curriculum, and to 
expand the boundaries of the existing cur- 
riculum. Open only to junior and senior 
mathematics majors enrolled in the secon- 
dary-education program. A Iternate years. 

37 COMPUTATIONAL MATRIX ALGEBRA 
An introduction to some of the algorithms 
which have been developed for producing 
numerical solutions to such linear algebraic 
problems as solving systems of linear equa- 
tions, inverting matrices, computing the ei- 
genvalues of a matrix, and solving the linear 
least-squares problem. Prerequisite: Com- 
puter Science 15 and Mathematics 19 or con- 
sent of instructor Alternate years. Cross- 
listed as Computer Science 37. 

38 OPERATIONS RESEARCH 

Queuing theory, including simulation tech- 



niques; optimization theory, including line- 
ar programming, integer programming, and 
dynamic programming; game theory, in- 
cluding two-person zero-sum games, coofv 
erative games, and multiperson games. Pre- 
requisite: Mathematics 12 or Mathematics 
20. Alternate years. 

42 REAL ANALYSIS 

A rigorous analysis of the basic concepts of 
real variable calculus; the real number sys- 
tem as a complete, ordered field; the topol- 
ogy of Euclidean space, compact sets, the 
Heine- Borel Theorem; continuity; the Inter- 
mediate Value Theorem; derivatives, the 
Mean Value Theorem; Riemann integrals, 
the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus; in- 
finite series, and Taylor's theorem. Prereq- 
uisite: Mathematics 24. 

48 SEMINAR 

Topics in modern mathematics of current 
interest to the instructor. A different topic is 
selected each semester. This semester is de- 
signed to provide junior and senior mathe- 
matics majors and other qualified students 
with more than the usual opportunity for 
concentrated and cooperative inquiry. Pre- 
requisite: consent of instructor. One-half 
unit of credit. This course may be repealed 
for credit. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 



MUSIC 

Assistant Professors: Boerckel 
(Chairperson), Jeffers, Thayer 

Part-time Instructors: Freed, Gallup, 
Guth, Lakey, Nacinovich, Russell 

The music major is required to take a 
balanced program of theory, applied 
music, music history, and music en- 
semble. A minimum of eight courses 
(exclusive of applied music and ensem- 
ble) is required, and these must include 
Music 10, 11, 17, 22, and any two from 
35, 36, 37, 38. Music 17 is not required 
of the music major who completes 
Music 35, 36, 37, and 38. Each major 
must participate in an ensemble (Music 
67, 68 and/or 69) and take one hour of 



44 



applied music per week for a mini- 
mum of four semesters. (See Music 
60-66). The major must include at 
least one-half hour of piano in the ap- 
plied program unless a piano profi- 
ciency test is requested and passed. 
Anyone declaring music as a second 
major must do so by the beginning of 
the junior year. 

The Music Department recommends 
that non-majors select courses from 
the following list to meet distribution 
requirements: Music 16, 17; Music 18, 
19; Music 22 in combination with any 
one of the above mentioned four (4) 
courses (16, 17, 18, 19). 

10-11 MUSIC THEORY I AND II 

A two-semester course open to all students. 
An examination of the fundamental com- 
ponents and theoretical concepts of music. 
The student will develop musicianship 
through application of applied skills. (Mu- 
sic 10 is prerequisite to Music 11). 

16 INTRODUCTION TO MUSIC 

A basic course in the materials and tech- 
niques of music. Examples drawn from var- 
ious periods and styles are designed to en- 
hance perception and appreciation through 
careful and informed listening. 

17 SURVEY OF WESTERN MUSIC 

A chronological survey of Western music 
from the Middle Ages to the present for the 
major or non-major. 

18 AMERICAN MUSIC I 

For the major or non-major interested in 
studying all types of American music, from 
pre-Revolutionary days through World War 
1. Areas explored will include Indian, Afri- 
can, and European roots influencing the 
serious music for small and large ensembles, 
the development of show music from min- 
strels to Broadway musicals, the evolution 
of "Tin Pan Alley," and the beginnings of 
jazz. Alternate years. 

19 AMERICAN MUSIC II 

For the major or non-major interested in 
studying all types of American music. 
American Music II will cover post-World 
War I days to the present. Areas explored 
will include indigenous serious music for 
small and large ensembles, the mature 
Broadway musical, the evolution of jazz, 
the development of rock, and the fusion of 
musical styles in the 1970's. Alternate years. 

20-21 MUSIC THEORY III AND IV 

A continuation of the integrated theory 



course moving toward newer uses of music 
materials. Prerequisite: Music II. Alternate 
years. 

22 ELECTRONIC MUSIC I 

Largely a non-technical introduction to elec- 
tronic music designed for the major and 
non-major. The course traces the develop- 
ment of electronic music, introduces the 
student to simple tape-splicing and recorder 
manipulation, and progresses to the present- 
day synthesizer and multitrack techniques. 
Students will work collectively and individ- 
ually in the electronic studios. Alternate 
years. 

30 COMPOSITION 

Creative writing in smaller vocal and instru- 
mental forms. The beginning of the course 
requires students to identify and use the 
techniques developed by major composers 
of the 20th century. Students begin develop- 
ing a personal style of composition in the 
remainder of the semester. One composition 
by each class member will be presented in a 
New Works recital toward the end of the se- 
mester. Prerequisite: Music 10-11 or consent 
of instructor Alternate years. 

31 CONDUCTING 

A study of the fundamentals of conducting 
with frequent opportunity for practical ex- 
perience. The College music organizations 
serve to make performance experience pos- 
sible. Prerequisite: Music 10-11 or consent 
of instructor Alternate years. 

33 ELECTRONIC MUSIC II 

An in-depth study of the Moog synthesizer, 
including alternating and direct current, sig- 
nal generators and the characteristics of their 
waveforms, control voltage and its sources, 
the transient and periodic modulations. Ba- 
sic mixing and filtering techniques will be 
examined. Students will be assigned studio 
hours to complete the recording assign- 
ments. Prerequisite: Music 22. Alternate 
years. 

35 MUSIC HISTORY TO J.S. BACH 

A survey of Western music from Gregorian 
chant to the masterworks of Handel and 
Bach. Church music of the Middle Ages, 
Renaissance, and Baroque periods is of pri- 
mary importance with the origins of instru- 
mental music and opera receiving secondary 
consideration. Prerequisite: Music 17 or 
consent of instructor Alternate years. 

36 MUSIC HISTORY OF THE I8TH 
CENTURY 

The symphonies, operas, chamber music, 
and piano works of Haydn, Mozart, and 
Beethoven are studied within the social and 
cultural chmate of late 18th century Europe. 



Rococo music in France and Italy will be 
considered with the expressive style of Ger- 
many and Austria. Prerequisite: Musicl7 or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

37 MUSIC OF THE I9TH CENTURY 

A study of the music of the Romantic peri- 
od with emphasis on Beethoven, Schubert, 
Chopin, Berlioz, Liszt, Schumann, Brahms, 
Wagner, Verdi, Tchaikovsky, and others. 
Close examination of short lyric forms, 
program music, opera, and the sonata gen- 
re. Prerequisite: Music 17 or consent of in- 
structor. Alternate years. 

38 MUSIC OF THE 20TH CENTURY 
Beginning with Debussy, Strauss, Mahler, 
and Sibelius, the course traces some of the 
main currents in the music of our time. Em- 
phasis given to such composers as Stravin- 
sky, Bartok, Ives, Shostakovich, Berg, 
Gershwin, and others. Prerequisite: Music 
17 or consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

39 ORCHESTRATION 

A study of modern orchestral instruments 
and examination of their use by the great 
masters with practical problems in instru- 
mentation. The College music organiza- 
tions serve to make performance experience 
possible. Prerequisite: Music 10-11 or con- 
sent of instructor. Alternate years. 

40 COUNTERPOINT 

A study of the five species in two-, three- 
and four-part writing. Emphasis is placed 
upon the 16th century writing style. Prereq- 
uisite: Music 10-11 or consent of instructor. 
Alternate years. 

42 ELECTRONIC MUSIC III 

An introduction to acoustic theory, echo 
technique, location modulation, application 
of equalization, phasing, and microphones. 
The student will write and perform an elec- 
tronic composition utihzing real-time net- 
works. Prerequisite: Music 33. Alternate 
years. 

43 ELECTRONIC MUSIC IV 

A study of major compositions and genres 
of electronic music. The student will com- 
plete an original composition based upon a 
study of these techniques and forms. Pre- 
requisite: Music 42. Alternate years. 

Applied Music and Ensemble 

The study of performance in piano, 
voice, organ, strings, woodwinds, and 
percussion is designed to develop sound 
technique and a knowledge of the ap- 
propriate literature for the instrument. 
Student recitals offer opportunities to 



45 



gain experience in public performance. 
Music majors and other students qual- 
ified in performance may present for- 
mal recitals. 

Credit for applied music courses 
(private lessons) and ensemble (choir, 
orchestra and band) is earned on a 
fractional basis. For a description of 
this, see page 6. An applied course or 
ensemble should NOT be substituted 
for an academic course, but should in 
every case be in addition to the normal 
four academic courses. 

Extra fees apply for private lessons 
(Music 60-66) as follows: 
$110 per semester for a half-hour les- 
son per week. Private lessons are given 
for 13 weeks. 

60 Piano, 61 Voice, 62 Strings or Gui- 
tar, 63 Organ, 64 Brass, 65 Wood- 
winds, 66 Percussion. 

67 ORCHESTRAL ENSEMBLE 

The Susquehanna Valley Symphony Or- 
chestra allows students with significant in- 
strumental experience to become members 
of this regional ensemble. Participation in 
the S.V.S.O. is contingent upon audition 
and the availability of openings. Students 
are allowed a maximum of one hour of En- 
semble credit per semester. A student who is 
enrolled in orchestra only should register 
for Music 67 B (one hour credit). A student 
may belong to two ensembles, choosing ei- 
ther Choir or Wind Ensemble as the second 
group. Such a student will then register for 
Music 67A ('/2 hour credit) plus either Music 
68A ('/z hour credit) or Music 69A {Vi hour 
credit). 

68 CHORAL ENSEMBLE (CHOIR) 
Participation in the College Choir is designed 
to enable any student possessing at least av- 
erage talent an opportunity to study choral 
technique. Emphasis is placed upon ac- 
quaintance with choral literature, tone pro- 
duction, diction, and phrasing. Students are 
allowed a maximum of one hour of Ensem- 
ble credit per semester. A student who is 
enrolled in Choir only should register for 
Music 68B (one hour credit). A student may 
belong to two ensembles, choosing either 
Orchestra or Wind Ensemble as the second 
group. Such a student will then register for 
Music 68A ('A hour credit) plus either Music 
67A ('/2 hour credit) or Music 69A ('/2 hour 
credit). 

69 WIND ENSEMBLE (BAND) 

The College Wind Ensemble allows students 
with some instrumental experience to be- 



come acquainted with good band literature 
and develop personal musicianship through 
participation in group instrumental activity. 
Students are allowed a maximum of one 
hour of Ensemble credit per semester. A 
student who is enrolled in Band only should 
register for Music 69B (one hour credit). A 
student may belong to two ensembles, 
choosing either Orchestra or Choir as the 
second group. Such a student will then 
register for Music 69A (Vi hour credit) plus 
either Music 67A {Vi hour credit) or Music 
68 A i'/i hour credit). 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 



NEAR EAST CULTURE AND 
ARCHAEOLOGY 

Professor: Guerra (Coordinator) 

The Near East culture and archaeology 
interdisciplinary major is designed to 
acquaint students with the "cradle of 
Western civilization," both in its an- 
cient and modern aspects. Majors will 
complete a minimum of eight to 10 
courses related to the Near East. 

Required courses are described in 
their departmental sections and in- 
clude: 

1. Four courses (semesters) in lan- 
guage and culture from: 

History and Culture of the Ancient 

Near East (Religion 28) 

History of Art (Art 22) 

Ancient History (History 20) 

Old Testament Faith and History 

(Religion 13) 

Judaism and Islam (Religion 24) 

Two semesters of foreign language 

(Hebrew 1, 2 or Greek 1, 2) 

2. Two courses (semesters) in archaeol- 
ogy from; 

Biblical Archaeology (Religion 26) 
Special Archaeology courses, such 
as independent studies or in May oi 
summer terms in the Near East. 

3. Two courses (semesters) in the coop- 
erating departments (art, history. 



political science, religion and sociol- 
ogy-anthropology) or related de- 
partments. These two courses, usu- 
ally taken in the junior or senior 
years, can be independent study. 
Topics should be related either to 
the ancient or the modern Near East 
and must be approved in advance 
by the committee supervising the in- 
terdisciplinary program. The study 
of modern Arabic or Hebrew is en- 
couraged. 

Other courses may be suggested by 
the supervisory committee within the 
limits of a 10-course major. The num- 
ber of courses taken within this pro- 
gram applicable toward fulfilling the 
College distribution requirements will 
vary according to the selection of 
courses. 



NURSING 

Professor: Rodgers (Chairperson) 
Assistant Professor: Condon, Jacoby, 

Parrish 
Instructors: Atkinson, Grunow, 

Pagana (on leave) 

Students wishing to major in nursing 
will be admitted to the College under 
the usual admission procedures. Fresh- 
men should follow the nursing curricu- 
lum plan for the freshman year in the 
sequence designated. To be considered 
for continuation in nursing, a mini- 
mum G.P.A. of 2.5 is required at com- 
pletion of the freshman year. It is nec- 
essary for the student to file a supple- 
mentary application with the Depart- 
ment of Nursing by March 1 of the 
freshman year. 

Clinical Learning Resources 

In addition to the College's new well- 
equipped Nursing Skills Lab, oppor- 
tunity for self-learning is provided in 
the adjacent Learning Center which is 
equipped with electronic study carrels 
and audio-visual materials. 

A wide variety of health-care agen- 
cies in the surrounding area are utilized 



46 



for clinical experiences. Cooperating 
hospitals and agencies include: Divine 
Providence Hospital, Williamsport 
Hospital, Evangelical Hospital, Gei- 
singer Medical Center, Leader Nursing 
Home and Rehabilitation Center, Dan- 
ville State Hospital, Pennsylvania De- 
partment of Health, Regional Home 
Health Services and the County Health 
Improvement Plan (CHIP). 

Expenses of the Nursing Program 

Students are responsible for their 
own transportation to assigned clinical 
areas. The student of nursing assumes 
all financial obligations listed in the 
section on fees in this bulletin includ- 
ing a $40 lab fee for each of the clinical 
nursing courses (Nursing 21, 30, 31, 32, 
33, 36, 40 and 41). Additional expenses 
include uniforms, name pin, watch 
with second hand, bandage scissors, 
stethoscope, blood pressure cuff, mal- 
practice insurance, annual health ex- 
aminations, and standardized achieve- 
ment tests. 

Major in Nursing 

The major in nursing consists of: 
Nursing 20, 21, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 
36, 40, 41, 42, and 43 or 80-89. In ad- 
dition, the following are prerequisites 
for specific nursing courses: Chemistry 
8, 15; Biology 13-14, 26; Psychology 
10, 17; Mathematics 13, and Computer 
Science 15. The religion/philosophy 
distribution requirement is met by the 
required courses: Philosophy 19 and 
Religion 20. The history/social science 
distribution requirement is met by the 
required courses: Psychology 10 and 
17. In addition, the student is required 
to take one course from among Sociol- 
ogy/Anthropology 10, 14, 20, 28, or 
29. The fine arts/foreign language dis- 
tribution requirement can be met by 
two courses in one department from 
among art, literature, music, or thea- 
tre; or by two courses in foreign lan- 
guage on the intermediate or higher 
course level. 

Unless otherwise indicated, nursing 
courses are open only to nursing ma- 
jors. 



Policies Specific to Nursing 

In addition to the Lycoming College 
continuance policies, the following 
policies are specific to all declared ma- 
jors in the Department of Nursing: 

1 . A grade of C or better is required in 
all clinical nursing courses to con- 
tinue in the nursing program. These 
courses are Nursing 21, 30, 31, 32, 
33, 36, 40 and 41. Students who earn 
a grade of less than 70 percent or C 
in either the theoretical or clinical 
component of a nursing course will 
receive a course grade of F and will 
be required to repeat both compo- 
nents of the course. Students who 
receive a nursing grade of F will not 
be permitted to continue in the nurs- 
ing sequence until the deficiency has 
been made up. 

2. Policies regarding absence from 
classes or from the clinical portion 
of nursing courses are determined 
by the instructor(s) responsible for 
the course. No absence from the 
clinical portion of the course will be 
excused except for illness or a fami- 
ly emergency. Excessive absences 
for any reason will necessitate re- 
peating the entire course. 



Typical Plan of Study for B.S.N. 

FRESHMAN YEAR 

Fall 

Chem. 8*(Inorganic Chemistry) . 1 

Eng. 6 (Composition) 1 

Psych. 10* (Intro, to Psych.) 1 

Fine Arts/Lang 1 

Physical Education 

4 

Spring 

Chem. 15* (Brief Organic 1 

Chemistry) 

Eng. Elective 1 

Psych. 17* (Developmental 1 

Psych.) 

Fine Arts/Lang 1 

Physical Education 

4 



SOPHOMORE YEAR 

Fall 

Bio. 13 (Human Anatomy and . 

Physiology) 
Math 13 (Intro, to Statistics) . . . 
Nur. 20 (Concepts of Nutrition . 

in Family Health) 
Phil. 19 (Ethical Issues in 

Biology and Medicine) 



Spring 

Bio. 14 (Human Anatomy and 

Physiology) 
C. Sci. 15 (Intro, to Computer 

Sci.) 
Bio. 26 (Microbiology for ... . 

Health Sciences) 
Nur. 21 (Foundations of 

Professional Practice) 



JUNIOR YEAR 

Fall 

Nur. 30 (Nursing Care of the . . . 

Developing Family I) 
Nur. 32 (Nursing Care of the . . . 

Adult I) 
Nur. 34 (Basic Concepts of ... . 

Pharmacology and 

Therapeutics) 



Spring 

Nur. 31 (Nursing Care of the. . 

Developing Family II) 
Nur. 33 (Nursing Care of the. . 

Adult II) 
Nur. 35 (Research in Nursing) . 



May Term 

Nur. 36 (The Nurse in the 
Social System) 



1 

I 

.75 

1 

3.75 

1 
I 
I 
1.25 

4.25 

1.5 
1.5 
1 



1.5 
1.5 

1 

4 



SENIOR YEAR 

Fall 

Nur. 40 (Nursing Care of the. . . 
Emotionally Troubled 
Individual and Family) 



1.5 



47 



Rel. 20 (Death & Dying) 1 

Guided Elective** 1 

Nur. 43 (Topics in Nursing or . . . .5 

Nur. 80-89 Independent 

Study in Nursing) 



Spring 

Nur. 41 (Comprehensive 1.5 

Nursing Care) 

Nur. 42 (Professional Issues) 5 

Elective 1 



*Prerequisite to sophomore year. 
**Student must select one course from 
sociology/anthropology which may be 
taken at any point in the program. 
Recommended courses at this time are 
Sociology 10, 20, 28, 14 and 29. 

Requirement for Graduation: 32 Units 
(128 Credits) 

The student may take additional units 
for electives, independent study, hon- 
ors, the Scholar Program and/or a mi- 
nor in another discipline. 

20 CONCEPTS OF NUTRITION IN 
FAMILY HEALTH 

Essentials of normal nutrition and their re- 
lationship to the health of individuals and 
families. These concepts serve as a basis for 
the development of an understanding of 
therapeutic application of dietary principles 
and the health professional's role and re- 
sponsibility in this facet of client care. Three 
hours of lecture, '/i unit. Prerequisites: 
Chemistry 8, IS, or consent of instructor. 
Open to non-nursing majors. 

21 FOUNDAflONS OF PROFESSIONAL 
NURSING PRACTICE 

Introduction of major theoretical elements 
underlying professional nursing practice. 
Focus on the concept of health and com- 
mon health problems recognizing the multi- 
directional influence of the individual, fam- 
ily, and environment. In this first clinical 
course the student will utilize the nursing 
process in assisting clients to attain a maxi- 
mum level of functioning. Three hours of 
lecture and five hours clinical laboratory. 
V/4 units. Prerequisites: Chemistry 8, 15, 
Nursing 20, and Biology 13. 

30-31 NURSING CARE OF THE 
DEVELOPING FAMILY 
Examination of health and nursing needs of 



beginning and developing families. Empha- 
sis on nursing needs of mothers and infants 
within the family unit as well as the com- 
mon health problems of children through 
adolescence. Three hours of lecture and TA 
hours clinical laboratory. I 'A units. Prereq- 
uisite for Nursing 30: Nursing 21. Biology 14 
and 26. Prerequisite for Nursing 31: Nursing 
30 and 34. 

32-33 NURSING CARE OF THE ADULT 

Identification of adult health care needs 
and implementation of nursing activities 
based on an understanding of growth and 
development, pathophysiology, com- 
munication skills, interpersonal dynamics, 
and psychosocial interventions. Three 
hours of lecture and 7'A hours clinical labo- 
ratory. I'A units. Prerequisite for Nursing 
32: Nursing 21, Biology 14 and 26. Prereq- 
uisite for Nursing 33: Nursing 32 and 34. 

34 BASIC CONCEPTS OF 
PHARMACOLOGY AND 
THERAPEUTICS 

Fundamentals of pharmacology and thera- 
peutics are presented for the various classes 
of drugs. Relationship of pharmacological 
mechanisms to the affected biochemical 
and physiological processes. Interactions 
and toxicologic aspects of drug therapy are 
reviewed. Four hours of lecture. 1 unit. Co- 
requisite: Nursing 30, 32, or consent of in- 
structor Open to non-nursing majors. 

35 RESEARCH IN NURSING 
Expansion of theoretical basis of research 
methodology with emphasis on analyzing, 
criticizing, and interpreting nursing re- 
search. Development of a research proposal 
focusing on a nursing problem. Four hours 
of lecture. I unit. Prerequisites: Mathemat- 
ics 13, Computer Science 15, and Nursing 30 
and 32 or consent of instructor Open to 
non-majors. 

36 THE NURSE IN THE SOCIAL SYSTEM 

Seminar discussions and clinical laboratory 
using the hospital as a prototype. Theories 
of social systems. E.\aniination of induction 
into the hospital system. Evaluation of 
standards of care. Focus on utilization of 
change theory Twelve hours of lecture and 
96 hours clinical laboratory. 1 unit. Prereq- 
uisites: Nursing 31, 33, 34 and 35. Required 
for the nursing major and offered only in 
May term. 

40 NURSING CARE OF THE 
EMOTIONALLY TROUBLED 
INDIVIDUAL AND FAMILY 
Examination of disturbed human relation- 
ships with focus on intrapsychic, interper- 
sonal, and physiologic etiology. Emphasis 
on advanced therapeutic nurse-patient rela- 



tionships within context of family, commu- 
nity, and health care systems. Three hours 
of lecture and TA hours clinical laboratory. 
I'A units. Prerequisites: Nursing 31, 33, 36. 

41 COMPREHENSIVE NURSING CARE 

Culminating nursing course with focus on 
utilizing nursing theory in a choice of clini- 
cal settings. Seminars will provide oppor- 
tunities for students to share commonalities 
and unique aspects of professional practice. 
Three hours of lecture and TA hours clini- 
cal laboratory. I'A units. Prerequisites: 
Nursing 36, 40. 

42 PROFESSIONAL ISSUES 

An analysis of nursing issues in the context 
of the historical background of the profes- 
I sion, the social forces which influence nurs- 

ing, and nursing's impact upon society. Two- 
hour seminar. 'A unit. Prerequisite: Senior 
standing. 

43 TOPICS IN NURSING 

Selected topic courses in nursing designed 
to permit students to pursue subjects which, 
because of their specialized nature, may not 
be offered on a regular basis. 'A unit. Pre- 
requisite: Senior standing. 



80-89 



INDEPENDENT STUDY IN 
NURSING 



An opportunity to develop and implement 
an individual plan of study under faculty 
guidance. 'A unit. Prerequisite: Senior 
standing or consent of chairman. 



PHILOSOPHY 

Associate Professors: Griffith 

(Chairperson), Whelan 
Assistant Professor: Herring 

The study of philosophy develops a 
critical understanding of the basic con- 
cepts and presuppositions around 
which we organize our thought in sci- 
ence, religion, education, morality, the 
arts, and other human enterprises. A 
major in philosophy, together with ap- 
propriate other courses, can provide 
an excellent preparation for policy- 
making positions of many kinds, for 
graduate study in several fields, and 
for careers in education, law, and the 
ministry. The major in philosophy 
consists of eight courses numbered 10 
or above, including 38, 39, 49 and at 



48 



least three other courses numbered 25 
or above. 

A minor in Philosophy consists of 
any four philosophy courses numbered 
20 or above. Three more specialized 
minors are also available. A minor in 
Philosophy and Law consists of four 
courses from Philosophy 21, 22, 25, 
34, 35, 49 or Studies; a minor in Phi- 
losophy and Science requires comple- 
tion of four courses from Philosophy 
21, 22, 25, 33, 49 or Studies; a minor in 
the History of Philosophy may be 
completed by selecting four courses 
from Philosophy 21, 22, 38, 39, 49 or 
Studies. Any courses selected from 
Philosophy 49, 80, 81, 90 and 91 must 
be approved in advance by the depart- 
ment, and only one unit may be used 
from among 80, 81, 90 and 91 to com- 
plete the requirements of any of these 
three minors. 

5 PRACTICAL REASONING 

A general introduction to topics in logic and 
their application to practical reasoning, 
with primary emphasis on detecting falla- 
cies, evaluating inductive reasoning, and 
understanding the rudiments of scientific 
method. 

10 INTRODUCTION TO PHILOSOPHICAL 
PROBLEMS 

An introductory course designed to show 
the nature of philosophy by examination of 
several examples of problems which have 
received extended attention in philosophical 
literature. These topics often include the re- 
lation of the mind to the body, the possibili- 
ty of human freedom, arguments about the 
existence of God, the conditions of knowl- 
edge, and the relation of language to 
thought. Some attention is also given to the 
principles of acceptable reasoning. 

14 PHILOSOPHY AND PERSONAL 
CHOICE 

An introductory philosophical examination 
of a number of contemporary moral issues 
which call for personal decision. Topics oft- 
en investigated include: the "good" life, 
obligation to others, sexual ethics, abor- 
tion, suicide and death, violence and paci- 
fism, obedience to the law, the relevance of 
personal beliefs to morality. Discussion 
centers on some of the suggestions philoso- 
phers have made about how to make such 
decisions. 

15 PHILOSOPHY AND PUBLIC POLICY 
An introductory philosophical examination 



of the moral and conceptual dimension of 
various contemporary public issues, such as 
the relation of ethics to politics and the law, 
the enforcement of morals, the problems of 
fair distribution of goods and opportunities, 
the legitimacy of restricting the use of natu- 
ral resources, and the application of ethics 
to business practice. Discussion centers on 
some of the suggestions philosophers have 
made about how to deal with these issues. 

16 ETHICAL ISSUES IN BUSINESS 

An introductory philosophical examination 
of a variety of moral problems that arise 
concerning the American business system. 
Included are a systematic consideration of 
typical moral problems faced by individuals 
and an examination of common moral criti- 
cisms of the business system itself. 

17 PHILOSOPHICAL ISSUES IN 
EDUCATION 

An examination of the basic concepts in- 
volved in thought about education, and a 
consideration of the various methods for 
justifying educational proposals. Typical of 
the issues discussed are: Are education and 
indoctrination different? What is a liberal 
education? Are education and schooling 
compatible? What do we need to learn? Al- 
ternate years. 

18 PHILOSOPHICAL ISSUES IN 
CRIMINAL JUSTICE 

An introductory examination of various 
philosophical issues and concepts which are 
of special importance in legal contexts. Dis- 
cussion includes both general topics, such as 
the justification of punishment, and more 
specific topics, such as the insanity defense 
and the rights of the accused. Readings are 
arranged topically and include both classical 
and contemporary sources. 

19 ETHICAL ISSUES IN BIOLOGY AND 
MEDICINE 

A philosophical investigation of some of 
the ethical issues which arise as a result of 
contemporary medical and biological tech- 
nology. Typical of these issues are euthana- 
sia, behavior control, patient rights, experi- 
mentation on humans, fetal research, abor- 
tion, genetic engineering, population con- 
trol, and distribution of health resources. 

21-22 INTRODUCTION TO THE HISTORY 
OF PHILOSOPHY 

An introductory survey of the history of 
philosophy from the ancient Greeks through 
the early modern period. Particular atten- 
tion will be paid to the common origins of 
philosophy and science and their subse- 
quent relationship and to the role which 
philosophy has played in the evolution of 
social and political thought. Philosophy 21 
is not a prerequisite for Philosophy 22. 



25 SYMBOLIC LOGIC 

A study of modern symbolic logic and its 
application to the analysis of arguments. 
Included are truth-functional relations, the 
logic of propositional functions, and deduc- 
tive systems. Attention is also given to vari- 
ous topics in the philosophy of logic. 

31 PHILOSOPHY AND HUMAN NATURE 
An examination of a variety of classical and 
contemporary philosophical questions about 
human nature. Among the questions typi- 
cally considered are these: Is there such a 
thing as human nature? Are human beings 
different, in any fundamental way, from 
other animals? Are human beings free? Is 
human consciousness just a brain process? 
Are human beings inherently predisposed to 
evil? Are human beings biologically deter- 
mined to be selfish or aggressive? Are the 
differences in achievement between men 
and women biologically based? Prerequi- 
site: Students without previous study in phi- 
losophy must have instructor's permission. 

32 PHILOSOPHY OF RELIGION 

A philosophical examination of religion. 
Included are such topics as the nature of re- 
ligious discourse, arguments for and against 
the existence of God, and the relation be- 
tween religion and science. Readings from 
classical and contemporary sources. Prereq- 
uisite: students without previous study in 
philosophy must have instructor's permis- 
sion. Alternate years. 

33 PHILOSOPHY OF NATURAL SCIENCE 
A consideration of philosophically impor- 
tant conceptual problems arising from re- 
flection about natural science, including 
such topics as the nature of scientific laws 
and theories, the character of explanation, 
the import of prediction, the existence of 
"non-observable" theoretical entities such 
as electrons and genes, the problem of justi- 
fying induction, and various puzzles associ- 
ated with probability. Prerequisite: students 
without previous study in philosophy must 
have instructor's permission. Alternate 
years. 

34 SOCIAL AND POLITICAL 
PHILOSOPHY 

A systematic philosophical investigation of 
the relation between human nature and the 
proper social and political order. Topics 
studied include the purpose of government, 
the nature of legitimate authority, the foun- 
dation of human rights, and the limits of 
human freedom. Emphasis is placed on the 
logic of social and political thought and on 
the analysis of basic principles and concepts. 
Prerequisite: students without previous phi- 
losophy must have instructor's permission. 



49 



35 ETHICAL THEORY 

An inquir>' concerning the grounds which 
distinguish morally right from morally 
wrong actions. Central to the course is criti- 
cal consideration of the proposals and the 
rationale of relativists, egoists, utilitarians, 
and other ethical theorists. Various topics in 
metaethics are also included. Prerequisite: 
students without previous study in philoso- 
phy must have instructor's permission. 

38 ANCIENT GREEK PHILOSOPHY 

A critical examination of the ancient Greek 
philosophers, with particular emphasis on 
Plato and Aristotle. Prerequisite: two cours- 
es in philosophy or consent of instructor 
Alternate years. 

39 EARLY MODERN PHILOSOPHY 

A critical examination of the Continental 
Rationalists (Descartes, Spinoza, Leibniz), 
the British Empiricists (Locke, Berkeley, 
Hume) and Kant. Prerequisite: two courses 
in philosophy or consent of instructor Al- 
ternate years. 

49 DEPARTMENTAL SEMINAR 

An investigation, carried on by discussions 
and papers, into one philosophical problem, 
text, philosopher, or movement. A different 
topic is selected each semester. Recent topics 
include Sidgwick's ethics, religious language, 
Kierkegaard, legal punishment, Wittgen- 
stein, personal identity and human rights. 
This seminar is designed to provide junior 
and senior philosophy majors and other 
qualified students with more than the usual 
opportunity for concentrated and coopera- 
tive inquiry. Prerequisite: consent of in- 
structor This seminar may be repealed for 
credit. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

80 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 

Recent independent studies in philosophy 
include Nietzsche, moral education, Rawls' 
theory of justice, existentialism, euthanasia, 
Plato's ethics, and philosophical aesthetics. 

90 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 



PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

Associate Professor: Burch 
Assistant Professor: Whitehill 
Instructors: Hair, Holmes 

1 PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

Coeducational physical education classes. 



Basic instructions in fundamentals, knowl- 
edge, and appreciation of sports that include 
swimming, tennis, bowling, volleyball, ar- 
chery, field hockey, soccer, golf, badminton, 
modern dance, skiing, elementary games 
(for elementary teachers), toneastics, physi- 
cal fitness, and other activities. Backpack- 
ing, cross-country and alpine skiing, jog- 
ging, and cycling are offered on a contract 
basis. Beginning swimming is required for 
all non-swimmers. Students may select any 
activity offered. A reasonable degree of 
proficiency is required in the activities. Em- 
phasis is on the potential use of activities as 
recreational and leisure-time interests. Two 
semesters of physical education (two hours 
per week) are required. All physical educa- 
tion classes are open to men and women. 

Athletic Ixaining 

Lycoming College established an ap- 
prenticeship program in athletic train- 
ing in 1979 after recognizing two con- 
ditions: the importance of the care and 
prevention of athletic injuries by 
trained professionals, and the career's 
promising growth potential. 

To complete this non-credit program 
students participate in practical as well 
as classroom work under the supervi- 
sion of Lycoming's certified athletic 
trainer. Students become eligible to 
participate in the National Athletic 
Trainers Association (N.A.T.A.) Certi- 
fication examination to earn the status 
of an N.A.T.A. certified trainer. 



POLITICAL SCIENCE 

Professor: Giglio (Chairperson) 
Associate Professor: Roskin 
Assistant Professor: Grogan 

The major is designed to provide a sys- 
tematic understanding of government 
and politics at the international, na- 
tional, state, and local levels. Majors 
are encouraged to develop their facul- 
ties to make independent, objective 
analyses which can be applied to the 
broad spectrum of the social sciences. 
Although the political science major 
is not designed as a vocational major, 
students with such training may go di- 
rectly into government service, jour- 
nalism, teaching, or private adminis- 



trative agencies. A political science ma- 
jor can provide the base for the study 
of law, or for graduate studies leading 
to administrative work in federal, 
state, or local governments, interna- 
tional organizations, or college teach- 
ing. Students seeking certification to 
teach secondary school social studies 
may major in political science but 
should consult their advisers and the 
education department. 

A major consists of eight political 
science courses, including Political Sci- 
ence 16B. Prospective majors are en- 
couraged to register for this course 
during their freshman year. An exemp- 
tion will be granted only if it strength- 
ens the student's program. In addition, 
students must take at least one course 
in each of five areas (A to E). Stu- 
dents are encouraged, also, to select a 
minor in another department in accor- 
dance with their academic and career 
interests and in consultation with their 
departmental advisor. 

For non-majors, the department of- 
fers three minors: a minor in Political 
Science consists of any four courses 
numbered 20 or above from areas A to 
E; a minor in Foreign Affairs consists 
of four courses selected from Political 
Science 20, 25, 26, 27, 38 and 39; and a 
minor in Legal Studies consists of Po- 
litical Science 31, 35, 36 and one other 
course numbered 20 or above. Stu- 
dents are encouraged to consult with 
department members on the selection 
of a minor. 

16 INTRODUCTION TO POLITICS AND 
PUBLIC POLICY 

An examination of public policy within the 
context of American politics. Includes iden- 
tification and analysis of contemporary pol- 
icy issues, alternative solutions, factors in 
formulation, and evaluation of impact. 
May be taken for cither one-half unit (sec- 
tion 16A) or full unit (section I6B); declared 
majors and prospective majors should take 
the full-unit course, I6B. 

A. American Politics 

10 GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS IN 
THE UNITED STATES 
An introduction to American national gov- 
ernment which emphasizes both structural- 
functional analysis and policy-making pro- 



50 



cesses. In addition to the legislative, execu- 
tive, and judicial branches of government, 
attention will be given to political parties 
and interest groups, elections and voting 
behavior, and constitutional rights. Recom- 
mended to all social science-education ma- 
jors and to those students who have had in- 
adequate or insufficient preparation in 
American government. 

11 STATE AND LOCAL GOVERNMENT 
An examination of the general principles, 
major problems, and political processes of 
the states and their subdivisions, together 
with their role in a federal type of govern- 
ment. 

23 AMERICAN PRESIDENCY 

A study of the office and powers of the 
president with analysis of his major roles as 
chief administrator, legislator, political lead- 
er, foreign policy maker, and commander- 
in-chief. Special attention is given to those 
presidents who led the nation boldly. Sub- 
ject lo student demand, but offered at least 
once during a four-year cycle. 

B. Legal Studies 

31 CIVIL RIGHTS AND LIBERTIES 

What are our rights and liberties as Ameri- 
cans? What should they be? A frank discus- 
sion of the nature and scope of the constitu- 
tional guarantees. First Amendment rights, 
the rights of criminal suspects and defen- 
dants, racial and sexual equality, and equal 
protection of the laws. Students will read 
and brief the more important Supreme 
Court decisions. Prerequisite: junior or sen- 
ior standing or consent of instructor. 

35 LAW AND SOCIETY 

An examination of the nature, sources, 
functions, and limits of law as an instru- 
ment of political and social control. Includ- 
ed for discussion are legal problems pertain- 
ing to the family, crime, deviant behavior, 
poverty, and minority groups. Prerequisite: 
junior or senior standing or consent of in- 
structor 

36 MASS MEDL\ LAW AND REGULATION 
An examination of the legal structure and 
the system by which mass communication is 
controlled in this society. The forces which 
shape, influence, and make policy will be 
considered. Cross-listed as Mass Communi- 
cation 31. Prerequisite: junior or senior 
standing or consent of instructor. 

C. Applied Politics 

33 BUREAUCRACY AND PUBLIC 
ADMINISTRATION 
What is bureaucracy? Why and how do bu- 



reaucracies arise? What has been the politi- 
cal impact of growth of bureaucracy in gov- 
ernment? These questions, among others, 
will be considered in this examination of 
public bureaucracies. This course is highly 
recommended to students planning lo lake 
an internship in city or county government 
through the political science department. 
Subject to student demand, but offered at 
least once during a four-year cycle. 

34 POLITICAL NEWSWRITING 

A workshop course in the reporting and re- 
writing of public affairs at the local, nation- 
al, and international levels. There will be 
neither texts nor examinations, but short 
written assignments will be due every class 
meeting. Prerequisite: English 18 or Mass 
Comm 19 or consent of instructor. Alter- 
nate years. 

48 PUBLIC OPINION AND POLLING 

A course dealing with the general topic and 
methodology of polling. Content includes 
exploration of the processes by which peo- 
ple's political opinions are formed, the ma- 
nipulation of public opinion through the 
uses of propaganda, and the American re- 
sponse to politics and political issues. 

D. Comparative Politics 

20 EUROPEAN POLITICS 

A study of the political systems of East and 
West Europe with emphasis on comparison 
and patterns of government. The course 
will review politics in Northern (Britain, 
West Germany, Sweden), Latin (France, Ita- 
ly, Spain), and Eastern (Soviet Union, East 
Germany, Yugoslavia) Europe and attempt 
to find underlying similarities and differ- 
ences. 

26 POLITICAL CULTURES 

An exploration of the "people" aspects of 
political life in several countries. The way 
people interact with each other and with 
government, what they expect from the sys- 
tem, how they acquire their political atti- 
tudes and styles, and how these contribute 
to the type of government. Alternate years. 

38 POLITICS OF DEVELOPING AREAS 

The causes and possible cures for socio-po- 
litical backwardness in Asia, Africa, and 
Latin America. Alternate years. 

E. International Relations 

25 WORLD POLITICS 

Why is there war? An introduction to inter- 
national relations with emphasis on the va- 
rieties of conflicts which may grow into war. 

27 CRISIS AREAS IN WORLD POLITICS 



The study of several current areas of inter- 
national tension and conflict, including re- 
lations among the United States, Soviet Un- 
ion, and China, plus the Middle East and 
whatever new danger spots arise over time. 
Alternate years. 

39 AMERICAN FOREIGN POLICY 

The U.S. role in the world in geographic, 
strategic, historical, and ideological per- 
spectives, plus an examination of the do- 
mestic forces shaping U.S. policy. Alternate 
years. 



F. Special Programs 

70-79 INTERNSHIPS (See Index) 

Students may receive academic credit for 
serving as interns in structured learning situ- 
ations with a wide variety of public and pri- 
vate agencies and organizations. Students 
have served as interns with the Public De- 
fender's office, the Lycoming County Court 
Administrator, and the Williamsport city 
government. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Current studies relate to elections — local, 
state, and federal — while past studies have 
included Soviet and world politics. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 



PSYCHOLOGY 

Professor: Hancock 
Associate Professor: Berthold 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant Professors: Newburg, Ryan 

The major provides training in both 
theoretical and applied psychology. It 
is designed to meet the needs of stu- 
dents seeking careers in psychology or 
other natural or social sciences. It also 
meets the needs of students seeking a 
better understanding of human behav- 
ior as a means of furthering individual 
and career goals in other areas. Certain 
courses are particularly appropriate 
for majors in other areas. Psychology 
majors and others are urged to discuss 
course selections in psychology with 
members of the department to help in- 
sure appropriate course selection. 



51 



A major consists of Psychology 10, 
31, 32, 36, and four other psychology 
courses. Statistics also is required. 

A minor in Psychology consists of 
Psychology 10 and four other psychol- 
ogy courses (three of which must be 
numbered 20 or above) which must be 
approved by the department. 

10 INTRODUCTORY PSYCHOLOGY 

An introduction to the empirical study of 
human and other animal behavior. Areas 
considered may include: learning, personal- 
ity, social, physiological, sensory, cognition, 
and developmental. 

12 GROUP PROCESSES AND 

INTERPERSONAL COMMUNICATION 

The introduction to the research and theory 
from social psychology related to small- 
group dynamics and interpersonal commu- 
nication. Topics covered will include com- 
munication processes, interpretation of mo- 
tivation, conceptualization of individual 
personalities, problem solving and leader- 
ship. The first stage of the course will focus 
on research and theory; the second half will 
emphasize the development of skills and 
techniques where students become members 
of a self-analytic — practicing the skills and 
making a case study of the processes in- 
volved. May term only. 

15 INDUSTRIAL AND 
ORGANIZATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 

The application of the principles and meth- 
ods of psychology to selected industrial and 
organizational situations. Prerequisite: Psy- 
chology 10 or consent of instructor 

16 ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY 

An introduction to the patterns of deviant 
behavior with emphasis on cause, function, 
and treatment. The various models for the 
conceptualization of abnormal behavior are 
critically examined. Prerequisite: Psycholo- 
gy 10. 

17 DEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY 

A study of the basic principles of early hu- 
man growth and development. Prerequisite: 
Psychology 10. 

18 ADOLESCENT PSYCHOLOGY 

The study areas will include theories of ado- 
lescence; current issues raised by as well as 
about the "generation of youth"; research 
findings bearing on theories and issues of 
growth beyond childhood, and self-explora- 
tion. Prerequisite: Psychology 10. 

24 SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY 

An examination of behavior in social con- 



texts, including motivation, perception, 
group processes and leadership, attitudes, 
and methods of research. Prerequisite: Psy- 
chology 10. 

31 LEARNING EXPERIMENTAL 
PSYCHOLOGY 

Learning processes. The examination of the 
basic methods and principles of animal and 
human learning. Prerequisites: Psychology 
10 and statistics. 

32 SENSORY EXPERIMENTAL 
PSYCHOLOGY 

The examination of psychophysical method- 
ology and basic neurophysiological meth- 
ods as they are applied to the understanding 
of sensory processes. Prerequisites: fty- 
chology 10 and statistics. 

33 PHYSIOLOGICAL PSYCHOLOGY 

An introduction to the physiological psy- 
chologist's method of approach to the un- 
derstanding of behavior as well as the set of 
principles that relate the function and or- 
ganization of the nervous system to the phe- 
nomena of behavior. The course emphasis is 
on the relationship between brain function 
and the physiological bases of learning, per- 
ception, and motivation. Laboratory expe- 
rience includes both behavioral testing and 
basic small-animal neurosurgical technique 
as well as histological methodology. Prereq- 
uisite: Psychology 10 or consent of instruc- 
tor. 

34 PRINCIPLES OF MEASUREMENT 
Psychometric methods and theory, includ- 
ing scale transformation, norms, standardi- 
zation, validation procedures, and estima- 
tion of reliability. Prerequisites: Psychology 
10 and statistics. 

35 HISTORY AND SYSTEMS OF 
PSYCHOLOGY 

The growth of scientific psychology and the 
theories and systems that have accompanied 
its development. Prerequisite: four courses 
in psychology. 

36 PERSONALITY THEORY 

Theories of personality. A comparison of 
different theoretical views on the develop)- 
ment and functioning of personality. Ex- 
amined in detail are three general viewpoints 
of personality: psychoanalytic, stimulus-re- 
sponse (behavioristic), and phenomcnologi- 
cal. Prerequisite: Psychology 10. 

37 COGNITION 

An investigation of human mental processes 
along the two major dimensions of directed 
and undirected thought. Topic areas include 
recognition, attention, conceptualization, 
problem-solving, fantasy, language, dream- 



ing, and creativity. Prerequisite: Psychology 
10. 

38 EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 

An introduction to the empirical study of 
the teaching-learning process. Areas consid- 
ered may include educational objectives, 
pupil and teacher characteristics, concept 
learning, problem solving and creativity, at- 
titudes and values, motivation, retention 
and transfer, evaluation and measurement. 
Prerequisite: Psychology 10 or consent of 
instructor 

39 BEHAVIOR MODIFICATION 

A detailed examination of the applied anal- 
ysis of behavior. Focus will be on the appli- 
cation of experimental method to the indi- 
vidual clinical case. The course will cover 
targeting, behavior, base-rating, interven- 
tion strategies, and outcome evaluation. 
Learning-based modification techniques 
such as contingency management, counter- 
conditioning, e.xtinction, discrimination 
training, aversive conditioning, and nega- 
tive practice will be examined. Prerequisite: 
Psychology 10 or consent of instructor 

41 PSYCHOLOGY OF WOMEN 

A review of contemporary theory and re- 
search on the psychology of women. Topics 
of discussion include the conflicts of women 
in today's society, psychological sex differ- 
ences, achievement motivation, the behav- 
ioral effect of hormones, and women in 
therapy. Prerequisite: Psychology 10. 

48-49 PRACTICUM IN PSYCHOLOGY 

An off-campus involvement in the applica- 
tion of psychological skills and principles in 
institutional settings. The experience in- 
cludes training in behavior modification 
and traditional counseling techniques as ap- 
plied in prisons, mental health centers, and 
schools for the mentally retarded. Class- 
room training focuses on various therapeu- 
tic techniques and on students' understand- 
ing of themselves in the counselor role. Pre- 
requisite: consent of instructor 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Internships give students an opportunity to 
relate on-campus academic experiences to 
society in general and to their post-bacca- 
laureate objectives in particular. Students 
have, for example, worked in prisons, pub- 
lic and private schools, county government, 
and for the American Red Cross. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 

Independent study is an opportunity for 
students to pursue special interests in areas 
for which courses are not offered. In addi- 
tion, students have an opportunity to study 
a topic in more depth than is possible in the 



52 



regular classroom situation. Studies in the 
past have included child abuse, counseling 
of hospital patients, and research in the psy- 
chology of natural disasters. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 
Honors in psychology requires original con- 
tributions to the literature of psychology 
through independent study. The most recent 
honors project was a study of the relation- 
ship between socio-economic status and 
visual versus auditory learning. 



RELIGION 

Professor: Guerra 
Associate Professor: Hughes 
Assistant Professor: Robinson 
(Chairperson) 

A major consists of 10 courses, includ- 
ing Religion 13, 14, and 20. At least 
seven courses must be taken in the de- 
partment. The following courses may 
be counted toward fulfilling the major 
requirements: Greek 11 and 12, Hebrew 
11 and 12, History 39 and 41, Philoso- 
phy 32, and Sociology 33. 

A minor in Religion consists of one 
course from Religion 10, 13, 14 and 
four religion courses numbered 20 or 
above. 

10 INTRODUCTION TO RELIGION 

Designed for the beginning student, this 
course examines what it means to be relig- 
ious. Some of the issues are the defmition 
of religion, the meaning of symbolism, con- 
cepts of God, ecstatic phenomena. Specific 
attention will be devoted to the current 
problem of cults and religious liberty. 

13 OLD TESTAMENT FAITH AND 
HISTORY 

A critical examination of the literature 
within its historical setting and in the light 
of archaeological findings to show the faith 
and religious hfe of the Hebrew- Jewish 
community in the Biblical period, and an 
introduction to the history of interpretation 
with an emphasis on contemporary Old Tes- 
tament criticism and theology. 

14 NEW TESTAMENT FAITH AND 
HISTORY 

A critical examination of the literature 
within its historical setting to show the faith 
and religious life of the Christian communi- 



ty in the Biblical period, and an introduc- 
tion to the history of interpretation with an 
emphasis on contemporary New Testament 
criticism and theology. 

17 INTRODUCTION TO SUPERNATURAL 
PHENOMENA 

An examination of claims for supernatural 
or paranormal phenomena with an empha- 
sis on critical methodology and the evalua- 
tion of evidence. The course is designed to 
teach students the difference between the 
scientific and religious methodologies, the 
proper role of each, and the hazards of mix- 
ing the two. Subjects covered include ESP, 
Spiritualism, the Bermuda Triangle, witch- 
craft, faith healing, Noah's Ark, ghosts, 
monsters, and others. Offered May and 
summer terms only. 

20 DEATH AND DYING 

A study of death from personal, social, and 
universal standpoints with emphasis upon 
what the dying may teach the living. Princi- 
pal issues are the stages of dying, bereave- 
ment, suicide, funeral conduct, and the re- 
ligious doctrines of death and immortality. 
Course includes, as optional, practical pro- 
jects with terminal patients under profes- 
sional supervision. Only one course from 
the combination 20-21 may be used for dis- 
tribution. 

21 AFTER DEATH AND DYING 

An examination of the question of life after 
death in terms of contemporary clinical 
studies, the New Testament resurrection 
narratives, the Asian doctrine of reincarna- 
tion, and the classical theological beliefs of 
providence and predestination. Religion 20 
is recommended but not required. Only one 
course from the combination 20-21 may be 
used for distribution. 

12 PROTESTANTISM IN THE MODERN 
WORLD 

An examination of Protestant thought and 
life from Luther to the present against the 
backdrop of a culture rapidly changing 
from the 17th century scientific revolution 
to Marxism, Darwinism, and depth psy- 
chology. Special attention will be paid to the 
constant interaction between Protestantism 
and the world in which it finds itself. 

23 CHRISTIAN ORIGINS 

A study of the historical, cultural, and relig- 
ious background-of the formation of Chris- 
tianity and the antecedents of Christian be- 
lief and practice in post-exilic Judaism and 
in Hellenism. 

24 JUDAISM AND ISLAM 

An examination of the rise, growth, and ex- 
pansion of Judaism and Islam with special 



attention given to the theological contents 
of the literatures of these religions as far as 
they are normative in matters of faith, prac- 
tice, and organization. Also, a review of 
their contributions to the spiritual heritage 
of mankind. 

25 ORIENTAL RELIGION 

A phenomenological study of the basic con- 
tent of Hinduism, Buddhism, and Chinese 
Taoism with special attention to social and 
political relations, mythical and aesthetic 
forms, and the East-West dialogue. 

26 BIBLICAL ARCHAEOLOGY 

A study of the role of archaeology in recon- 
structing the world in which the Biblical lit- 
erature originated with special attention giv- 
en to archaeological results that throw light 
on the clarification of the Biblical text. Al- 
so, an introduction to basic archaeological 
method and a study in depth of several rep- 
resentative excavations along with the arti- 
facts and material culture recovered from 
different historical periods. 

28 HISTORY AND CULTURE OF THE 
ANCIENT NEAR EAST 
A study of the history and culture of Meso- 
potamia, Anatolia, Syria-Palestine, and 
Egypt from the rise of the Sumerian culture 
to Alexander the Great. Careful attention 
will be given to the religious views prevalent 
in the ancient Near East as far as these views 
interacted with the culture and faith of Bib- 
lical man. 

30 PSYCHOLOGY OF RELIGION 

A study into the broad insights of psycholo- 
gy in relation to the phenomena of religion 
and religious behavior. The course concen- 
trates on religious experience or manifesta- 
tions rather than concepts. Tentative solu- 
tions will be sought to questions such as: 
What does it feel like to be religious or to 
have a religious experience? What is the re- 
ligious function in human development? 
How does one think psychologically about 
theological problems? 

31 CHRISTIAN SOCIAL ETHICS 

A study of Christian ethics as a normative 
perspective for contemporary moral prob- 
lems with emphasis upon the interaction of 
law and religion, decision making in the field 
of biomedical practice, and the reconstruc- 
tion of society in a planetary civilization. 

32 CONTEMPORARY PROBLEMS IN 
CHRISTIAN SOCIAL ETHICS 

An examination of the approach of religion 
and other disciplines to an issue of current 
concern; current topics include the theologi- 
cal significance of law, the ethics of love, 
and the Holocaust. The course may be re- 



53 



peated for credit if the topic is different 
from one previously studied. 

37 BIBLICAL TOPICS 

An in-depth study of Biblical topics related 
to the Old and New Testaments. Topics in- 
clude prophecy, wisdom literature, the Dead 
Sea Scrolls, the teachings of Jesus, Pauline 
theology, Judaism and Christian origins, re- 
action criticism — the way the Synoptic 
Gospels and John give final form to their 
message. Course will vary from year to year 
and may be taken for credit a second time if 
the topic is different from one previously 
studied. 

41 CONTEMPORARY RELIGIOUS ISSUES 
A study of the theological significance of 
some contemporary intellectual develop- 
ments in Western culture. The content of 
this course will vary from year to year. Sub- 
jects studied in recent years include the the- 
ological significance of Freud, Marx, and 
Nietzsche; Christianity and existentialism; 
theology and depth psychology; the relig- 
ious dimension of contemporary literature. 

42 THE NATURE AND MISSION OF THE 
CHURCH 

A study of the nature of the Church as 
"The People of God" with reference to the 
Biblical, Protestant, Orthodox, and Roman 
Catholic traditions. 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Interns in religion usually work in local 
churches under the supervision of the pastor 
and a member of the faculty. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Current study areas are in the Biblical lan- 
guages, New Testament theology, compara- 
tive religions, and the ethics of technology. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 
A recent project was on the theology of 
hope with reference to the thought of Ernst 
Bloch and Alfred North Whitehead. 



SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY 

Professor: McCrary 
Associate Professors: Jo 

(Chairperson), Wiik 
Assistant Professor: Strauser 

The Sociology/Anthropology Depart- 
ment offers two tracks in the major. 



Both tracks introduce the students to 
the fundamental concepts of the disci- 
pline, and both tracks prepare the stu- 
dent for graduate school. 

Track I emphasizes the theoretical 
aspects of sociology and anthropology. 
Track II emphasizes the application of 
sociology and anthropology to human 
services. 

Track I — Sociology- Anthropology 
requires the core course sequence 10, 
14, 29, 44, and 47 and three other 
courses within the department with the 
exception of 15, 22, 23, 25, 40, and 43. 
Religion 26 may also be counted to- 
ward the major. 

Track II — Human Services in a So- 
cio-Cultural Perspective requires: So- 
ciology-Anthropology 10, 22, 29, 43, 
44, and 47. In addition, students must 
select two courses from among the fol- 
lowing: Sociology-Anthropology 20, 
21, 27, 28, 30, 34, and 35. Students are 
also required to choose two units from 
the following courses: Psychology 10, 
Psychology 24, Economics 24, and Po- 
litical Science 33. Recommended cours- 
es: Accounting 10, Accounting 26, 
Spanish 10, Spanish 11, History 13, Po- 
litical Science 32, and Philosophy 34. 

Majors in both tracks are encour- 
aged to participate in the internship 
program. 

A minor in Sociological and Anthro- 
pological Views of Religion for those 
interested in theology or a ministerial 
career consists of four sociology-an- 
thropology courses from among 26, 
32, 33, 36, and 46. 



10 INTRODUCTION TO SOCIOLOGY 

An introduction to the problems, concepts, 
and methods in sociology today, including 
analysis of stratification, organization of 
groups and institutions, social movements, 
and deviants in social structure. 

14 INTRODUCTION TO ANTHROPOLOGY 

An introduction to the subfields of anthro- 
pology; its subject matter, methodology, 
and goals. Examination of biological and 
cultural evolution, the fossil evidence for 
human evolution, and questions raised in 
relation to human evolution. Other topics 
include race, human nature, primate behav- 
ior, and prehistoric cultural development. 



15 INTRODUCTION TO AMERICAN 
CRIMINAL JUSTICE SYSTEM 
An introduction to the role of law enforce- 
ment, courts, and corrections in the admin- 
istration of justice; the historical develop- 
ment of police, courts, and corrections; ju- 
risdiction and procedures of courts; an in- 
troduction to the studies, literature, and re- 
search in criminal justice; careers in crimi- 
nal justice. 

20 MARRIAGE AND THE FAMILY 

The history, structure, and functions of 
modern American family life, emphasizing 
dating, courtship, factors in marital adjust- 
ment, and the changing status of family 
members. Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthro- 
pology 10 or consent of instructor 

21 JUVENILE DELINQUENCY 

A multidisciplinary approach to the study 
of the constellation of factors that relate to 
juvenile delinquency causation, handling 
the juvenile delinquent in the criminal 
justice system, treatment strategies, preven- 
tion, and community responsibility. Prereq- 
uisite: Sociology-Anthropology 10 or con- 
sent of instructor 

22 INTRODUCTION TO HUMAN 
SERVICES 

The course is designed for students interest- 
ed in learning about, or entering, the himian 
services profession. It will review the histo- 
ry, the range, and the goals of human ser- 
vices together with a survey of various strat- 
egies and approaches to human problems. 
It will include practical discussions of social 
behavioral differences as they relate to stress 
and confiict in people's lives. Prerequisite: 
Sociology-Anthropology 10 and/or Psychol- 
ogy 10 or consent of instructor 

23 INTRODUCTION TO LAW 
ENFORCEMENT 

Principles, theories, and doctrines of the 
law of crimes, elements in crime, analysis of 
criminal investigation, important case law. 
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 15 or 
consent of instructor 

2A RURAL AND URBAN COMMUNITIES 
The concept of community is treated as it 
operates and affects individual and group 
behavior in rural, suburban, and urban set- 
tings. Emphasis is placed upon characteris- 
tic institutions and problems of modern city 
life. Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 
10 or consent of instructor 

25 INTRODUCTION TO CRIMINAL 
INVESTIGATION 

This course is designed for advanced crimi- 
nal justice majors. Emphasis is placed on an 
in-depth study of detection and investiga- 



M 



tion of major crimes. Particular attention is 
placed on the use of criminalistics, legal pa- 
rameters of evidence and interrogation, and 
prosecutory procedures. Prerequisite: Soci- 
ology-Anthropology 23 or consent of in- 
structor. Will not be counted toward the so- 
ciology/anthropology major 

26 SOCIAL MOVEMENTS 

An analysis of the dynamics, structure, and 
reactions to social movements with focus on 
contemporary social movements. Prerequi- 
site: Sociology-Anthropology 10 or consent 
of instructor 

27 SOCIAL PROBLEMS 

The course examines the causes, character- 
istics, and consequences of social problems 
in America from diverse socio-cultural per- 
spectives. Topics discussed typically include 
crime, urban crises, family disorganization, 
poverty, race problems, drug abuse, and 
other related issues. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 10 or consent of instructor 

28 AGING AND SOCIETY 

Analysis of cross-cultural characteristics of 
the aged as individuals and as members of 
groups. Emphasis is placed upon variables: 
health, housing, socio-economic status, per- 
sonal adjustment, retirement, and social 
participation. Sociological, social psycho- 
logical, and anthropological frames of ref- 
erence utilized in analysis and description of 
aging and its relationship to society, culture, 
and personality. 

29 CULTURAL ANTHROPOLOGY 

An examination of cultural and social an- 
thropology designed to familiarize the stu- 
dent with the analytical approaches to the 
diverse cultures of the world. The relevancy 
of cultural anthropology for an understand- 
ing of the human condition will be stressed. 
Topics to be covered include the nature of 
primitive societies in contrast to civiliza- 
tions, the concept of culture and cultural re- 
lativism, the individual and culture, the so- 
cial patterning of behavior and social con- 
trol, an anthropological perspective on the 
culture of the United States. 

30 CRIMINOLOGY 

Analysis of the sociology of law; conditions 
under which criminal laws develop; etiology 
of crime; epidemiology of crime, including 
explanation of statistical distribution of 
criminal behavior in terms of time, space, 
and social location. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 10 or consent of instructor. 

31 SOCIOLOGY OF WOMEN 

A sociological examination of the role of 
women in American society through an 
analysis of the social institutions which af- 



fect their development. Role-analysis theory 
will be applied to the past, present, and fu- 
ture experience of women as it relates to the 
role options of society as a whole. Students 
will do an original research project on the 
role of women. Prerequisite: Sociology-An- 
thropology 10. Alternate years. 

32 INSTITUTIONS 

Introduces the student to the sociological 
concept of social institution, the types of 
social institutions to be found in all socie- 
ties, and the interrelationships between the 
social institutions within a society. The 
course is divided into two basic parts: 1. 
That aspect which deals with the systematic 
organization of society in general, and 2. 
The concentration on a particular social in- 
stitution: economic, political, educational, 
or social welfare. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 10 or consent of instructor. 

33 SOCIOLOGY OF RELIGION 

An examination of the major theories of the 
relationship of religion to society and a sur- 
vey of sociological studies of religious be- 
havior. Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropol- 
ogy 10 or consent of instructor 

34 RACIAL AND CULTURAL 
MINORITIES 

Study of racial, cultural, and national 
groups within the framework of American 
cultural values. An analysis will include his- 
torical, cultural, and social factors underly- 
ing ethnic and racial conflict. Field trips and 
individual reports are part of the require- 
ments for the course. Prerequisite: Sociolo- 
gy-Anthropology 10 or consent of instructor 

35 CULTURE AND PERSONALITY 

Introduction to psychological anthropolo- 
gy, its theories and methodologies. Empha- 
sis will be placed on the relationship between 
individual and culture, national character, 
cognition and culture, culture and mental 
disorders, and cross-cultural considerations 
of the concept of self. Prerequisite: Sociolo- 
gy-Anthropology 29 or consent of instruc- 
tor Offered at least once every three years. 

36 THE ANTHROPOLOGY OF 
PRIMITIVE RELIGIONS 

The course will familiarize the student with 
the wealth of anthropological data on the 
religions and world views developed by 
primitive peoples. The functions of primi- 
tive religion in regard to the individual, so- 
ciety, and various cultural institutions will 
be examined. Subjects to be surveyed in- 
clude myth, witchcraft, vision quests, spirit 
possession, the cultural use of dreams, and 
revitalization movements. Particular em- 
phasis will be given to shamanism, transcul- 
tural religious experience, and the creation 



of cultural realities through religions. Both 
a social scientific and existentialist perspec- 
tive will be employed. Prerequisite: Sociolo- 
gy-Anthropology 29 or consent of instruc- 
tor Alternate years. 

37 THE ANTHROPOLOGY OF 
AMERICAN INDIANS 

An ethnographic survey of native North 
American Indian and Eskimo cultures, such 
as the Iroquois, Plains Indians, Pueblos, 
KwakiutI, and Netsilik. Changes in native 
lifeways due to European contacts and Unit- 
ed States expansion will be considered. Re- 
cent cultural developments among Ameri- 
can Indians will be placed in an anthropo- 
logical perspective. Offered at least once 
every three years. 

38 LEGAL AND POLITICAL 
ANTHROPOLOGY 

The course is designed to familiarize the 
student with the techniques of conflict reso- 
lution and the utilization of public power in 
primitive society as well as the various theo- 
ries of primitive law and government. The 
rise of the state and an anthropological per- 
spective on modern law and government 
will be included. The concepts of self-regu- 
lation and social control, legitimacy, coer- 
cion, and exploitation will be the organizing 
focus. Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropolo- 
gy 29 or consent of instructor Alternate 
years. 

39 THE AMERICAN PRISON SYSTEM 
Nature and history of punishment, evolu- 
tion of the prison and prison methods with 
emphasis on prison community, prison ar- 
chitecture, institutional programs, inmate 
rights, and sentences. Review of punish- 
ment versus treatment, detention facilities, 
jails, reformatories, prison organization 
and administration, custody, and discipline. 
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 15. 

40 PROBATION AND PAROLE 

A course designed for the advanced crimi- 
nal justice major. While the course concerns 
the study of probation and parole as parts 
of the criminal justice system and their im- 
pact on the system as a whole, the primary 
emphasis is the impact on the offender. Par- 
ticular attention is given to diagnostic re- 
port writing on offenders, pre-sentence in- 
vestigation, offender classification, and pa- 
role planning. Prerequisite: Sociology-An- 
thropology 15 and 39. Alternate years. 

41 SOCIAL STRATIFICATION 

An analysis of stratification systems with 
specific reference to American society. The 
course will include an analysis of poverty, 
wealth, and power in the United States. Par- 
ticular attention will be given to factors 



55 



which generate and maintain inequality, 
along with the impacts of inequality on the 
lives of Americans. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 10 or consent of instructor 

43 HUMAN SERVICES IN HELPING 

INSTITUTIONS 

The course examines the organizational and 
conceptual context within which human ser- 
vices are delivered in contemporary society. 
Subjects to be covered include ethnographic 
study of nursing homes, prisons, therapeu- 
tic communities, mental hospitals, and other 
human service institutions. The methodolo- 
gy of fieldwork will be explored so as to 
sensitize the student to the socio-cultural di- 
mensions of helping environments and rela- 
tionships. Prerequisite: Sociology- Anthro- 
pology 10 or Sociology-Anthropology 29 or 
consent of instructor Alternate years. 

44 SOCIAL THEORY 

The history of the development of sociolog- 
ical thought from its earliest philosophical 
beginnings is treated through discussions 
and reports. Emphasis is placed upon socio- 
logical thought since the time of Comte. 
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 10 or 
consent of instructor. 

45 ANTHROPOLOGICAL THEORY 

The history of the development of anthro- 
pological thought from the 18th century to 
the present. Emphasis is placed upon an- 
thropological thought since 1850. Topics in- 
clude evolutionism, historical-particular- 
ism, cultural idealism, cultural materialism, 
functionalism, structuralism, and ethno- 
science. Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropol- 
ogy 29 or consent of instructor Offered at 
least once every three years. 

46 PEOPLE AND CULTURES OF THE 
AMERICAN SOUTHWEST 

Field experience in the analysis of tricultural 
communities of Northern New Mexico, 
Southern Colorado, and Northeastern Ari- 
zona, including the eastern Pueblos of New 
Mexico; Zuni, Navajo, and Apache reserva- 
tions; isolated Spanish-American mountain 
villages of Northern New Mexico; religious 
ashrams and communes; and cities of the 
Southwest and Juarez, Mexico. Emphasis 
upon Taos, Rio Arriba, Santa Fe, and Los 
Alamos counties of New Mexico. Prerequi- 
site: Sociology 10 or consent of instructor 
May or summer only. 

47 RESEARCH METHODS IN 
SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY 

Study of the research process in sociology- 
anthropology. Attention is given to the pro- 
cess of designing and administering re- 
search and the application of research. Dif- 
ferent methodological skills are considered, 
including Tield work, questionnaire con- 



struction, and other methods of data gath- 
ering and the analysis of data. Prerequisite: 
Sociology-Anthropology 10 and Mathemat- 
ics 13 or consent of instructor 

48-49 PRACTICUM IN SOCIOLOGY 

Introduces the student to a practical work 
experience involving community agencies in 
order to effect a synthesis of the student's 
academic course work and its practical ap- 
plications in a community agency. Specifics 
of the course to be worked out in conjunc- 
tion with department, student, and agency. 
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 10 or 
consent of instructor 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Interns in sociology-anthropology typically 
work off campus with social service agen- 
cies under the supervision of administrators. 
However, other internship experiences, such 
as with the Lycoming County Historical 
Museum, are available. Interns in criminal 
justice work off campus in criminal justice 
agencies, such as penal institutions and pro- 
bation and parole departments, under the 
supervision of administrative f>ersonneI. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
An opportunity to pursue specific interests 
and topics not usually covered in regular 
courses. Through a program of readings 
and tutorials, the student will have the op- 
portunity to pursue these interests and top- 
ics in greater depth than is usually possible 
in a regular course. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 



THEATRE 

Professor: Falk (Chairperson) 

Assistant Professor: Allen 

Assistant Technical Director: Huffman 

The major consists of eight courses: 
Theatre 10 and seven others; a concen- 
tration in acting, directing, or design is 
possible. In addition to the course re- 
quirements, majors are expected to 
participate actively in Arena Theatre 
productions. Majors are urged to in- 
clude courses in art, music, psycholo- 
gy, and English, or other areas of spe- 
cial interest. 

Three minors are available in the 
Theatre department. A minor in Thea- 
tre History and Literature consists of 



Theatre 10, 32, 33, 35, and 40. The fol- 
lowing courses are required to com- 
plete a minor in Performance: Theatre 
10, 14, 26, 34, 36, and either 32 or 33. 
To obtain a minor in Technical Thea- 
tre, a student must complete Theatre 
10, 18, 28, 38, and 42 or 43. 

The fine arts distribution require- 
ment may be satisfied by selecting any 
two of the following recommended 
courses: Theatre 10, 11, 14, 18, 32, 33 
or other courses with the consent of 
the instructor. 

10 INTRODUCTION TO THEATRE 

Designed as a comprehensive introduction 
to the aesthetics of theatre. From the specta- 
tor's point of view, the nature of theatre will 
be explored, including dramatic literature 
and the integrated functioning of acting, di- 
recting, and all production aspects. 

11 INTRODUCTION TO FILM 

A basic course in understanding the film 
medium. The class will investigate film 
technique through lectures and by viewing 
regular weekly films chosen from classic, 
contemporary, and experimental short films. 

14 INTRODUCTION TO ACTING 

An introductory study of the actor's prepa- 
ration with emphasis on developing the ac- 
tor's creative imagination through improvi- 
sations and scene study. 

18 INTRODUCTION TO PLAY 
PRODUCTION 

Stagecraft and the various other aspects of 
play production are introduced. Through 
material presented in the course and labora- 
tory work on the Arena Theatre stage, the 
student will acquire experience to produce 
theatrical scenery. 

26 INTRODUCTION TO DIRECTING 

An introductory study of the function of 
the director in preparation, rehearsal, and 
performance. Emphasis is placed on devel- 
oping the student's ability to analyze scripts, 
and on the development of the student's im- 
agination. Prerequisite: Theatre 14. 

28 INTRODUCTION TO SCENE DESIGN 
AND STAGECRAFT 

An introduction to the theatre with an em- 
phasis on stagecraft. Productions each se- 
mester serve as the laboratory to provide 
the practical experience necessary to under- 
stand the material presented in the class- 
room. Prerequisite: Theatre 18 or consent 
of instructor 



56 



31 ADVANCED TECHNIQUES OF PLAY 
PRODUCTION 

A detailed consideration of the interrelated 
problems and techniques of play analysis, 
production styles, and design. Offered sum- 
mer only. 

32 HISTORY OF THEATRE 1 

A detailed study of the development of the- 
atre from the Greeks to the Restoration. Al- 
ternate years. 

33 HISTORY OF THEATRE II 

The history of the theatre from 1660. Alter- 
nate years. 

34 INTERMEDIATE STUDIO: ACTING 

Instruction and practice in character analy- 
sis and projection with emphasis on vocal 
and body techniques. Prerequisite: Theatre 
14. 

35 THEORIES OF THE MODERN 
THEATRE 

An advanced course exploring the philo- 
sophical roots of the modern theatre from 
the birth of realism to the present and the 
influences on modern theatre practice. Se- 
lected readings from Nietzsche, Mar.x, Jung, 
Freud, Whitehead, Kierkegaard, Sartre, 
Camus, Antoine, Copeau, Stanislavski, 
Shaw, Meyerhold, Artaud, Brecht, Brook, 
Grotowski. Alternate years. 

36 INTERMEDIATE STUDIO: DIRECTING 

Emphasis is placed on the student's ability 
to function in preparation and rehearsal. 
Practical experience involves the directing 
of two one-act plays from the contemporary 
theatre. Prerequisite: Theatre 26. 

37 PLAYWRITING AND DRAMATIC 
CRITICISM 

An investigation of the techniques of play- 
writing with an emphasis on creative writ- 
ing, culminating in a written one-act play, 
plus an historical survey of dramatic criti- 
cism from Aristotle to the present with em- 
phasis upon developing the student's ability 
to write reviews and criticism of theatrical 
productions and films. Alternate years. 

38 INTERMEDIATE STUDIO: LIGHTING 
DESIGN 

The theory of stage and lighting design with 
emphasis on their practical application to 
the theatre. Prerequisite: Theatre 18 or con- 
sent of instructor. 

40 MASTERS OF WORLD DRAMA 

An intensive and detailed analysis of the 
plays and related works, including criticism 
of great authors, that have shaped world 
theatre. Authors to be selected on the basis 
of interest of students and faculty. At limes. 



more than one author will be treated in a 
term. Ibsen, Brecht, Moliere, Williams, 
Albee. Alternate years. May be accepted to- 
ward English major with consent of English 
Department. 

42 ADVANCED STUDIO: COSTUME 
DESIGN 

The theory of costuming for the stage, ele- 
ments of design, planning, production, and 
construction of costumes for the theatre. 
Students will participate in the design of a 
production. Prerequisite: Theatre 18 or con- 
sent of instructor 

43 ADVANCED STUDIO: PROPERTIES 
DESIGN 

The theory of properties design for the 
stage, including the production of specific 
properties for staging use. Elements of de- 
sign, fabrication, and the construction of 
properties employing a variety of materials 
and the application of new theatrical tech- 
nology. Prerequisite: Theatre 18 or consent 
of instructor 

AA ADVANCED STUDIO: ACTING 

Preparation of monologues and two-char- 
acter scenes, contemporary and classical. 
The student will appear in major campus 
productions. Prerequisite: Theatre 34. 



46 ADVANCED STUDIO: DIRECTING 

Emphasis will be placed on the student's 
ability to produce a major three-act play 
from the script to the stage for public per- 
formance. Prerequisite: Theatre 36. 

48 ADVANCED STUDIO: DESIGN 

Independent work in conceptual and prac- 
tical design. The student will design one full 
production as his major project. Prerequi- 
site: Theatre 28 or 38 and consent of in- 
structor 

70-79 INTERNSHIP (See Index) 

Interns in theatre work off campus in thea- 
tres such as the Guthrie Theatre, Minneapo- 
lis, and at the New Jersey Shakespeare Festi- 
val. 

80-89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See Index) 
Some recent independent studies have been 
the roles of women as characters in drama, 
scene design, and lighting design for an 
Arena production. 

90-99 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See 
Index) 

A typical study could be the writing and 

production of an original play. 




57 



Student Services 



ADMINISTRATION 

The program of student services at Ly- 
coming is administered by the Office 
of Student Services. It is designed to 
respond to a diversity of student needs. 
The eight staff members, six of whom 
live on campus, are assigned the spe- 
cific responsibilities of: 

— career counseling and placement; 

— residence life; 

— student activities, student union, 
student government, Interfrater- 
nity Council and Panhellenic Ad- 
viser, retention program; 

— religious life, health services, 
study skills program, reading im- 
provement courses. 

— orientation 

All members of the staff are availa- 
ble to counsel and advise individual 
students. 



PERSONAL COUNSELING 

All members of the staff of the Office 
of Student Services are qualified and 
available to provide non-therapeutic 
assistance to students with adjustment 
problems. A part-time clinical psy- 
chologist provides short-term therapy 
for students needing assistance. Con- 
tinuing therapy is available through 
referral to public agencies and private 
clinicians in the Williamsport commu- 
nity. Financial arrangements for these 
referral services are made directly by 
the student with the agency and/or in- 
dividual clinician involved. 



HEALTH SERVICES 

Normal medical treatment by the health 
service staff at the College is provided 
without cost to the student. During the 
fall and spring semesters, the College 
maintains an out-patient service in 
Rich Hall. It is staffed with a registered 
nurse five days a week from 8:30 a.m. 
to 4 p.m. The College physician is 
available from II a.m. to 12 noon, 
Monday through Friday. At other 



times, emergency care is available at 
the emergency rooms of Williamsport 
and Divine Providence Hospitals, lo- 
cated a short distance from the cam- 
pus. 

Medical-service charges paid by the 
student are: emergency room and 
emergency room physician's charges, 
special medications. X-rays, surgery, 
care for major accidents, immuniza- 
tions, examinations for glasses, physi- 
cian's visits other than in the health 
service, referrals for treatment by spe- 
cialists, special nursing services, and 
special services. 

Entering students must provide ba- 
sic health information to the College 
between the time of admission and the 
beginning of classes of the term to 
which they are admitted. This infor- 
mation is secured through participa- 
tion in the computerized health-infor- 
mation service provided by Medical 
Datamation, Inc. New students com- 
plete the DASH Medical Information 
Questionnaire that is mailed to stu- 
dents shortly after they have confirmed 
their admission to Lycoming. The com- 
pleted form is returned by the student 
to the admissions office together with 
a check for $13.50. Both the student 
and the College receive reports based 
on the questionnaire responses. The 
student report consists of a Medical 
Database Report, a Hazards Risk In- 
dex, and a health information bro- 
chure as requested. Information pro- 
vided by the student is confidential and 
is available only to qualified health 
service and student-services personnel. 

A student accident and health insur- 
ance program is provided through the 
College. Students who do not have 
their own coverage or are not included 
in family coverage are required to pur- 
chase this plan. Information on the 
plan is mailed to every student. 



STUDY IMPROVEMENT 
SERVICES 

Skills Seminars— The seminars con- 
sist of three one-hour sessions on 



scheduling of time, 
study methods. They 
demand for six to 10 
Reading Course — 
prove reading speed 
sion, this three-week 
at various times duri 
year for a fee of $15. 



test-taking, and 
are scheduled on 
students. 
Designed to im- 
and comprehen- 
course is offered 
ng the academic 



CAREER DEVELOPMENT 
SERVICES 

The Career Development Center pro- 
vides services which are designed to 
help students identify their abilities 
and interest, set realistic career goals, 
and plan academic programs to meet 
these goals. Counseling for Lycoming 
students begins in the freshman year. 
In addition to individual guidance, 
the center maintains a library on spe- 
cific careers, employment outlooks, 
and career trends. Services offered by 
the center include: 

— individual counseling; 

— career-planning seminars in val- 
ues clarification, skill assessment, 
and decision making; 

— 2,500-volume career library; 

— relaxation workshops and asser- 
tiveness training; 

— SHARE (Students Having A 
Real Experience), a program in 
which students observe and work 
with a professional in the field; 

— placement services to aid seniors 
in implementing their career 
plans; 

— assistance to students in securing 
internships, summer employment, 
and part-time employment; 

— speaker's program which brings 
professionals from a variety of 
careers to campus seminars; 

— video-cassette programs relating 
to job skills and career informa- 
tion; 

— microfiche copies of graduate- 
and professional-school catalogs 
for the United States and abroad. 



58 



RESIDENCE AND RESIDENCE 
HALLS 

Single students who do not live at 
home are required to live in residence 
halls and eat in the dining room. All 
new resident students are forwarded a 
room-agreement form to sign after 
confirmation of their admission to Ly- 
coming. This agreement is renewed 
each spring. Exceptions to the resi- 
dence policy may be granted to those 
students who wish to live with rela- 
tives, and students who are 23 years of 
age or older. Requests for such exemp- 
tions must be submitted to the Associ- 
ate Dean of Student Services for Resi- 
dence Life before the first day of the 
term to which the student has been ad- 
mitted. 

Resident students assume responsi- 
bility for their rooms and furnishings. 
The College reserves the right to enter 
and inspect any room for reasons of 
damage, health, or safety, and to 
search any room when there is reason 
to believe a violation of College rules 
or the law is occurring or has occurred. 
Charges are assessed for damage to 
rooms, doors, furniture, and common 
areas. Wherever possible, damage to 
dormitory property will be charged to 
the person or persons directly respon- 
sible. Damage and breakage occurring 
in a room will be the responsibility of 
students occupying the room. Hall and 
bathroom damage will be the responsi- 
bility of all students of the section 
where damage occurs. 

Residence halls are not available for 
occupancy during the vacation periods. 
Quiet hours for study purposes, which 
are established by residence hall coun- 
cils or the Office of Student Services, 
are published in the student handbook 
and posted on bulletin boards. 

Room visitation by members of the 
opposite sex is permitted in the halls 
under conditions established by the 
College in cooperation with the vari- 
ous residence hall councils, which share 
responsibility for developing and mon- 
itoring regulations, and which are or- 
ganized each fall semester before visi- 



tation schedules are established. 



STANDARDS OF CONDUCT 

Lycoming students are expected to ac- 
cept responsibilities required of adults. 
The rights of every member of the Col- 
lege community are protected by es- 
tablished regulations. Although the 
acceptance of the College's standards 
of behavior is an individual responsi- 
bility, it also calls for group responsi- 
bility. Students should influence their 
peers to conduct themselves responsi- 
bly for the collective good. 

Students who are unable to demon- 
strate that they have accepted these re- 
sponsibilities or who fail to abide by 
established policies may be dismissed 
at any time or denied readmission for 
a subsequent term or semester. Further, 
after the conclusion of any term or se- 
mester, the College may deny a student 
the privilege of attending any subse- 
quent term or semester when the ad- 
ministration deems this to be in the 
best interest of the College. 

Lycoming College does not approve 
of the use or misuse of alcoholic bever- 
ages and encourages students to ab- 
stain from their use and to abide by 
the legal restrictions on alcohol use es- 
tablished by the Commonwealth of 
Pennsylvania. Observance of the law is 
the individual responsibility of each 
student, and failure to obey the law 
may subject the student to prosecution 
by civil authorities, either on or off 
campus. 

Students also are expected to be 
aware of the College's attitude toward 
the use and misuse of alcohol and to 
acknowledge the College's right to its 
position. The College will not tolerate 
any public use of alcohol. Officials of 
the College will prescribe penalties for 
the public use or private misuse of al- 
cohol. These penalties will be applied 
in a consistent manner. 

Lycoming recognizes its responsibil- 
ity, however, for providing students 
with reliable information about the so- 
cial and medical implications of the 



use of alcohol. Lycoming makes every 
effort to create and maintain a com- 
munity in which individual choice is 
coupled with responsible behavior and 
respect for the rights of others. 

Upon enrolling, students are given a 
handbook which contains the College's 
official policies, rules, and regulations. 
These policies, rules, and regulations 
are part of the contractual agreement 
students enter into when they register 
at Lycoming. 



STUDENT ORIENTATION 

New students at Lycoming are re- 
quired to attend one of three summer 
orientation sessions with at least one 
parent before they enroll in the fall. 
The purpose of the program is to ac- 
quaint new students and their parents 
with the College more fully so that 
new students begin their Lycoming ex- 
perience under the most favorable cir- 
cumstances. Information on orienta- 
tion is mailed to new students after 
they confirm their admission. 



59 



Admission to Lycoming 



POLICY AND STANDARDS 

Lycoming College welcomes applica- 
tions from prospective students re- 
gardless of age, sex, race, religion, fi- 
nancial resources, color, national or 
ethnic origin, or handicap. Admission 
is based on the following standards: 

— Graduation from an accredited 
secondary school. 

— Completion of 16 units of college 
preparatory courses including (4) 
English, (3) Math, (2) Foreign 
Language, (2) Natural Science, 
(2) Social Science and (3) Elec- 
tive. The admissions committee, 
recognizing that high school cur- 
ricula vary, is always willing to 
consider the application of an 
able student whose preparation, 
while differing from the plan 
suggested, nevertheless gives evi- 
dence of continuity in the study 
of fundamental subjects. 

— Satisfactory College Entrance 
Examination Board Scholastic 
Aptitude Test (SAT) or American 
College Test (ACT) scores. 

Applicants with significant academic 
preparation and exceptional maturity 
may apply to Lycoming as a candidate 
for early admission. A recommenda- 
tion from a school counselor is re- 
quired, indicating the student's inten- 
tions to attend Lycoming in lieu of the 
12th grade. If admitted, the student 
enters the College after completing the 
junior year in high schooL 

Students who are not enrolled in a 
degree program and who wish to regis- 
ter for courses in any semester are 
welcome to apply. A Special Student 
Application is available for this pur- 
pose. 

Lycoming is fully approved for the 
educational program for veterans. 



APPLICATION AND SELECTION 
PROCESS 

For students considering a fall semester 
admission, applications should be filed 
by April 1. The application should be 



accompanied by a $20 application fee, 
an official secondary school transcript 
forwarded by the school guidance of- 
fice, and the results of either the Scho- 
lastic Aptitude Test (SAT) or the 
American College Test (ACT). Appli- 
cations are considered after April 1 on 
a space-available basis. 

The completed application is evalu- 
ated individually by identifying each 
applicant's academic achievement, tal- 
ents, qualities, and interests. Lycom- 
ing notifies applicants of their accep- 
tance as soon as possible after all cre- 
dentials have been received and evalu- 
ated. In some instances, additional in- 
formation may be needed to complete 
the evaluation. The review process nor- 
mally begins after January 1. 

Admitted applicants must notify the 
College of their intent to enroll by 
May 1, the national candidates' reply 
date. This notification must be accom- 
panied by a $100 (attendance) deposit 
for commuting students, or a $200 (at- 
tendance and room) deposit for resi- 
dent students. After May 1, the depos- 
its are not refundable. 



ADVANCED STANDING BY 
TRANSFER 

The College welcomes transfer stu- 
dents from other accredited colleges 
and universities according to the fol- 
lowing standards and procedures: 

— applicants should be in good 
academic standing and should 
have a cumulative grade point 
average of 2.0 in transferable 
courses at their former institu- 
tions; 

— courses that are reasonably com- 
parable to those offered at Ly- 
coming will be accepted for trans- 
fer, if the grade C or better is 
earned; 

— grades earned at previous institu- 
tions will not be included in the 
computation of the grade point 
average; 

— class standing at Lycoming will 
be based on the number of cred- 



its accepted for transfer; 

— no more than 64 credits can be 
accepted for transfer from a jun- 
ior or community college; 

— transfer students will be eligible 
to earn appointments to the 
Dean's List, but to be considered 
for honors at commencement at 
least 64 credits must be earned at 
Lycoming; 

— students will be eligible for class 
rank after completing eight 
courses at Lycoming; 

— official copies of transcripts from 
all institutions attended must be 
submitted as a part of the admis- 
sions application; 

— the residency requirement for a 
degree is eight courses or 32 cred- 
its. The final eight courses must 
be taken at Lycoming. 



EARLY DECISION 

Lycoming's Early Decision Plan is de- 
signed for qualified high school sen- 
iors who have examined their college 
choices thoroughly and have decided 
that Lycoming College is their first 
choice. Candidates for Early Decision 
may apply elsewhere with the under- 
standing that other applications will be 
withdrawn if the candidates are ac- 
cepted at Lycoming. It is further un- 
derstood that students select only one 
college to which they will apply as Ear- 
ly Decision applicants. 

Applications for Early Decision 
may be submitted any time until De- 
cember 1. Candidates will be notified 
of the Admissions Committee's deci- 
sion in approximately 15 days, provid- 
ing that the credential files are com- 
plete. 

It is understood that the candidates 
admitted under the Early Decision 
Plan will subsequently enroll at Ly- 
coming. 

The Admissions Committee may de- 
fer candidates for a second review in 
the spring. In such cases, the Commit- 
tee considers additional academic in- 
formation such as senior year grades 



60 



and test scores. 



ADMISSIONS OFFICE 
LOCATION AND HOURS 

Prospective students and their families 
are encouraged to visit the campus for 
a student-conducted tour and an inter- 
view with an admissions officer, who 
will provide additional information 
about the College and answer ques- 
tions. 

The Admissions Office is located on 
the first floor of Long Hall. For an ap- 
pointment, telephone (717) 326-1951, 
or write Office of Admissions, Lycom- 
ing College, Williamsport, PA 17701. 
Office hours are: 

Weekdays — September through April 
9 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. 
— May through August 
9 a.m. to 4 p.m. 
Saturdays— September through April 
9 a.m. to 12 noon 
— May through August 
No Saturday hours. 




61 



Financial Matters 



EXPENSES FOR 
THE ACADEMIC YEAR 1984-85 

The following expenses are effective 
for the regular fall and spring semes- 
ters. The College reserves the right to 
adjust fees at any time. The fees for 
each semester are payable not later 
than the second day of classes for the 
semester. 

Per Per 

Fees Semester Year 

Comprehensive Fee $3,100 $6,200 

Board and Room Rent 1 ,275 2,550 

Total 4,375 8,750 

One-Time Student Fees 

Application Fee $ 20 

Admissions Deposit 100 

Contingency Deposit 100 

Room Reservation Deposit 100 

Part-Time Student Fees 

Application Fee $ 20 

Each Unit Course $775 

Additional Charges 

Applied Music Fee (half-hour per week 

per semester) 110 

Cap and Gown Rental prevailing cost 

Laboratory Fee per Unit Course 5 to 50 

Reregistration Fee 25 

Parking Permit (for the academic year) . 10 to 15 
Parking Permit with Reserved Space 

(for the academic year) 15 to 35 

Practice Teaching Fee (Payable in 

Junior Year) 170 

R.O.T.C. Basic Course Deposit 

(Payable at Bucknell University) 60 

R.O.T.C. Advanced Course Deposit 

(Payable at Bucknell University) 60 

Transcript Fee (No charge to 

full-time students) 3 

Medical Questionnaire Fee (Payable 

to Medical Datamation, Inc.) 13.50 

The comprehensive fee covers the 
regular course load of three to four 
courses each semester. Resident stu- 
dents must board at the College unless, 
for extraordinary reasons, authoriza- 
tion is extended for other eating ar- 
rangements, if a double room is used 
as a single room, there is an additional 
charge of $250 per semester. The esti- 
mated cost for books and supplies is 
up to $200 per year, depending on the 



course of study. Special session (May 
term and summer term) charges for 
tuition, room, and board are estab- 
lished during the fall semester. 



ENTRY FEES AND DEPOSITS 

Application Fee — All students for 
admission must submit a $20 applica- 
tion fee. This charge defrays the cost 
of processing the application and is 
nonrefundable. 

Admissions Deposit — After stu- 
dents have been notified of their ad- 
mission to Lycoming, they are required 
to make a $100 admissions deposit to 
confirm their intention to matriculate. 
Students seeking residence must sub- 
mil an additional $100 room-reserva- 
tion deposit. All deposits are applied 
to the general charges for the first se- 
mester of attendance. After May 1, de- 
posits are nonrefundable. 

Contingency Deposit — A contin- 
gency deposit of $100 is required of all 
full-time students as a guarantee for 
payment of damage to or loss of Col- 
lege property, for library and parking 
fines, or similar penalties imposed by 
the College. The deposit is collected 
along with other charges for the initial 
semester. The balance of this deposit is 
refunded after all debts to the College 
have been paid, either upon gradua- 
tion or upon written request submitted 
to the Registrar two weeks prior to vol- 
untary permanent termination of en- 
rollment at Lycoming College. 



PARTIAL PAYMENTS 

For the convenience of those who find 
it impossible to follow the regular 
schedule of payments, arrangements 
may be made with the College Treasur- 
er for the monthly payment of College 
fees through various educational plans. 
Additional information concerning 
partial payments may be obtained 
from the Treasurer or Dean of Admis- 
sions. 



REFUNDS FOR STUDENTS 
WHO WITHDRAW 

Refunds of tuition and board are made 
to students who voluntarily and offi- 
cially withdraw from the College while 
in good standing according to the fol- 
lowing schedule for the fall and spring 
semesters and the comparable period 
for the May and summer terms: 

Refund Charge 
Period of Withdrawal % % 

During the first week of the 

semester 80 20 

During second and third 

week 60 40 

During the fourth and fifth 

week 40 60 

During the sixth and seventh 

week 20 80 

After seven weeks 100 

The date on which the Dean of the 
College approves the student's with- 
drawal form is considered the official 
date of withdrawal. Charges are levied 
for services provided after withdrawal. 

Lycoming scholarships and grants 
are applied during the fall and spring 
semesters on the same basis as tuition 
charges. If a withdrawing student is 
charged 60% tuition, he/she will re- 
ceive 60% of the scholarship or grant. 
Government financial aid is adjusted 
according to federal and state guide- 
lines. 

Room charges, which are established 
on a semester basis, and special charg- 
es, such as laboratory fees, are not re- 
fundable if a student leaves the Col- 
lege prior to the end of the semester. 

Full-time students who after reduc- 
ing their loads continue to be enrolled 
for 12 or more semester hours are not 
eligible for a refund of tuition for an 
individual course. Similarly, students 
who register for extra hours in excess 
of 16 hours per semester and who later 
reduce their loads are not eligible after 
the fifth day of the semester for a re- 
fund of the fee charged for overloads. 
Charges will be recalculated for stu- 
dents who enroll full time and subse- 
quently assume part-time status by re- 
ducing their loads below 12 hours dur- 



62 



ing the drop-add period. The assump- 
tion of part-time status normally in- 
volves a substantial reduction of fi- 
nancial aid since most financial aid 
programs do not extend eligibility to 
part-time students. 



NON-PAYMENT OF FEES 
PENALTY 

Students will not be registered for 
courses in a new semester if their ac- 
counts for previous attendance have 
not been settled. Diplomas, transcripts, 
and certifications of withdrawals in 
good standing are issued only when a 
satisfactory settlement of all financial 
obligations has been made in the Busi- 
ness Office. 



FINANCIAL AID 

POLICY AND PROCEDURES 

The dominant factor in determining 
the amount of financial aid awarded 
to individual students is the establish- 
ment of need. Scholarships may be 
awarded on the basis of financial need 
and academic ability, while grants are 
provided on the basis of financial need. 
Long-term, low-cost educational loans 
are available from federal and state 
sources to most students who can dem- 
onstrate need. Part-time employment 
is available to students. 

To apply for financial assistance, 
obtain Lycoming's Financial Aid Ap- 
plication (FAA) from the Financial 
Aid Office and the CSS Financial Aid 
Form (FAF) and your State Grant Ap- 
plication from your secondary school 
Guidance Office or Lycoming's Finan- 
cial Aid Office. Submit the FAA to 
Lycoming and the completed FAF to 
the College Scholarship Service, Box 
2700, Princeton, NJ 08541, as early as 
possible after January 1. Renewal ap- 
plications are required annually. 



SCHOLARSHIPS AND GRANTS 

Valedictorian/Salutatorian Scholar- 
ship is a $1,500 award honoring gradu- 
ates of private and public secondary 
schools who rank either first or second 
in their graduating class as certified by 
their guidance counselor. These awards 
are based upon academic achievement 
and are not contingent upon demon- 
strated financial need. Renewal cumu- 
lative average is 3.00. 

Lycoming Recognition Scholarships 
for $700 to $1,000 per year are award- 
ed to freshmen who have superior ac- 
ademic qualifications, have filed the 
FAF but did not demonstrate financial 
need as determined by the College 
Scholarship Service and were not eligi- 
ble for another Lycoming scholarship 
program. This scholarship is renewable 
if the recipient maintains a 3.25 cumu- 
lative average. 

Lycoming Directors' Scholarships 
of $400 to full tuition, depending upon 
financial need, are awarded to students 
in the top fifth of their secondary 
school class with CEEB scores totaling 
1100 or more. Renewal cumulative av- 
erage is 3.00. 

President's Fellowships in Music are 
awarded annually to students who are 
skilled in singing or in playing the pi- 
ano and wish to continue performing, 
whether or not they intend to become 
music majors. To be eligible for con- 
sideration, a candidate must apply and 
be accepted by Lycoming College and 
audition with the Music Department. 
The amount of each fellowship is $250 
per semester, renewable to a maximum 
of $2,000 per student. The primary re- 
sponsibility of each Fellow is musical 
performance as assigned by the Music 
Department. Singing in a chamber 
choir, accompanying in a voice studio, 
playing for chapel services, or rehears- 
ing a musical comedy are typical op- 
portunities. 

Lycoming Grant-in-Aid awards of 
$400 to full tuition, depending upon 
financial need, are made to full-time 
students who do not qualify for schol- 
arships and who have demonstrated fi- 



nancial need and the prospect of con- 
tributing positively to the College 
community. Renewal requires contin- 
ued financial need and satisfactory cit- 
izenship standards. 

Ministerial Grants are awarded to 
dependent children of United Metho- 
dist ministers and practicing ordained 
ministers of other denominations. The 
grants amount to one-third of tuition 
for children of United Methodist Min- 
isters in the Central Pennsylvania An- 
nual Conference and one fourth of tu- 
ition for all others. If a student com- 
pletes the FAF, this grant will be part 
of the total aid award. 

Pre-Ministerial Student Grants of 
one-fourth of tuition are awarded to 
students preparing for the Christian 
ministry who are enrolled full time and 
demonstrate financial need. Students 
must complete the pre-ministerial ap- 
plication available through the Finan- 
cial Aid Office. 

Women of Lycoming Scholarship is 
an award available to a currently en- 
rolled female member of the junior 
class having completed 80 credit hours 
with at least a 3.0 cumulative average 
and who demonstrates financial need 
of at least the regular tuition rate. Ap- 
plications are available in the Finan- 
cial Aid Office in February and are 
due in March. The award is normally 
$500 and is based on current earnings 
of the scholarship endowment. 

Two-in-Family Grants are awarded 
to each member of a family attending 
Lycoming College at the same time. 
The amount is 10% of tuition, room, 
and/or board paid. Each member must 
be enrolled full time and not eligible 
for any other financial aid program of 
the College. If a student is eligible for 
other Lycoming aid, the student would 
receive whichever is greater. 

United Methodist Scholarships are 
awarded to applicants who are in the 
top one-third of their class, active in 
Christian activities, and have demon- 
strated financial need. The awards are 
normally $500 per year and the funds 
are provided by the United Methodist 
Church. Annual application is re- 



63 



quired. The student must complete 
and file the FAF and the scholarship 
forms which are available in the Fi- 
nancial Aid Office. 

Wyoming Conference Scholarship 
of $500 is granted by Lycoming to a 
student chosen by the Scholarship 
Committee of the Wyoming Confer- 
ence. These scholarships are renewable 
for three additional years. Good aca- 
demic performance and service to the 
church are the criteria for this award. 

C. Luther Culler Scholarship for 
$500 is available based on scholarship. 

Dewitt-Bodine Scholarships are 
awarded to the highest-ranked student 
in the graduating class each year from 
Hughesville High School who attends 
Lycoming College. The recipient is 
designated by the Hughesville guid- 
ance director. The scholarship amount 
is $2,200 and is credited at $550 per 
year over four years of attendance at 
Lycoming. If the student is in a three- 
year program (such as Med-Tech), (s)he 
will receive the award divided equally 
over the three years of attendance at 
Lycoming. 

Clara Kramer Eaton Scholarships 
are awarded to the highest-ranked stu- 
dent in the graduating class each year 
from Line Mountain High School who 
attends Lycoming College. The recipi- 
ent is designated by the high school's 
guidance office. The scholarship is 
$400 per year for up to four years' at- 
tendance at Lycoming. 

James A. Heether Scholarship for 
$300 is available based on financial 
need. Priority will be given to a chem- 
istry major. 

George W. Huntley, Jr. Scholarship 
for $700 is available to help defray the 
tuition and expenses for the first year 
only of any graduate of Cameron 
County High School (formerly Em- 
porium High School). The selection is 
made by the superintendent of schools. 

Robert F. Rich Scholarship is award- 
ed periodically to an academically out- 
standing student from Central Penn- 
sylvania. The award varies from $200 
to $1,200 depending upon the available 
scholarship endowment income. Pref- 



erence is given to a resident of the 
Woolrich area and children of the em- 
ployees of the Woolrich Company. 

Leonard H. Rothermel Fund pro- 
vides $L200 in a grant to financially 
needy student(s) who are in satisfacto- 
ry academic standing. 

Samuel Willard Memorial Scholar- 
ships are awarded to a junior or senior 
student at Lycoming who is in need of 
financial assistance to complete his/her 
degree. Preference is given to a relig- 
ion major. The award varies between 
$300 and $600 depending upon availa- 
ble scholarship endowment income. 



FEDERAL AID 

Pell Grant— This federal grant pro- 
vides up to $1,900 per year for full- 
time students who can demonstrate fi- 
nancial need. Application can be made 
when submitting the Financial Aid 
Form (FAF), the PHEAA State Grant 
Application, or by separate federal ap- 
plication on forms which are available 
in secondary school guidance offices 
or the Financial Aid Office at Lycom- 
ing. All students are urged to apply for 
this program. 

Supplemental Educational Oppor- 
tunity Grants (SEOG)— This federal 
government program provides addi- 
tional assistance to those students with 
financial need. Awards can be made in 
amounts ranging from $200 to $2,000 
and are usually based entirely on ex- 
ceptional financial need. Renewal is 
possible if the applicant has no reduc- 
tion in financial need in succeeding 
years. 

National Direct Student Loan 
(NDSL)^This federal five percent in- 
terest loan permits a total of $6,000 to 
be borrowed by the undergraduate 
student at a rate not to exceed $3,000 
the first two years. Repayment does 
not begin until after graduation or 
withdrawal from college. Loans are 
normally renewed annually if the ap- 
plicant files a renewal application by 
May 1 and continues to demonstrate 
financial need. 



Federal College Work Study Grants 

(CWSP) — An opportunity is provided 
through this program for students to 
earn part of their college expenses and 
to gain some practical experience by 
working on campus. Federal govern- 
ment financial-need guidelines must be 
met to be eligible for this program. 
Students who do not meet these guide- 
lines should consult with the Career 
Development Center or Financial Aid 
Office for other employment oppor- 
tunities. 



STATE GRANTS 

State Grants — All applicants for fi- 
nancial aid are urged to investigate 
programs sponsored by their home 
states and to learn about and heed ap- 
plication deadlines. Pennsylvania stu- 
dents should apply for a PHEAA State 
Grant before April 30. The PHEAA 
State Grant provides up to $1500 to el- 
igible Pennsylvania residents who are 
in need of financial aid to attend as a 
full-time undergraduate student. Resi- 
dents of other states may be eligible 
for grant assistance through their 
states. A few of these states are Dela- 
ware, Maryland, Ohio, Rhode Island, 
and West Virginia. Applications should 
be available through your high school 
guidance office. 



LOANS 

State Guaranteed Loans — Most 
states, including Pennsylvania, New 
Jersey, and New York, provide state 
guaranteed loans through local banks 
and lending institutions. This program 
provides 7-9 percent interest loans of 
up to $2,500 per academic level for ed- 
ucational expenses with repayment ex- 
tended over a long-term schedule. Ap- 
plicants should consult local banks 
early in their .senior year. 

Plus Loans — PLUS Loans are 
meant to provide additional funds for 
educational expenses. The interest rate 
is 12 percent. Parents of dependent 



64 



undergraduate students may borrow 
up to $3,000 per year. Independent 
undergraduates may borrow up to 
$2,500 per year; however, for indepen- 
dent students, the PLUS loan, com- 
bined with any GSL the undergraduate 
may have for that level, cannot exceed 
$2,500. Applications and information 
are available from your bank or other 
lending institution. 



OTHER SOURCES OF AID 

Community Scholarships — In many 
communities, foundations and organi- 
zations, and in some cases high schools, 
provide funds for worthy students. 
Applicants should consult with their 
guidance counselor or principal. 

Education Financing Plans^The 
Business Office at Lycoming provides 
information about plans which enable 
parents to pay College expenses on a 
monthly basis through selected com- 
panies. 

Pennsylvania National Guard — 
Students participating in this program 
may be eligible for scholarship, credit 
programs, educational bonus, or loan 
repayment. Contact a Guard unit in 



your area for more information. 

Reserve Officers Training Corps 
(ROTC) Scholarships — Students who 
participate in Army ROTC are eligible 
for three-, two-, and one-year ROTC 
scholarships to finance tuition, books, 
laboratory fees, and other charges 
with the exception of room and board. 
ROTC Scholarship students also re- 
ceive $100 per month during the aca- 
demic year. 

Reserve Officers Training Corps 
(ROTC) Stipends— Students who par- 
ticipate in the Army ROTC program 
receive an annual stipend of $1,000 
during their junior and senior years. 
They also receive half of a second lieu- 
tenant's pay plus travel expenses for a 
six-week advanced summer camp be- 
tween junior and senior years. 

Tuition Exchange Grants — Lycom- 
ing College is a member of both the 
Tuition Exchange Program and the 
CIC Tuition Exchange Program. 
These programs are for dependent stu- 
dents of employees at participating in- 
stitutions of higher education. You 
should contact the Tuition Exchange 
Officer at your host institution for in- 
formation regarding sponsorship. 




65 



The Campus 



Eighteen buildings sit on Lycoming's 
20-acre main campus. Most buildings 
have been constructed since 1950, even 
though Lycoming — one of America's 
50 oldest colleges and universities — 
dates back to 1812. All buildings are 
easy to reach from anywhere on cam- 
pus. A 12-acre athletic field and foot- 
ball stadium lie a few blocks north of 
the main campus. 

Modern buildings include the eight 
residence halls, which contain clean 
and comfortable single and double 
rooms; the library; the student union; 
and the physical education/recreation 
center. Up-to-date facilities include the 
theatre, the planetarium, the computer 
center, an electronic-music studio, a 
photography laboratory, and an art 
gallery. The computer center opened in 
1969; the art gallery and physical edu- 
cation center opened in 1980. An arts 
center was renovated and opened in 
1983. 



RESIDENTIAL 

Asbury Hall (1962) — Sleeps 154 stu- 
dents. Named in honor of Bishop 
Francis Asbury, the father of The 
United Methodist Church in America, 
who made the circuit through the up- 
per Susquehanna District in 1812, the 
year Lycoming (then the Williamsport 
Academy) opened its doors. 
Crever Hall (1962) — Sleeps 126 stu- 
dents in two-room suites with bath. 
Honors Lycoming's founder and first 
financial agent, the Rev. Benjamin H. 
Crever, who helped persuade the Bal- 
timore Conference to purchase the 
school from the Williamsport Town 
Council in 1848. 

Hast Hall (1962) — Houses most of 
the chapters of Lycoming's national 
fraternities and other students. The 
self-contained fraternity units each 
contain rooms, a lounge, and a chap- 
ter room. All students share a large so- 
cial area. 

Forrest Hall (1968) — Sleeps 92 stu- 
dents in two-room suites with bath. 
Honors Dr. and Mrs. Fletcher Bliss 



Forrest and Anna Forrest Burfiendt 
'30, the parents and sister of Katherine 
Forrest Mathers '28, whose generosity 
established the memorial. 
Rich Hall (1948) — Sleeps 105 students 
in two-room suites with bath. Honors 
the Rich family of Woolrich, Pennsyl- 
vania. Houses the health service and 
the Sara J. Walter Lounge for com- 
muting students. 

Skeath Hall (1965) —The largest resi- 
dence hall, it sleeps 212 students. Hon- 
ors the late J. Milton Skeath, professor 
of psychology and four-time Dean of 
the College from 1921 to 1967. 
Hesley Hall (1956) — Sleeps 144 stu- 
dents. Honors John Wesley, the found- 
er of Methodism. 

miliams Hall (1965) — Sleeps 146 stu- 
dents in two-room suites with bath. 
Honors Mary Ellen Whitehead Wil- 
liams, mother of Joseph A. Williams, 
of St. Marys, Pennsylvania, whose be- 
quest established the memorial. 



ACADEMIC 

Academic Center (1968) — Probably 
the most architecturally impressive 
building on campus, the center actual- 
ly is composed of four buildings: the 
library, Wendle Hall, the Arena Thea- 
tre and laboratories, and the faculty 
office building. 

Library: Contains more than 150,000 
volumes and up to 1,000 periodical 
titles, the Art Gallery, the computer 
center, a nursing skills laboratory, 
and a comfortable lounge that is 
utilized for study and special events. 
It can accommodate 700 students, 
and serves as a federal repository. 
Art Gallery (1980): Located in the 
northwest corner of the first floor 
of the library, the gallery contains 
exhibits year-round, including 
shows of student work. 
Computer Center (1979): Located 
in the basement of the library, the 
center houses a DEC PDPll/70 pri- 
mary unit and Commodore, Radio 
Shack and APPLE micro-comput- 



ers. The primary unit is equipped 
with the RSTS-E operating system, 
1.25 Mega-bytes of main memory, 
134 Mega-bytes disk storage, and 14 
remote terminals for student use. 
The center has computer graphics 
capability. 

Nursing Skills Laboratory (1983): 

Located in the lower level of the li- 
brary, it is a replica of a modern 
hospital ward, complete with 10 
simulated work stations, a nurses' 
station, and all the medical equip- 
ment used by nurses. 
Wendle Hall: Contains 20 class- 
rooms, the psychology laborato- 
ries, and spacious Pennington 
Lounge, an informal meeting place 
for students and faculty. 
Arena Theatre and Laboratories: 
The 204 seat thrust-stage theatre is 
one of the finest in the region; it in- 
cludes projection facilities, scene 
and costume shops, a make-up 
room, and a multiple-use area 
known as the Down Stage, where 
one-act experimental plays are per- 
formed. The language, business, 
mathematics, and physics laborato- 
ries are situated on the upper 
floors. The Detwiler Planetarium is 
located on the ground floor. 
Faculty Office Building: Contains 
faculty offices, seminar rooms, and 
a 735-seat lecture hall. 
Fine Arts Center (1923, renovated 
1983) — Contains studios, sculpture 
foundry, woodshop, printmaking shop, 
classrooms, lecture hall, offices. 
Photographic Laboratory (1984): 
Located in the lower level of the 
Fine Arts Center, it contains all the 
materials and equipment of any 
commercial laboratory. 
Science Building (1957) — Includes 
the biology and chemistry laborato- 
ries, classrooms, faculty offices, a lec- 
ture hall, and a greenhouse. 
Clarke Building (1939) — Includes 
music classrooms, practice studios, an 
electronic-music studio, faculty of- 
fices, two chapels, and the United 
Campus Ministry Center. 



66 



ADMINISTRATION 

John W. Long Hall (1951) — Opened 
originally as the library, it now houses 
the administrative offices, including 
those for the president, dean, treasur- 
er, registrar, admissions, alumni af- 
fairs, public relations, institutional ad- 
vancement, career development, pub- 
lications, and financial aid. It includes 
a reception area, central communica- 
tions, and the printing and bulk mail 
office. 



RECREATION 

Physical Education and Recreation 
Center (1980) — Includes the George 
R. Lamade Gymnasium, which con- 
tains basketball and other courts; a 
six-lane swimming pool; all-purpose 
room; sauna and steam room; weight 
room; offices; classrooms, and Alum- 
ni Lounge. 

iVertz Student Center (1959) — Con- 
tains the main and private dining 
rooms, Burchfield Lounge, a recrea- 
tion area, game rooms, music room, 
theatre, cafe with stage, bookstore, 
post office, student organization of- 
fices, and FM radio station. Honors 
Bishop D. Frederick Wertz, president 
of Lycoming from 1955 to 1968. 



RELIGIOUS 

Clarke Building (1939) — Lycoming's 
landmark, the building contains 
Clarke Chapel, St. John Neumann 
Chapel, the United Campus Ministry 
Center, and music department studios 
and offices. 




t;«j^ '% 



67 



Academic Calendar: 1984-85 



Fall semester 

Bills are due August 23 

Orientation of new faculty August 24 

Residence halls open August 26 

Faculty available for advising August 27 

Classes begin first period August 28 

Processing of drop/add begins August 28 

Re-registration fee of $25 applies after this date September 3 

Last day for drop/add September 3 

Last day to elect audit and satisfactory/unsatisfactory grades September 3 

Last day for submission of final grades for courses for which Incomplete grades were 

recorded in spring. May, and summer terms October 9 

Mid-semester deficiency reports for freshmen due in Registrar's Office at noon October 15 

Last day for submission of final grades for courses for which Incomplete grades were 

recorded in fall semester 

Preregistration for students who have completed at least one semester October 30, 31 & 

November 1 

Preregistration for sophomores and juniors 

Preregistration for freshmen November 9-10 

Last day to withdraw from courses with W, WP, WF grades November 20 

Residence halls close at 10 a.m. for Thanksgiving recess November 21 

Residence halls open at noon after Thanksgiving recess November 25 

Classes resume first period after Thanksgiving November 26 

Residence halls close at 9 p.m. for spring recess 

Residence halls open at noon after spring recess 

Classes resume first period after spring recess 

Final examinations begin December 10 

Semester ends at 5 p.m December 14 

Residence halls close at 9 p.m December 14 

May term 

Residence halls open May 5 

Classes begin May 6 

Last day for drop/add May 7 

Last day to elect audit and satisfactory/unsatisfactory grades May 7 

Last day to withdraw from courses with W, WP, WF grades May 24 

Term ends May 31 

Residence halls close at 4 p.m May 31 



Spring semester 

January 3 

January 6 

January 7 
January 7 
January 11 
January 11 
January 11 



February 25 
February 15 



March 28, 29 
April 2-3 
April 8 



March 1 
March 10 
March 11 
April 22 
April 26 
April 26 

Summer term 

June 2 
June 3 
June 5 
June 5 
June 28 
July 12 
July 12 



Special dates to remember: 

Freshman convocation August 28 

All-College picnic September 1 

Labor Day (classes in session) September 3 

Homecoming Weekend September 28-30 

Parents Weekend October 12-14 

Long weekend (classes suspended) October 26 

Thanksgiving recess November 21-25 

Spring recess March 1-10 

Good Friday (afternoon classes suspended) April 5 

Honors Day April 9 

Baccalaureate May 5 

Commencement May 5 

Memorial Day (no classes) May 27 

Independence Day (no classes) July 4 



68 



Directory 



BOARD OF TRUSTEES 

Officers 

Harold H. Shreckengast, Jr Chairman 

Nathan W. Stuart, J.D Vice Chairman 

Paul G. Gilmore Secretary 

William L. Baker Treasurer 

W. Gibbs McKenney, LL.D., L.H.D. .Chairman Emeritus 
Fred A. Pennington, LL.D Chairman Emeritus 

Honorary Trustees 
Bishop Hermann W. Kaebnick, 

D.D.,L.H.D.,LL.D Hershey 

Ralph E. Kelchner Jersey Shore 

Arnold A. Phipps, II WiUiamsport 

George L. Stearns, II WiUiamsport 

W. Russell Zacharias Allentown 

Trustees 
Term expires 1985 
Elected 

1979 David Y. Brouse Salem, MA 

1951 Paul G. Gilmore WiUiamsport 

1982 Mrs. Margaret D. L'Heureux WiUiamsport 

1973 Robert G. Little, M.D Harrisburg 

1979 David J. Loomis, Ph.D Troy 

(Alumni Representative) 

1964 W. Gibbs McKenney, LL.D., L.H.D 

Baltimore, MD 

1973 G. Jackson Miller Altoona 

1958 Fred A. Pennington, LL.D Mechanicsburg 

1982 Mrs. Marguerite G. Rich Woolrich 

1961 The Rev. Wallace E Stettler, HH.D Kingston 

1982 The Rev. Stratford C. Taylor Montoursville 

^, , Term expires 1986 

Elected 

1983 John T. Detwiler WiUiamsport 

1980 Richard W. DeWald Montoursville 

1974 Daniel G. Fultz Pittsford, NY 

1965 James G. Law, D. Text. Sci Bloomsburg 

1970 John E. Person, Jr. WiUiamsport 

1983 Dr. Mary R. Schweikle, M.D Montoursville 

(Alumni Representative) 
1972 Donald E. Shearer, M.D Montoursville 

1983 Hon. Clinton W. Smith WiUiamsport 

1961 Nathan W Stuart, J.D WiUiamsport 

1971 WiUis W. WiUard, III, M.D Hershey 

^, , Term expires 1987 

Elected 

1984 Hon. Robert W. Edgar, LL.D Springfield 

(Alumni Representative) 
1969 Samuel H. Evert Bloomsburg 

1972 The Rev. Brian A. Fetterman Harrisburg 



1978 Harold D. Hershberger, Jr. WiUiamsport 

1969 Kenneth E. Himes WiUiamsport 

1978 John C. Lundy WUliamsport 

1987 D. Stephen Martz Duncansville 

1981 William Pickelner WiUiamsport 

1978 John Y. Schreyer Little Falls, NJ 

1972 Harold H. Shreckengast, Jr. Jenkintown 



ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF 

FREDERICK E. BLUMER (1976) 

President 

B.A., Millsaps College; B.D., Ph.D.. Emory University 
SHIRLEY A. VAN MARTER (1979) 

Dean of the College 

B.A., Mundelein College; M.A., Northwestern 

University; M. A., Ph.D., University of Chicago 
WILLIAM L. BAKER (1965) 

Treasurer 

B.S., Lycoming College 
JACK C. BUCKLE (1957) 

Dean of Student Services 

A.B., Juniata College; M.S., Syracuse University 
BETTY S. BECK (1965) 

Bookstore Manager 
DALE V. BOWER (1968) 

Director of Planned Giving 

B.S., Lycoming College; B.D., United Theological 

Seminary 
GEORGE W. BRELSFORD (1982) 

Residence Area Coordinator 

B.S., Davis & Elkins College 
LOUISE A. CALIGIURI (1978) 

Associate Dean of Student Services 

B.S., M.S., Duquesne University 
ROBERT L. CURRY JR. (1969) 

Administrative Assistant in Athletics 

A.B. Lycoming College 
JOANNE B. DAY (1981) 

Associate Dean of Student Services 

B.A., M.Ed., Western Maryland College 
ROBERT L. EDDINGER (1967) 

Director of Buildings & Grounds 
FRANK L. GIRARDI (1984) 

Director of Athletics 

B.S., West Chester State College 
FRED L. GROGAN (1977) 

Assistant Dean of the College 

A.B., Bates College; M.A., Arizona State University; 

Ph.D., University of Missouri 
THOMAS J. HENNINGER (1966) 

Director of Computer Services 

B.S., Wake Forest College; M. A., University of Kansas 



69 



MARY E. HERRING (1978) 

Director of Admissions 

B.A., Albright College 
THOMAS D. HOGAN 

Assistant Director of Admissions 

B.A., Marquette Universitv 
RICHARD A. HUGHES (1970) 

Chaplain of the College 

B.A., Indiana Central College; S.T.B., Ph.D., Boston 

University 
BRUCE M. HURLBERT (1982) 

Director of Library Services 

B.A., The Citadel; M.S.L.S., Florida State University 
HAROLD H. HUTSON (1969) 

President Emeritus 

B.A., LL.D., Wofford College; B.D., Duke University; 

Ph.D., University of Chicago; L.H.D., Ohio Wesleyan 

University 
JOHN G. LAMADE (1983) 

Admissions Counselor 

B.A., Susquehanna University 
MARIE LINDHORST (1984) 

Campus Minister 

A.B., Vassar College; M.Div., Yale University Divinity 

School 
BETTY J. PARIS (1963) 

Registrar 

A.B., Lycoming College 
JULIANN T PAWLAK (1979) 

Director of Financial Aid 

A.B., Lycoming College; M.A., Bucknell University 
JEFFREY L. RICHARDS (1982) 

Controller and Assistant Treasurer 

A.B., Lycoming College 
WILLIAM H. RUPP (1979) 

Director of Public Relations 

B.A., M.A., The Pennsylvania State University 
GORDON S. STEARNS (1982) 

Residence Area Coordinator 

B.A., Bowdoin College 
THOMAS P. WOZNIAK (1979) 

Associate Dean of Student Services 

B.A., Merrimack College; M.Ed., Worcester Stale 

College 
RALPH E. ZEIGLER, JR. (1980) 

Director of Alumni Relations 

A.B., Lycoming College; M.A., The Pennsylvania State 

University 
JEROME M. ZUFELT (1984) 

Assistant Director of Public Relations 

B.S., Boston University 



FACULTY 

EMERITI 

MABEL K. BAUER 

Professor Emeritus of Chemistry 

B.S., Cornell University; M.S., University of 

Pennsylvania 
LEROY F DERR 

Professor Emeritus of Education 

A.B., Ursinus College; M.A., Bucknell University; 

Ed.D., University of Pittsburgh 
ROBERT H. EWING 

Professor Emeritus of History 

A.B., College of Wooster; M. A., University of 

Michigan; HH.D., Lycoming College 
JOHN P. GRAHAM 

Professor Emeritus of English 

Ph.B., Dickinson College; M.Ed., The Pennsylvania 

State University 
HAROLD W. HAYDEN 

Librarian Emeritus and Professor Emeritus of Library 

Services 

A.B., Nebraska State Teachers College; B.S., University 

of Illinois; M.A. in L.S., University of Michigan 
GEORGE W. HOWE 

Professor Emeritus of Geology 

A.B., M.S., Syracuse University; Ph.D., Cornell 

University 
M. RAYMOND JAMISON 

Assistant Professor Emeritus of Physics 

B.S., Ursinus College; M.S., Bucknell University 
GERTRUDE B. MADDEN 

Associate Professor Emeritus of English 

A.B., University of Pennsylvania; M.A. , Bucknell 

University 
WALTER G. McIVER 

Professor Emeritus of Music 

Mus.B., Westminster Choir College; A. B., Bucknell 

University; M.A., New York University 
DONALD G. REMLEY 

Assistant Professor Emeritus of Mathematics and 

Physics 

A.B., Dickinson College; M.A., Columbia University 
MARY LANDON RUSSELL 

Associate Professor Emeritus of Music 

Mus.B., Susquehanna University Conservatory of 

Music; M.A., The Pennsylvania State University 
LOUISE R. SCHAEFFER 

Associate Professor Emeritus of Education 

A.B., Lycoming College; M.A., Bucknell University; 

D.Ed., The Pennsylvania State University 
JAMES W. SHEAFFER 

Associate Professor Emeritus of Music 



70 



B.S., Indiana University of Pennsylvania; M.S., 


JOHN E PIPER, JR. (1969) 


University of Pennsylvania 


History 


FRANCES K. SKEATH 


A.B., Lafayette College; B.D., Yale University; Ph.D., 


Professor Emeritus of Mathematics 


Duke University 


A.B., M.A., Bucknell University; D.Ed., The 


ROBERT W. RABOLD (1955) 


Pennsylvania State University 


Economics 


JOHN A. STUART 


B.A., The Pennsylvania State University; M.A., Ph.D., 


Professor Emeritus of English 


University of Pittsburgh 


B.A., William Jewell College; M.A., Ph.D., 


JOHN A. RADSPINNER (1957) 


Northwestern University 


Chemistry 


HELEN B. WEIDMAN 


B.S., University of Richmond; M.S., Virginia 


Professor Emeritus of PoHtical Science 


Polytechnic Institute; D.Sc, Carnegie-Mellon 


A.B., M.A., Bucknell University; Ph.D., Syracuse 


University 


University 


LOGAN A. RICHMOND (1954) 




Accounting 




B.S., Lycoming College; M.B.A., New York University; 


PROFESSORS 


C.P.A. (Pennsylvania) 




JANET A. RODGERS (1981) 


ROBERT E FALK (1970) 


Nursing 


Theatre 


B.S., Wagner College; M.A., Ph.D., New York 


Marshal of the College 


University 


B.A., B.D., Drew University; M.A., Ph.D., Wayne 


SHIRLEY A. VAN MARTER (1979) 


State University 


Dean of the College 


MORTON A. FINEMAN (1966)*** 


English 


Physics 


B.A., Mundelein College; M.A., Northwestern 


A.B., Indiana University; Ph.D., University of 


University; M. A., Ph.D., University of Chicago 


Pittsburgh 




ERNEST D. GIGLIO (1972) 


***On Leave of Absence 1984-85 


Political Science 




B.A., Queens College; M.A., SUNY at Albany; Ph.D., 




Syracuse University 


ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS 


EDUARDO GUERRA (1960) 




Religion 


ROBERT B. ANGSTADT (1967) 


B.D., Southern Methodist University; S.T.M., Ph.D., 


Biology 


Union Theological Seminary 


B.S., Ursinus College; M.S., Ph.D., Cornell University 


JOHN G. HANCOCK (1967) 


HOWARD C. BERTHOLD, JR. (1976) 


Psychology 


Psychology 


B.S., M.S., Bucknell University; Ph.D., The 


B.A., Franklin and Marshall College; M.A., University 


Pennsylvania State University 


of Iowa; Ph.D., The University of Massachusetts 


JOHN G. HOLLENBACK (1952) 


JON R. BOGLE (1976)* 


Business Administration 


Art 


B.S., M.B.A., University of Pennsylvania 


B.F.A., B.S., M.F.A., Tyler School of Art, Temple 


JAMES K. HUMMER (1962) 


University 


Chemistry 


CLARENCE W. BURCH (1962) 


B.N.S., Tufts University; M.S., Middlebury College; 


Physical Education 


Ph.D., University of North Carolina 


B.S., M.Ed.. University of Pittsburgh 


JACK S. McCRARY (1969) 


JACK D. DIEHL, JR. (1971) 


Sociology 


Biology 


B.A., M.A., Southern Methodist University; Ph.D., 


B.S., M.A., Sam Houston State University; M.S., 


Washington University 


Ph.D., University of Connecticut 


ROGER W. OPDAHL (1963) 


RICHARD R. ERICKSON (1973) 


Economics 


Astronomy and Physics 


A.B., Hofstra University; M.A., Columbia University; 


B.A., University of Minnesota; M.S.. Ph.D., University 


D.Ed., The Pennsylvania State University 


of Chicago 



71 



BERNARD P. FLAM (1963) 


A.B., University of California at Berkeley; M.A., 


Spanish 


University of California at Los Angeles; Ph.D., The 


A.B., New York University; M.A., Harvard University; 


American University 


Ph.D., University of Wisconsin 


ROGER D. SHIPLEY (1967) 


DAVID A. FRANZ (1970) 


Art 


Chemistry 


B.A., Otterbein College; M. FA. , Cranbrook Academy 


A.B., Princeton University; M. A. T, The Johns 


of Art 


Hopkins University; Ph.D., University of Virginia 


H. BRUCE WEAVER (1974)* 


CHARLES L. GETCHELL (1967) 


Business Administration 


Mathematics 


B.B.A., Stetson University; J.D., Vanderbilt University; 


B.S., University of Massachusetts; M.A., Ph.D., 


M.B.A., Florida Technological University 


Harvard University 


JOHN M. WHELAN, JR. (1971) 


STEPHEN R. GRIFFITH (1970) 


Philosophy 


Philosophy 


B.A., University of Notre Dame; Ph.D., The University 


A.B., Cornell University; M.A., Ph.D., University of 


of Texas at Austin 


Pittsburgh 


STANLEY T WILK (1973) 


DAVID K. HALEY (1980) 


Anthropology 


Mathematics 


B.A., Hunter College; Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh 


B.A., Acadia University; M.S., Ph.D., Queen's 


ROBERT A. ZACCARIA (1973) 


University; Habil., Universitdt Mannheim 


Biology 


RICHARD A. HUGHES (1970) 


B.A., Bridgewater College; Ph.D., University of 


Religion 


Virginia 


B.A., Indiana Central College; S.T.B., Ph.D.. Boston 




University 


*On Sabbatical Fall Semester 1984-85 


BRUCE M^ HURLBERT (1982) 


**On Sabbatical Spring Semester 1984-85 


Director of Library Services 




B.A., The Citadel; M.S.L.S., Florida State University 




EMILY R. JENSEN (1969) 


ASSISTANT PROFESSORS 


English 




B.A., Jamestown College; M.A., University of Denver; 


JERRY D. ALLEN (1984) 


Ph.D., The Pennsylvania State University 


Theatre 


MOON H. JO (1975) 


B.FA., M.F.A., Utah State University 


Sociology 


RICHARD J. BARKER (1982) 


B.A., Valparaiso University; M.A., Howard University; 


Spanish 


Ph.D., New York University 


B.A., Hamilton College; M.A., University of Iowa; 


FORREST E. KEESBURY (1970) 


Ph.D., University of Oregon 


Education 


SUSAN K. BEIDLER (1975) 


B.S., Defiance College; M.A., Bowling Green State 


Collection Management Services Librarian 


University; Ed.D., Lehigh University 


B.A., University of Delaware; M.L.S., University of 


ROBERT H. LARSON (1969) 


Pittsburgh 


History 


GARY M. BOERCKEL (1979) 


B.A., The Citadel; M.A., Ph.D., University of Virginia 


Music 


PAUL A. MacKENZIE (1970) 


B.A., B.M., Oberlin College; M.M., Ohio University; 


German 


D.M.A., University of Iowa 


A. B., A.M., Ph.D., Boston University 


ESTHER CONDON 


ROBERT J. B. MAPLES (1969) 


Nursing 


French 


B.S.N. , University of Rhode Island; M.S., Boston 


A.B., University of Rochester; Ph.D., Yale University 


University 


DAVID J. RIFE (1970)** 


JOHN H. CONRAD (1959) 


English 


Education 


B.A., University of Florida; M.A., Ph.D., Southern 


B.S., Mansfield State College; M.A., New York 


Illinois Universitv 


Universitv 


MICHAEL G. RO'SKIN (1972) 


SRILAL S. DeSILVA (1983) 


Political Science 


Mathematics 



72 



B.Sc, University of Sri Lanka; M.A., Ph.D., 


Business Administration 


University of Pittsburgh 


B.A., City College of New York; M.B.A.. The Bernard 


DAVID FISHER 


Baruch College 


Physics 


RICHARD J. MORRIS (1976)** 


B.S., The Pennsylvania State University; M.S., Ph.D., 


History 


University of Delaware 


B.A., Boston State College; M.A., Ohio University; 


EDWARD b. GABRIEL (1977) 


Ph.D., New York University 


Biology 


CAROLE MOSES (1982) 


B.A., M.A., Alfred University; M.S., Ph.D., The Ohio 


English 


State University 


B.A., Adelphi University; M.A., The Pennsylvania 


ELISE M. GOLD 


State University; Ph.D., SUNY at Binghamton 


English 


CHERYL NEWBURG (1983) 


B.A., Herbert Lehman College; M.A., Ph.D., 


Psychology 


University of Rochester 


B.S., Duke University; M.A., Ph.D, University of 


GEOFFREY L. GORDON (1981) 


Kansas 


Business Administration 


DORIS P PARRISH (1983) 


B.S., Lehigh University; M.B.A., Duke University; 


Nursing 


C.PLM. 


B.S, SUNY at Pittsburgh; M.S., Russell Sage College 


FRED L. GROGAN (1977) 


JUDITH A. POTTMEYER (1984) 


Political Science 


Biology 


Assistant Dean of the College 


B.S, Clarion State College; Ph.D., Washington State 


A.B., Bates College; M.A., Arizona State University; 


University 


Ph.D., University of Missouri 


STEPHEN E. ROBINSON (1979) 


THOMAS J. HENNINGER (1966) 


Religion 


Director of Computer Services; Mathematics 


B.A., M.A., Brigham Young University; Ph.D., Duke 


B.S., Wake Forest College; M. A., University of Kansas 


University 


OWEN F HERRING (1965) 


SUBIR ROY (1984) 


Philosophy 


Mathematics 


B.A., Wake Forest College 


B.S., M.S., Jadavpur University; Ph.D., Indian 


MURIEL K. JACOBY (1984) 


Institute of Technology 


Nursing 


KATHRYN M. RYAN (1981) 


B.S.N., Hood College; M.S., University of Delaware; 


Psychology 


M. S. , University of Dela ware 


B.S., University of Illinois; M.S., Ph.D., University of 


MARTIN JAMISON (1982) 


Pittsburgh 


Instructional Services Librarian 


GENE D. SPRECHINI (1981) 


B.A., University of Akron; M.L.S., Kent State 


Mathematics 


University 


B.S., Wilkes College; M. A., Ph.D., SUNY at 


GRANT L. JEFFERS (1983) 


Binghamton 


Music 


LARRY R. STRAUSER (1973) 


B.A., Williams College; M.M., University of 


Sociology 


Cincinnati; Ph.D., University of California, Los 


A.B., Lycoming College; M.P.A., University of 


Angeles 


Arizona 


WILLIAM E. KEIG (1980) 


FRED M. THAYER, JR. (1976) 


Astronomy and Physics 


Music 


A.B., University of California at Santa Cruz; M.S., 


A.B., Syracuse University; B.M., Ithaca College; 


Ph.D., University of Chicago 


M.M., SUNY at Binghamton; D.M.A., Cornell 


ELDON F KUHNS, II (1979) 


University 


Accounting 


BUDD F WHITEHILL (1957) 


A.B., Lycoming College; M. Accounting, University of 


Physical Education 


Oklahoma; C.P.A. (Pennsvlvania) 


B.S., Lock Haven State College; M.Ed., The 


DIANE M. LESKO (1978) 


Pennsvlvania State University 


Art History 


RICHARD E. WIENECKE (1982) 


B.A.. M.A., Ph.D., SUNY at Binghamton 


Accounting 


ANDREW LIEBMAN (1983) 


A.B., Lycoming College; M.S., Bucknell University; 



73 



M.B.A., Long Island University; C.P.A. (Pennsylvania 


LECTURERS & SPECIAL APPOINTMENTS 


and New York) 




FREDRIC M. WILD, JR. (1978) 


NANCY B. COOLEY (1981) 


English 


Worksite Health Program Coordinator— CHIP 


B.A., Emory University ; M.A., Ph.D., Ohio Stale 


A.B., Lycoming College 


University; M.Div., Yale Divinity School 


DON M. LARRABEE II (1972) 


MELVIN C. ZIMMERMAN (1979) 


Lecturer in Law 


Biology 


A.B., Franklin and Marshall; LL.B.; Fordham 


B.S., SUNYat Cortland; M.S., Ph.D.. Miami 


Universitv 


University 


JOHN J. TAMALIS (1976) 




Chaplain to Roman Catholic Students 


**On Sabbatical Spring Semester 1984-85 


B.S., University of Scranton; M.S., Marywood College 


INSTRUCTORS 


PART-TIME FACULTY 


SALLY ANN ATKINSON (1983) 


MARY R BAGGETT (1977) 


Nursing 


Chemistry 


B.S.N. , Te.xas Woman's University; M.S.N., University 


B.A., Regis College; M.A., Wellesley College 


of Texas, Health Science Center at San Antonio 


ADELLE DOTZEL (1981) 


CHRIS A. CHERRINGTON (1983) 


Mathematics 


Education 


B.S., Kings College; M.A., The Pennsylvania State 


B.S., University of Oklahoma; M. Ed., University of 


Universitv 


Virginia 


ROME A. HANKS (1982) 


JO ANNE LATIMER GRUNOW (1983) 


Art 


Nursing 


B.A., M.F.A., The Pennsylvania State University 


A.D.N. , Clemson University; B.S.N., M.N., University 




of South Carolina 




DAVID B. HAIR (1979) 


APPLIED MUSIC TEACHERS 


Physical Education 




B.S., East Stroudsburg State College 


DONALD FREED (1983) 


DANIEL HARTSOCK (1982) 


Violin 


Visiting Instructor in English 


B.S., West Chester State College; M. Ed., D. Ed., The 


B.A., The Pennsylvania State University; M.A., 


Pennsvlvania State University 


Indiana Universitv of Pennsvlvania 


THOMAS GALLUP (1982) 


DEBORAH J. HOLMES (1976) 


Flute and Voice 


Physical Education 


B.S., Mansfield State College 


B.S., M.S., The Pennsvlvania State University 


GARY GUTH (1983) 


BRADLEY NASON 


Guitar 


Mass Communication 


B.S., Indiana Universitv of Pennsylvania 


A.B., Lycoming College; M.A. in Communications, 


RICHARD J. LAKEY (1979) 


The American University 


Organ and Piano 


KATHLEEN D. PAGANA (1982)*** 


A.B., Westminster Choir College; M.A., Indiana 


Nursing 


Universitv of Pennsvlvania 


B.S.N., University of Maryland; M.S.N., University of 


ALBERT NACINOVICH (1972) 


Pennsylvania 


Brass 


RICHARD D. TROXEL (1978) 


B.A. in Music Education, Mansfield State College; 


Mathematics 


M. S. in Music Education, Ithaca College 


B.A., Oberlin College; M.A., Indiana University 


MARY L. RUSSELL (1936) 




Piano 


***On leave of absence 1984-85 


M.B., Susquehanna University; M.A., The 




Pennsylvania State University 



lA 



ADJUNCT FACULTY & STAFF 

BROOKE BARRIE (1984) 

Sculpture 

Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of Sculpture 
JOHN L. DAMASKA (1981) 

Medical Technology 

School of Medical Technology, The WilUamsport 

Hospital 
MICHAEL R. J. FELIX (1980) 

Director, County Health Improvement Program 

B.S., Cortland University 
JAMES WALTER HUFFMAN (1984) 

Assistant Technical Director of Arena Theatre 

B.A. in Studio Art, B.A. in Theatre, Bloomsburg 

University 
JON LASH (1984) 

Sculpture 

Johnson A teller Technical Institute of Sculpture 
ANDRZEJ PITYNSKI (1984) 

Sculpture 

Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of Sculpture 
ALBERT J. STUNKARD (1980) 

Director of Institute of Community Health 

B.S., Yale University; M.D., Columbia University 
HERK VAN TONGEREN (1984) 

Sculpture 

Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of Sculpture 
DON K. WEAVER (1981) 

Medical Technology 

School of Medical Technology, The WilUamsport 

Hospital 

MEDICAL STAFF 

FREDERIC C. LECHNER, M.D. 

College Physician 

B.S., Franklin and Marshall College; M.D., Jefferson 

Medical College 
ROBERT S. YASUI, M.D. 

College Surgeon 

M.D., Temple University 
EVELYN L. SEAMAN, R.N. 

College Nurse 

WilUamsport Hospital School of Nursing 
MARY J. VESTERMARK (1977) 

Counselor 

A.B., Oberlin; M.A., Stetson University; Ph.D., 

University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill 


ATHLETICS STAFF 

RALPH AUGUSTINE 


Equipment Manager 


RANDY J. BAKER 

CLARENCE W. BURCH . . . 

ROBERT L. CURRY 

DAVID L. FORTIN 

ROBERT L. GEORGE 

FRANK L. GIRARDI 

C MICHAEL GREEN 


Athletics Trainer 

. . . Men's Basketball Coach 

Assistant in Athletics 

. Assistant Wrestling Coach 
. . Assistant Football Coach 

Football Coach 

.... Assistant Track Coach 


DAVID A. HAIR 

DENNIS E. HAMMOND . . . 
EUGENE HENDERSCHED 
DEBORAH J. HOLMES . . . 

Women'; 

MICHAEL J. HUDOCK . . . 

TERRY B. MANTLE 

JOSEPH G. MARK 

SCOTT R. McLEAN 

J. SCOTT McNeill 


Swimming Coach 

. . Assistant Football Coach 
Golf Coach 


> Tennis & Basketball Coach 
Assistant Basketball Coach 
. .Assistant Football Coach 

Men's Tennis Coach 

. . Assistant Football Coach 
Soccer Coach 


ALAN J. MORGAN 

GARY A. PFAFF . . Women's 

JOHN F PIPER, JR 

ED ROADERMEL 


J-V Basketball Coach 

Assistant Basketball Coach 

Cross Country Coach 

. Assistant Wrestling Coach 
. . . . Assistant Diving Coach 


KEVIN E ROSENSTEEL . . 
W. PATRICK SCHEMERY . 
Track ai 


id Assistant Football Coach 
Field Hockey Coach 


CAROL WATSON 


BUDD WHITEHILL 


Wrestling Coach 


STEVEN R. WISER 


. . Assistant Football Coach 



75 




ADMINISTRATIVE ASSISTANTS 



Randy J. Baker Athletics Trainer 

(B.S., Lock Haven Stale College; M.S., University of Illinois) 

Nancy C. Bariett AV/lnterlibrary Loan Assistant 

Rebecca Bastian Data Entry Clerk 

Robert E. Bay Grounds Foreman 

Emily C. Biichle . .Coordinator Facilities Scheduling/Purchasing 

Joyce A. Billeck Faculty Secretary 

Helen J. Boe TVpist/Clerk Admissions 

Barbara Bowes Bookstore Assistant 

Debra A. Brown Secretary to Registrar 

Pauline Brungard Student Loan Coordinator 

(B.S., Lycoming College) 

Isabel Z. Bryson Secretary, Athletics Office 

Barbara J. Carlin Secretary to 

Dean of Admissions & Financial Aid 

Kathy A. Confair Cashier/Bookkeeper 

Richard L. Cowher Press Operator 

Elizabeth G. Cowles Career Development Secretary 

Patricia Cundiff Systems Analyst 

Mary Dahlgren Admissions Data Entry Assistant 

June L. Evans Secretary, Education Office 

Irene Everdale . .Secretary to Director of Buildings and Grounds 

Robert W. Faus Assistant Press Operator 

Mary M. Fleming Data Analyst, CHIP 

S. Jean Gair Secretary, Music and Art Departments 

Irene V. Gohrig Secretary to Dean of Student Services 

Judith Hart Secretary, Biology and Chemistry Departments 

Diane Hassinger Secretary to Executive 

Director of Institutional Advancement 

Mary C. Hendricks Supervisor of Housekeeping 

Esther L. Henninger . . .Administrative Assistant for Admissions 



Diane C. Hess Secretary, Residence Life Office 

Cheri L. Hessert Secretary, CHIP 

Bernadine G. Hileman Office Services Coordinator 

Phyllis M. Holmes Secretary to President 

Barbara E. Horn Secretary to Athletics Director 

Janet M. Hurlbert Assoc. Instructional Services Librarian 

Judy Knittle Faculty Secretary 

Shirley D. Lloyd Assistant PBX Operator 

Christine A. Mackenzie Administrative Assistant, 

Student Union (SUB) 
Judy F. McConnell . . . Library Ass't/Day Circulation Supervisor 

D. Maxine McCormick Records Clerk and 

Secretary to Assistant Dean of the College 

Doris F. McCoy Data Entry, Alumni 

Christine McCracken Computer Programmer 

Glenn E. McCreary Slide Clerk, Art 

Marilyn Mullings Faculty Secretary 

Phyllis B. Myers Secretary to Director of Alumni Relations 

Marion R. Nyman Secretary to Treasurer 

Kimberly A. Owen Library Assistant 

David W. Poeth . Assistant to Director of Buildings and Grounds 

Rosalie Pfaff Switchboard Operator 

Pearl Ringler Bookstore Assistant 

Sheran L. Swank Facuhy Secretary 

Patricia J. Triaca Library Assistant 

Deborah E. Weaver Damage Assessment Clerk 

Vickie L. Weaver Secretary to Director of Financial Aid 

Geraldine H. Wescott Periodicals Assistant in Library 

Loretta M. Whipkey . .Secretary to Director of Public Relations 

Madlyn Wonderlich Secretary to Dean of the College 

Cheryl A. Yearick Library Assistant 



76 



The Alumni Association 



The Alumni Association of Lycoming College has a 
membership of more than 10,000 men and women. It is 
governed by an executive board consisting of four officers 
and 21 members-at-large, elected through mail ballot by 
the membership of the association. The board also has 
members representing specific geographic areas, the senior 
class president, the student body president, and a represen- 
tative of the last graduating class. The association annually 
designates one alumni representative as a nominee for a 
three-year term on the College board of trustees. The Di- 
rector of Alumni Relations directs the activities of the 
alumni office. The alumni association has the following 
purpose as stated in its constitution: "As an off-campus 
constituency, the association's purpose is to seek ways of 
maintaining an active and mutually beneficial relationship 
between the College and its alumni, utilizing their talents, 
resources and counsel to further the objective and program 
of Lycoming College." 

All former students of Williamsport Dickinson Seminary 
and all former students who have successfully completed 
one year of study at Williamsport Dickinson Junior Col- 
lege or Lycoming College are considered members of the 
association. 

Acting as the representative of alumni on the campus 
and working also with undergraduates, the alumni office is 
responsible for keeping alumni informed and interested in 
the programs, growth, and activities of the College through 
regular publications mailed to all alumni on record. Ar- 
rangements for Homecoming, class reunions, club meet- 
ings, and similar activities are coordinated through this of- 
fice. Through The Lycoming College Annual Giving Fund, 
the alumni office is closely associated with the develop- 
ment program of the College. Communications to the 
alumni association should be addressed to the Office of 
Alumni Relations. 



ALUMNI ASSOCIATION OFFICERS 
AND EXECUTIVE BOARD 

President - Robert V. Haas '58 - Williamsport, PA 
Vice-President for Campus Affairs - Mrs. Nancy Flory 

Spannuth '64 - State College, PA 
Vice-President for Regional Affairs - Donald E. Failor 

'68 - Camp Hill, PA 
Secretary - Mrs. Carolyn Moday Edwards '61 

Williamsport, PA 
Last Retiring President - Kent T. Baldwin '64 

Williamsport, PA 

Representatives-at-Large - 

Term Expires June 1985 

Miss Nancy L. Beecher '76 - West Chester, PA 

Patrick J. Cerillo '77 - Lawrenceville, NJ 



Mrs. Marilyn Phillippy Failor '70 - Camp Hill, PA 
Seth D. Keller '65 - Williamsport, PA 
The Rev. David L. Phillips '63 - Williamsport, PA 
Mrs. Mary Johnson Smith '59 - Williamsport, PA 
Barry G. Yerger '59 - Harrisburg, PA 

Term Expires June 1986 

David G. Argall '80 - Nesquehoning, PA 

Dr. David E. Detwiler '75 - Philadelphia, PA 

Robert J. Glunk '59 - Jersey Shore, PA 

Mrs. Donna Michael Heiney '62 - Hughesville, PA 

Mrs. Patricia MacBride Krauser '68 - Landisville, PA 

Mrs. Mary Landon Russell '33 - Williamsport, PA 

Mrs. Doris Heller Teufel '54 - Williamsport, PA 

Term Expires June 1987 
Romain F. Bastian '61 - Milton, PA 
Miss Cindy L. Bell '82 - E. Stroudsburg, PA 
H. Ridge Canaday, Jr. '66 - Montoursville, PA 
Richard H. Felix '56 - Williamsport, PA 
Mrs. Yvonne Smith Kaiser '64 - Williamsport, PA 
Wayne M. Moffatt '63 - Montoursville, PA 
Mrs. Dorothy Ferrell Sandmeyer '43 & '63 
Montgomery, PA 

Members Serving a One-Year Term 

Student Association of Lycoming College (SALC), 

President - Patricia Ryan '85 
Senior Class President - Patricia Loomis '85 
Class of 1984 Representative - Linda J. Reph '84 - 

Whitehall, PA 

Alumni Representatives to the Board of Trustees 

1985 - Dr. David J. Loomis '61 - Troy, PA 

1986 - Dr. Mary R. Schweikle '63 - Montoursville, PA 

1987 - Hon. Robert W. Edgar '65 - Springfield, PA 



77 



Index 



Academic Advisement 8 

Academic Calendar 68 

Academic Honesty 11 

Academic Honors 12 

Academic Program 5 

Academic Standing 11 

Accounting Curriculum 20 

Accounting-Mathematics (ElM) 21 

Accreditation 4 

Administrative Assistants 76 

Administrative Staff 69 

Admission 60 

Admissions Deposit 62 

Admissions Office 61 

Admission Policy 60 

Admission Standards 60 

Advanced Placement 11 

Advanced Standing by Transfer 60 

Advisory Committees 9 

Health Professions 9 

Legal Professions 9 

Medical Technology 9 

Theological Professions 9 

Allopathic Medicine, Advisement for . . 9 

American Studies (ElM) 21 

Anthropology Curriculum 54 

Application Fee and Deposits 62 

Application Process 60 

Applied Music Requirements 45 

Art Curriculum 22 

Astronomy and Physics Curriculum . . .24 

Athletics Training 50 

Attendance, CIeiss 11 

Audit 15 

Awards 12 

BFA Degree 5 

Biology Curriculum 26 

Board of Trustees 69 

Books and Supplies 62 

BSN Degree 5 

Business Administration Curriculum . . .28 

Calendar, Academic 68 

Campus Facilities 66 

Career Development Services 58 

Chemistry Curriculum 29 

Christian Ministry, Advisement for ... . 9 

Class Attendance 11 

College and the Church 4 

College Directory 69 

College Level Examination Program 

(CLEP) 12 

Community Scholarships 65 

Computer Science Curriculum 42 

Conduct, Standards of 59 

Contents 2 

Contingency Deposits 62 

Cooperative Programs 15 

Engineering 16 

Environmental Studies 16 

Forestry 16 



Medical Technology 

Military Science 

Optometry 

Podiatric Medicine 

Sculpture 

Counseling, Academic 

Counseling, Personal 

Course Credit by Examination 

Course Descriptions 

Criminal Justice (ElM) 

Curriculum 

Damage Charges 

Degree Programs 

Degree Requirements 

Dental School, Advisement for . . . . 

Departmental Honors 

Departmental Majors 

Deposits 

Deposit Refunds 

Distribution Requirements 

English 

Fine Arts 

Foreign Language 

History and Social Science 

Mathematics 

Natural Science 

Philosophy 

Religion 

Early Admission Procedure 

Economics Curriculum 

Education Curriculum 

Education Financing Plans 

Educational Opportunity Grants . . 
Engineering, Cooperative Program 

English Curriculum 

English Requirement 

Entrance Examinations (CEEB) ... 

Entry Fees and Deposits 

Environmental Studies 

Established Interdisciplinary Major 

(EIM) 

Expenses 

Faculty 

Federal Grants and Loans 

Fees 

Financial Aid 

Financial Assistance 

Financial Information 

Fine Arts Requirements 

Foreign Language Requirement . . . 
Foreign Languages and Literatures 

Curriculum 

Forestry, Cooperative Program . . . 

French Curriculum 

General Expenses 

German Curriculum 

Grading System 

Graduation Requirements 

Grants-in-Aid 

Greek Curriculum 



. 16 Health Professions Careers 9 

. 17 Health Services 58 

. 16 Hebrew Curriculum 37 

. 17 History Curriculum 38 

. 17 History of the College 4 

. 8 History Requirements 7 

. 58 Honor Societies 12 

. 1 1 Honors, Academic 12 

.20 Honors, Departmental 14 

.30 Independent Study 14 

.20 Interdisciplinary Majors 7 

. 59 Established Majors (EIM) 7 

. 5 Individual Majors (IIM) 7 

. 5 International Studies 40 

. 9 Internship Programs 14 

. 14 Interviews 60 

. 7 Johnson Atelier 22 

.62 Legal Professions, Advisement for 9 

.62 Literature (EIM) 41 

. 6 Loans 64 

. 6 Location 3 

. 6 London Semester 18 

. 6 Lycoming Scholar Program 18 

. 7 Major 7 

. 6 Admission to 7 

. 6 Departmental 7 

. 6 Interdisciplinary (EIM, IIM) 7 

. 6 Mass Communication (EIM) 41 

.60 Mathematical Sciences 42 

.31 Mathematics Requirements 6 

.32 May Term 15 

, .63 Medical School, Advisement for 9 

, . 64 Medical History 58 

, . 16 Medical Staff 75 

. . 34 Medical Technology 16 

, . 6 Military Science 17 

.11 Ministerial Grants-in-Aid 63 

. .62 Minor 8 

. . 16 Music Curriculum 44 

National Direct Student Loans 

. . 7 (NDSL) 64 

. .62 Natural Science Requirement 6 

. . 70 Near East Culture and Archaeology 

..64 (EIM) 46 

. .62 Non-Payment of Fees Penalty 63 

. . 63 Nursing 46 

. .63 Optometry 16 

. .63 Optometry School, Advisement for ... . 9 

. . 6 Osteopathy School, Advisement for ... 9 

. . 6 Overseas Studies Opportunities 15 

Part-time Student Opportunities 15 

. . 35 Payment of Fees 62 

. . 16 Payments, Partial 62 

..36 Penalty for Non-Payment of Fees 63 

. . 62 Personal Counseling 58 

. .36 Philosophy Curriculum 48 

. . 10 Philosophy Requirement 6 

. . 5 Physical Education Curriculum 50 

. .63 Physics Curriculum 24 

. . 37 Placement Services 58 



78 



Pediatric Medicine, Cooperative 

Program 17 

Political Science Curriculum 50 

Psychology Curriculum 51 

Purpose and Objectives 3 

Reading Improvement Course 58 

Refunds 62 

Registration 9 

Regulations (Standards of Conduct) ... 59 

Religion Curriculum 53 

Religion Requirement 6 

Repeated Courses 10 

Requirements, Distribution 6 

Requirements for Admission 60 

Requirements for Graduation 5 

Reserve Officer Training Corps 

Program (ROTC) 17 

Residence 59 



Residence Halls 59 

Scholarships 63 

Scholarships (ROTC) 65 

Schlpture 22 

Selection Process 60 

Social Science Requirement 7 

Sociology-Anthropology Curriculum ... 54 

Spanish Curriculum 37 

Special Features 14 

Independent Study 14 

Internship Program 14 

May Term 15 

Overseas Studies Opportunities 15 

Standards of Admission 60 

Standards of Conduct 59 

State Grants and Loans 64 

Student Enrichment Semester (SES) ... 17 
Student Records 11 



Student Services 58 

Study Abroad 15 

Summer Session Calendar 68 

Supplemental Educational Opportunity 

Grant (SEOG) 64 

Theatre Curriculum 56 

Capitol Semester 18 

Theological Professions, Advisement . . 9 

Transfer 60 

Trustees 69 

Unit Course System 9 

United Nations Semester 18 

Veterans, Approval 60 

Veterinary School, Advisement for .... 9 

Washington Semester 18 

Withdrawal from College 62 

Work-Study Grants 64 




79 



The general regulations and policies stated in 
this catalog are in effect for the 1984-85 academ- 
ic year. Students beginning their first term at Ly- 
coming College in the fall of 1984 or the spring 
of 1985 are thereafter governed by the policies 
stated in this catalog. Requirements governing a 
student's major are those in effect at the time a 
major is formally declared and officially accept- 
ed by the major department. 

If changes are made in subsequent editions of 
the catalog to either general requirements or ma- 
jor requirements, students may be permitted the 
option of following their original program or a 
subsequent catalog version, but the College al- 
ways reserves the right to determine which re- 
quirements apply. 

If a student interrupts his or her education 
without a leave of absence, the catalog require- 
ments in effect at the time of readmission will 
apply. Students on an approved leave of absence 
retain the same requirements they had when they 
entered, if their leave does not extend beyond 
one year. 

Lycoming College reserves the right to amend 
or change the policies and procedures stated in 
this catalog without prior notice to those who 
may be affected by them. 



••••■••• ■■'•♦•■•• II- .■•>»*.■ II .• ••■>•■ 'il- •■• -T- •':•• • • v li - - (ill ••• .V;. ,•■-..' I ••/.' I'.- *. • • ■ \\. ■■ 

-^-^^^ .. II '^ '^ r^ _ .. ■ ■ 1 '" -^^ » ■ : » 



til '/ ;• '"^'ll •t~-ll' - H.; -.; IJ o? II :-:«-■&.;: I h.::;i| J. iT/ -.vlh---..-|l ^ * : • vU. • ••'•• II., '•' 

■J.|[-.ii;"--^^"iir.d[:/^^4ii--.;::iirk 



.■lk^-^.;;V||;^vlb;:r:.-.:'Hfe.v|i:..-.yv::|tw3 



hv'ii;-v;-^>ik'->ir^K^ 



•\v'vt---M^r.--:-'v'^i^ 



—..■•• • .G 



:^-.||"--l|-M>^-.-||::^l|. :.-.^^-^ll..:.lL .^'^^ 



^ 
Pr^ 



v.-V. 



rzsEzi 









?11 .- -^vA ||- ';;■ II - ; '^^ ; vll-^-ni- >^v^- ^:.ll-^vW II w ^: /:• || ;..- j| •> ■ .-^-^ : || .^-vH .,^; 



7ll:H|.v%-Vlk:4v^^.-V||:M^v-..»:-dl 



. / » »<:. 



•II v^JI: :.. Ilv- 11^/ ;viife.ii.::v>^^ 



J 






1 



.'^". 



a 



v-v.||.>■:||v,::^^HI..Hl 






I 



•.:.*iv> 



EH 



[ 



•■. • -f •• ' 



I vSn^^vII ^vH 



i,vlks..C.li-,MI ^ >;..-lh..||..: 



^M 



lEe 



I 



^•.:;^ -^/^^H'-X-ll-^y :/■:• in 



EE 



■.'i . 



MI.;MI--.:n|U..lir^ 



ll.,!l.: :.:..ll-::dlv^.F!Sin 



^1 ... ..r... } i 



lUYmmmtOLiEGE 

II-. ■ ■• • WiliaiiisiJUi u I'ii iT T ui v w^'^ 






ESK 



lb. ..-.ii-.tt--y^:ijisaK r^}^Lr^ 

• ■•'• ••••*•■ .' ■••■*.' .•■•?•.'■.'....-•• .• ^;-"; •■.•••.••••":••.• I -•:.;.. ■■•••.•.•.. \. yt\ • ■■ 



I 



EM 






I 



11.' • • i' •• 11' Li 



•^v 



-"^•ll:---:----ll^--l 






ll;.JI^-v.:.ir ll.:..n|.::..|[ 



E 



•? •'*• •>. 



I 



EM 



•-■iivn iBaai 



• -.A 



I 



EH 



•■»• 







•^»;a. 



rr 



I 



r^-^ 



EUE 



|>^^'/:%-.ir 



•.^. 



11-ni-^-V-thv-ll ;::-y ^11 



B[.:^/:^.--||v.-|U-: 



EHE 



•'■ '!•^ 



lEI 



B 



.•». • •*•■ 



]E1: 



inzi 



£!!?SS 



-11 v-ll-....-..^- 



nrTiT 



ir II 






TT 



T 



ir !f . 



ii II I 



.. .V.s-.' 



ifejS^I . --